®

Advanced Test Equipment Rentals

E stablished 1981 www.atecorp.com 800-404-ATEC (2832)

Model 199
System DMM Scanner
Instruction Manual

Contains Operating and Servicing Information

 WARRANTY
Keithley Instruments, Inc. warrants tbis product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 1 year from date of
shipment.

Keithley Instruments, Inc. warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment: probes, cables, rechargeable batteries,
diskettes, and documentation.

During the warranty period, we will, at our option, either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective.

To exercise this warranty, write or call your local Keithley representative, or contact Keithley headquarters in Cleveland, Ohio. You will
be given prompt assistance and return instructions. Send the product, transportation prepaid, to the indicated service facility. Repairs
will be made and the product returned, transportation prepaid. Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the origi-
nal warranty period, or at least 90 days.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY

This warranty does not apply to defects resulting froti~product modification without Keitbley’s express written consent, or misuse of
any product ox-part. This warranty also does not apply to fuses, software, non-rechargeable batteries, damage from batteIy leakage, or
problems arising from normal wear or failure to follow instmctions.

THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIE S, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE
BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.

NEITHER KZITHLEY INSTRUMENTS, INC. NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRBCT, INDI-
RECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND
SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS, INC., HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. SUCH EXCLUDED DAMAGES SHALL INCLUDE, BUT AR!? NOT LIMITED TO: COSTS OF REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION, LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON, OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY.
Model 199 System DMM Scanner
Instruction Manual

0 1988, Keith& Instruments, Inc

Test Instrumentation Group
All rights reserved.
Cleveland, Ohio, U.S.A.
July 1987, Fourth Printing
Document Number: 199-901-01 Rev. D
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following safety precautions should be observed before operating the Model 199.

This instrument is intended for use by qualified ~personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar
with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury. Read over the manual carefully before operating
this instrument.

Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present at the instrument’s input. The American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 3OV rms or
42.4V peak are present. A good safety practice is to expect that a hazardous voltage is present in any unknown
circuit before measuring.

Inspect the test leads for possible wear, cracks or breaks before each use. If any defects are found, replace
the test leads.

For optimum safety do not touch the test leads or the instrument while power is applied to the circuit under
test. Turn the power off and discharge all capacitors, before connecting or disconnecting the instrument.
Always disconnect all unused test leads from the instrument.

Do not touch any object which could provide a current path to the common side of the ,+cuit under test
or power line (earth) ground. Always make measurements with dry hands while standmg on a dry, in-
sulated surface, capable of withstanding the voltage being measured.

Exercise extreme safety when~ testing high energy power circuits (AC line or mains, etc). Refer to the High
Energy Circuit Safety Precautions found in paragraph 2.6 (Basic Measurements).

Do not exceed the instrument’s maximum allowable input as defined in the~specifications and operation
section.
 cw%a wi) sdw 3a
;., ,,
 MAXIMUM READING RATES (Readings/Second)’ STORAGE & SCANNING CAPABILITIES

SO&Reading Memory: Stores reading, range, and

scanner channel.
Trigger: One shot or continuous from front pane,,
IEEE.488 bus. and rear panel BNC.
Programmable Reading Interval: 15ms to 999.999s.
Programmable Trigger Delay: Ims to 999.9995.

WITH MODEL 1992 &CHANNEL SCANNER

Pmgmmmable Configuration: t or 4-pole.
Fmgrammable Channel Limit: 1 to 8.
Pmgnmmable Scanning Moder: Manual, step,
and scan.
Ratio: Channels 2 thmugh 8 referenced to Channel 1.

IEEE-488 BUS IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL

MULTILINE COMMANDS: DCL, LLO. SDC, GET, GTL, MAXIMUM READING: 302,999 cmmts in SK-digit mode.
UNT, UNL, SPE. SPD.
CONNECTORS: Measurement: Switch selectable front or
UNlLiNE COMMANDS: IFC, REN, EOI, SRQ. ATN. rear, safety jacks. DigitaL TRIGGER input and METER
INTERFACE FUNCIlONS: SHl, AHI, T6, TFQ, L4, LEO, COMPLET!? output on rear panel, BNCr.
SRl, RLI. PPO, DCl, DTl, CD. El. WARMUP: 2 hours to rated accuracy.
All front pane, functions and programs are available over
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT ,04-18’C & 28’-50’0:
the IEEE-488 bus, in addition to Status, Swice Request, Out-
c t(O.1 x applicable accuracy sp&fication)l°C.
put Format, EOI, Trigger, Terminator, Display Message, and
Non-Volatile TRANSLATOR. ISOLATION: Input LO to IEEE LO or power line ground:
IEEE-488 address is programmable from the front panel. 5wV peak. 5 x IO’ V-Hz maximum. > lo90 paralleled by
_ ,I
4wpF.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: O”-5O”C, 80% re,ativ&
MODEL 1992 SCANNER OPTION humidity up to 35°C; linearly derate 3% RH/‘C, 35”.M”C
(0%40% RH up to 28OC on 300MI-i range).
CONTACT CONFIGURATION: 8-channel 2-p&, or STORAGE ENVIRONMENT: -2Y to +WC.
4channel 4pole.
POWER: IOS-125V or ZlC-25OV, rear panel switch selected,
CONTACT POTENTIAL: <lpV per contact pair. 5oH.z or MIHz, ZOVA maximum. 9UllOV and 180-ZOV MF
MAXIMUM SWITCHING RATE: 40 channels/second, in- sions available upon request.
cluding Model 199 4’/r-digit DCV reading time.
DIMENSIONS, WSIGKT: 90mm high x 220mm wide x
CONNECTOR TWE: Quick disconnect screw ~y$inaIS, X’?~ 33hm deep (3% in. x 81 in. x 12% in.). Net weight 3kg
AWG maximum wire size. (6 lbs., 8 oz.).
MAXIMUM SIGNAL LEVEL: 200” peak, lM)mA, resistive ACCESSORlES SUPPLIED: Model ,751 Safety Test Leads,
load.
Instruction Manual.
CONTACT LIFE: 210’ operations (at maximum signal
ACCESSORlES AVAILABLE:
level); >I@ operations (cold switching).
Model 1992: B-Channel Scanner
CONTACT RESISTANCE: <Xl. Quick Disconnect Scanner Conn&tor Kit
Model 1993:
ISOLATION BETWEEN ANY TWO TERMINAL5 >lO% Model 199&l: Single Fixed Rack Mounting Kit
<75pF. Model 1998-2: Dual Fixed Rack Mounting Kit
lSOLATION BETWEEN ANY TERMlNAL AND EARTH: Model 1651: SO>Ampere Shunt
> 10% < 15OpF. Model 1681: Clip-On Test Lead Set
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 35oV peak between any ter- Model 1682A: RF Probe
mhaf and earth. Model 1685: Clamp-On Curem Probe
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE Model 1751: General Purwse Test Leads
BETWEEN ANY TWO TERMINALS: 2OOV peak. Model 1754: Universal T&t Lead Kit
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE BEI’WEEN ANYTERMINAL AND Mode, 5806: Kelvin Clip Leads
MODEL 19; INPUT Lo: 2oOV peak. Model 7W7-1: Shielded IEEE-488 Cable. Im
DIMENSIOhi; WEIGHT: 25mm hieh x 13Omm wide x Model 7007-2: Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 2m
170mm deep (% in. x 5 in. x 6% ic). Adds 0.3kg (8 0~) Model 7008-3: IEEE-488 Cable, 0.9m (3 ft.)
to Model 199. Model 7008.6: IEEE-488 Cable, 1.8m (6 ft.)

specifications
+ect to changewithout “otke.
199 Front Panel Operation
TRIG SETUP STORE

SHIFT/TRIG SETUP to enternwnu. - SHIFT/STORE to enter data store.

* SIZE = 1 to 500, or SIZE = 000 for wrap around.
NEXT to scroll to next menu option.
* NEXT to exit size select.
CONTINUOUS: Reading, scanning, and storing - TRIGGER to initiate storage.
r rates contmlled by INTERVAL.
* Any function key to cancel storage.
Trigger A:’
- RCL flashes when data store is full.
ONE SHcrT.

DELAY Osec to 999.999sec

RECALL
SELECT OFF: Interval 2I75msec. depending on
r other programmed parameters.
INTERVAL A/W * SHIFURECALL to enter recall.
SELECT ON: User-pmgrammed interval (Ismsec to
L 999.9994.
* NEXT to view data at displayed location.
* A or V to scroll through locations.
* RECALL again to select desired location. ,,, ~,,,,,, ,,
- NEXT to display data.
DMM SETUP - NEXT to exit recall mode.

SHIFUDMM SETUP to enter menu.

ERROR MESSAGES
NEXT to scroll to next menu option,
REV Displays current software revision level.
UNCAL EEPROM failure on power up
MUX OFF: Turns off autocal mufir% for faster OVERFL OWTa”ge
reading rates. TRIGGER OVERRUN Unit triggered while processing reading.
MUX INTERVAL OVERRUN Interval too short for selected configuration.
MUX ON: Recommended for best accuracy. AC OI’KY dB selected with unit not in ACV or ACA.
NO RANGE Pressing range button in dB.
IEEE Use numeric keys to program IEEE-488 ptimary ad- CAL LOCKED Calibration locked out when calibmtine
dress (O-30). CONFIiCT Unit in invalid state when calibrating &.,
autorange).
FREQ=SOHZ. Line Frequency. NO DATA Entering recall with no data stored
FREQ NO SCANNER Scanner not installed.
FREQ=60HZ. Line frequency.

SAVE YES: Saves present configuration.

SAW TYPICAL 5% DIGIT CONVERSION TIMES
SAVE NO

LEDS ON: Test front panel LEDs and annunciators. MUX ON, DCV, ACV, AU: 1lOmsec (U3msec)
LEDS MUX OFF: Z&nsec (33msec)
LEDS OFF MUX ON, OHMS, 3ookn range and lower: 1lOmsec (l33msec)
MUX OFF: 63msec (76msec)
DEBUG YES: Enter troubleshooting mode.
(Times in parenthesis are for 50Hz operation)
DEBUG
DEBUG NO

RESET YES: Returns unit to factory default TYPICAL AUTORANGING TIMES

configuration.
NSET
RESET NO DCV, DCA 35amsec
ACV, ACA 1.4sec
OHMS (3OOkn range and
lower, 500msec
ONE-SH(TT OPERATION
(Tffes shown are to coIIeCt range and do not include conversion times for
final reading.)
In the oneshot trigger mode, each reading consists of multiple conver-
sions to fill the Running Average User Filter (30 canvenions), or the Run-
ning Average Internal Filter (5%d only, varies by ranges and function--
see manual). For this reason, trigger-to-reading time could be several
seconds, depending on iiltering. When filters are off (‘TO” command wer
the bus can be SAvEd), readings are made up of only one conversion.
Scanner Operation
SCANNER OPERATION NOTES

l When using the sc.mner with STEP or SCAN switching, the DMM wi!J
takereading~oneachcharmel ssifit were in&one-shot mode whether
pmgmmmed to CONTlNUOUS or ONE SHOT:

r 2 POLE -Conversions are automatically synchronized to channel closures.

POLE A/T Channels will not close in the middle of conversions.
4 POLE -Any programmed DELAY is inserted between channel closure and
start of conversion (with scanner disabled, DELAY is inserted bet-
MANUAL: A!lows channel to be manuaJly closed ween trigger and start of conversion).
with SCANNER key. -Readings on each channel consist of multiple conversions to fill the
;
Mode A/V STEP: lnaements one channel perintenral or trigger, Running Average User Filter (30 conversions), 01 Running Average

L SCAN: Scans one set of channels per interval or trig-

ger (minimum time between channels).
Internal Filter when active (51hd only, varies by range and function;
see manual).

*L
* Scanner switching is break-before-make. The time required to change
ON: Channels 2 through 8 referenced to channel 1. channels is approximately 17rwc. which includes break-before-make
RATIO relay time settling time.
L OFF l When using the scanner with ACV or ACA, a DELAY time must be
l Ratio operates only on a fixed range. programmed to accomcdate AC converter settling time (typically >lsec).
l Range changes will restart at channel 1. See Model 199 sp&fications.
l In MANUAL, at least one reading must be taken on channel 1 before at- *The scanner operates with the set of insirument parameters program-
tempting to display ratio on channels Z-8. med prior to stat of scanning. Chanpinp any of these parameters, range
function, filter, etc., during scanning will restart the scanner at than-
~11. Use autorange if range changes are required while scanning.

ACTIVATING THE SCANNER

USING SCANNER WITH DATA STORE
SCANNER followed by number (%3) activates the scanner.
- In MANUAL, channel number selects channel to be dosed.
l Select desired scanner parameters and interval.
l In STEP or SCAN, number selects channel limits and starts scanning
process. l Activate scanning (SCANNER, channel limit).
- Program data store size.
. TRIGGER vd, start data store and automatically restart scanning at than-
nel 1 synchronized with data store location 1.
STOPPING THE SCANNER (openingau aam&)

SCANNER followed by “0’: EXAMPLE’ OF FAST SCANNING

1. Select 3V DC range and function, 4%-d@ resolution, FLTR off.

DETERMINING SCANNING INTERVAL 2. Program ONE SHOT trigger.
3. Select SCAN mode.
- scanning
without
s&dinginterval 4. Select SCANNER ‘8” to set limit to 8.
5. Use TRIGGER to initiate a scan of the set of eight channels.
--Program INTERVAL SELECT to OFF.
-Interval is sl75msec. depending on other selected parameters.
--INTERVAL OVERRUN message wi!J not be displayed.
l Mienurn Interval Tiie Calculation
-Interval time is the sum oE
1. (conversions per channel) x (conversion time)
2. Programmed DELAY time per channel
3. Break-before-make time (17msec)
4. Auto range time (if used)
--In !XEP mode, c&l&d time above is the INTERVAL setting.
-In SCAN mode, (sum of l-4) x (number channels scanned) is the
minimum interval setting.
199 IEEE-488 Programming
DEVICE-DEPENDENT COMMANDS

EXECUTE CALIBRATION
X Execute other device-dependent commands co Calibrate first point using value (V)
Calibrate second point using r&e (V)
FUNCTION 2 Cd&rate third point using value (V)
Fo DC volts
R AC volts DEFAULT CONDITIONS
F2 Ohms Lo Restore factory default conditions and save (Ll)
53 DC current L* Saw present machine states as default conditions
AC current
E ACV dB DATA FORMAT
F6 ACA dB GO Reading with prefix.
Gl Reading without prefu.
RANGE G2 Reading and buffer location with prefix.
A’3 ACA G3 Reading and buffer I&ion without prefix.
DCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms dB dB G4 Readingand channel with prefix.
Ro Auto Auto Auto Auto
Auto Auto Auto G5 Reading and channel without prefix.
3OOmV3WmV 3OmA 3OmA 300d ‘Auto A& G6 Reading, buffer location, and channel with prefix
s 3V 3V 3A 3A 3kl-i Auto Auto G7 Reading, buffer location, and channel without
3.4 3Okn Auto Auto prefix
R3 306’ 3OV 3A
R4 300V 300V 3A 3.4 3OOM Auto Auto
3oOV 30%’ 3A 3.4 3Mn Auto Auto SRQ
z 3mv 3wv 3A 3A 30MR Auto Auto MO Disable
R7 3OOV 3wV 3A 3A 3OOMO Auto Auto Ml Reading overflow
M2 Data stcre full
ZERO M4 Data store half full
Zero disabled MB Reading done
Zero enabled Ml6 Ready
Zero enabled using a zero value (V) M32 Fmx

FILTER EOI AND BUS HOLD-OFF

PO Internal and front panel filter disabled Ko Enable EOI and bus hold-off on X
Pl Internal filter enabled Disable SO,, enable bus hold-off on X
P2 Front panel filter enabled E Enable EOI, disable bus hold-off on X
K3 Disable both EOI and bus hold-off on X
RATE
so 4%digit resolution, 2.59msec integration period TERMINATOR
5%digit resolution, lie cycle integration
MI CR LF
Sl
(16.67msec. 6OHz; 2Omsec, 50Hz) ii LFCR
Y2
TRIGGER MODE n
m Continuouson Talk
n One-shot on Talk STATUS
T2 Continuous on GET UO Send machine status word
T3 One-shot on GE? Ul Send error conditions
T4 co”tin”o”s on x uz Send Translator word list
T5 One-shot on X u3 Send buffer size
T6 Continuous on External Trigger u4 Send current value of ‘?I’
T7 One-shot on External Trigger u5 Send input switch status (front/rear)

READING MODE MULTIPLEX

BO Readings from AID converter A0 AukKzd multiplez disabled
Individual readings from data store Al Auto/Cal multiplex enabled
z All readings from data stwe (buffer dump)
DELAY
DATA STORE SIZE Wll n=delay period in milliseconds, (Omsecto
IO Wrap around data store mode 999999msec)
h Data store of n (n=I to 500)
SELFTEST
INTERVAL JO Test, ROM, RAM, E?‘ROM
Q’J Default interval, l75msec (SELECT OFF)
n=intwval in milliseconds (l5msec to HIT BUTTON
Qn Hit front pane, button number n
999999msec) HKl

VALUE DISPLAY
v*nn.nnnn or Calibration value, zzo value Da Display up to 10 character message. a=character
v*n.nnnnnrtE+n D Cancel display made
SCANNER PROGRAMMING COMMANDS STATUS WORD FORMATS

SCANNER SETUP UO Status Word Format

MANUAL
NO Au channelsopen
Z-pole 4-p&
Nl 1
NZ :.
N3 3
N4 4
N5 CHAN4MAXERROR
N6 6 CHAN4MAXERROR
N7 7 CHAN4MAXERROR Ul Status Word Format
N8 8 CHAN4MAXFRROR
NY CHANgMAXERXOR CHAN4MAXERXOR
!5lXP
NlO Stop scan, all channels open
Z-Pole Limit 4Pole Limit
Nil 1 1
NE2 2
Nl3 z
N14 4 :
Nl.5 5 CHAN4MAXERROR
N16 6 CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
Nl7 CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
NT3 i CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
N19 CHAN 8 MAX ERROR CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
SCAN
L
N20 Stop scan, all channels open
Z-Pole Limit 4Pole Limit
U2: Returns Translator word list.
N21 1 1
N22 2 U3: Returns data store size (SZE = CCQ.
NW 3
U4: Returns present value programmed with V command in floating
N24 4
p0illt.
N25 CHAN4MAXRRROR
N26 CHAN4MAXERROR u5: Returns INPLJT switch status (O=fmnt, l=rear).
CHAN4MAXERROR
CHAN4MAXERROR

POLE/RATIO SRQ MASK AND STATUS BYTE FORMAT

Z-pole
E 4-p&
02 Z-pole ratio
03 4-p& ratio

SCAN INTERVAL
QO Default 175msec interval
(SELECI OFF)
Qn n=tnterval in msec
(15.999999mxc)

TRIGGER DELAY*
wn n=delay in msec
(O-999999msec)
*Delay to be used as channel settling time.

TRANSLATOR
DATA FORMAT
Translator Words and Characters

-miis.latorword
or character Description
ALIAS Defmes Translator words.
Terminates definition string.
B Wildcard definition character.
NEW Enabled Translator.
OLD Disables Translator.
SAVE Saves Translator words as power-up default.
LIST Returns list of Translator words.
FORGET Purges Translator words from memory
 Table Of Contents

SECTION l-General Information

1.1 INT?““-‘^“’
INTRODUCTION ~._~. . ._.~__~__~
1.2 FE.4
FEATURES .~. _~...t . _ _.L_ ___~_-. ^_ __
1.3 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . ., t..,,. . . I
1.4 MANUAL ADDENDA
AI _. . . _ __ _ .,_,_~.,I ,.,_” I . 1. AU._ a i”..?/V,“7,,_.i .l” ,asic _:_ _~;~i _:_ :‘.,?. _ _ . “ ‘.‘.;.:~:‘. I :‘;..I; .’ ,1-l

1.5 SAFETY SYMBOLS AND TERMS TEE _ _. .~. _zx~_~ . . iij.~.;ii~.i~i__i .__...-.. :.:.; _...: ..__.__._ l-1
1.6 SPECIFICATIONS.. . . t. _ _~.~.-... . . . . . _. .. .. ._. . _. , l-1
1.7 INSPECTION ._._........_... ;.._....,.. _.._ . . . ._................... _ . . . . . . ~..;.;:~..:~z::::.. l-2
1.8 USING THE MODEL 199 MANUAL .~~.~~.~. - _.r.._ . . . . . . . . . ___. -~. . .._I. .: . . --. . -_ . .,. . i . . i l-2
1.9 GETTING STARTED .‘:~.~. _:. <,-I.. _ a. _. i .~. . _~._. _ .,._~_,__ j .,. . . . . i.. , i.. .,,_, I,_ .,_~i : l-2
1.10 ACCESSORIES . . . _ __.__ ._ _)__r,1513~1--11111111~1*.“,_ ..,i I ,i #i ,:. _~Lz”1_: :. . .,. _ _. . . ~. .I . l-2

SECTION 2-Basic DMM Operation

2.1 INTRODUCTION .......... I. ......... ,A_..-ia..,u..,, ...... .‘. ................... .: .. 1. .:.~. ...... ~;~.; 2-l
2.2 POWER UF PROCEDURE ............ ^....................................................... .; ....... 2-l
2.2.1 LinePower ..................... ._ ........ i.~. ... :...~;...i ...... rr;:. ............. . “.*.~.;...~.;.;.;: 2-l
2.22 PowerUpSequence .......... .~.,..~...~.,; ... .... _ ..... . ___I____. .._- .................. ;.~;.~.:::;~ ..... 2-l
2.2.3 Default Conditions .............. _ _ ...... .~.-...~.~. .,~..‘.~.,, .,,&,.~~. i .... ‘: L’.... I. ..... I ........... ., ...... 2-l
2.3 FRONT PANEL FAMILIARIZAXTON ................................................ ..i. 2 ... ___~____ ____ ... 23
23.1 Display and Indicators .............. _,-_-l __..-- ........................... : ...................... 2-3
2.3.2 Power Switch ............. ..___ ...... __,_.i_.~ _____’ .__.. ....................................... :__ 2-4
2.3.3 Controls ................. ._.,_ .., ....... ,_.=_lsIx “,,_irl_ .. . ..v.r j __._;_ ........................ .__. .. .,.. .:~.~.. ____, 2-4
2.3.4 CAL LOCK Switch ................... ..... j_~i~~~w~~iJ.. .. .. Ibjl ; ..:;~;~. . ..~_ . .~-,; _I~ ..l’l.:~:~.. ‘.‘.‘.‘:: . ..::“. . :::: 2-5
2.3.5 INPUTSwitch.. ...................... _. .......... ~.._~..l .................. +.-~...- .: ____.: ........ .,2-5 I,
2.3.6 CutintInjxtFuse.. ............................... i_.~,__~_:~>...... :~~
.......... i~__~ .. .._ ......... 2-5
2.3.7 Input Ten&naIs . . ..___.__..._.._ A_,i_i_i___ ___...._..._... ~.i ,..., a.. . .._.~..._._. j ._~__..___ a,__._. 2-5
2.4 REARPANELFAMILIARIZQION ._._.I ~__.~_____~_.... ~_~. . .._.... . ..ii ._._. _ .,..,, - .____.___ L._.._. 2-5
2.4.1 Connectors and Terminals . ^ t . _ . .._ __ . I _ _ _,. __ i .~. .,i . ,. . : , i, .,I . _ _ . . ~.‘;_ _ _ _ _ ) j _ _ 2-6
2.4.2 Line Voltage Aspects .. __, a,\._...,+ >.. _.... ___. . . . :. . .__. _. __ _. _____ ___. _. 2-6
24.3 IEEE-488 Connector _ __ _~. .~._ r_. . I~.. _ _ s. _. ~. _ _~_._ _.i. . i _.‘,.i ii,. ,_. . . 2:. _,_,.. ~ .‘. _~i_. 2-6
2.4.4 Scanner Card Slot. _~_ t .._~1 _~__I;.~_. . ,~i __ ,,.i v,i,:v: _,_,.L<.i’: t _ _ _ iri r.t*‘.. . _“. .‘: _. 2-6
2.5 DISPLAY MESSAGES . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .:. . _,_,__ ..,_,_f_. . . .. I.,..:a,c_. _. .~.. . . .,. _ __ _ _ _ _ _. . . 2-6
2.6~ BASICMEAS-iJREMENTS .__...__._..._: _.__I _.._..____... :..I _..._..._^ ~____...___ __.____I . . . ..I____ 2-7
2.6.1 WarmUpperiod .._..__ __~___._, j ..,._~_.~.._,e,L _..._,.. *a.~._._. - ..__ ~‘,..~~-.~-~ . . ~..:~;;;..~...;~. _____ 2-7
2.6.2 Zero . . . . .._ __...______ _.__i_._:iil.jv/i ,.__.: ____ _....___ ;.;.‘.:r;~..r.=...“~-.‘....:.~.i ._____ ~.:.:~;:~:;‘..‘2-7
2.43 FiIterandResolution .._.. __.r____-_ _______.. _ __._..._..._ _,..~._..._ __ _.... __~______._______.... 2-9~
2.6.4 DC Voltage Measurements _~. . . . ._ .__~______ I_~ .“..__. ~ji~~ii._ j..L,l.~iii_.. ___ _. i.,L-.‘l. _. . :.. 2-10
2.6.5 Low-Level Measurement Considerations _ _. _ ... . .~.. . _ _ . .._ . I . _ . _ _,. _ 2-10
2.6.6 Resistance Measurements _ . . . . __ _ . _ . _. . _ _,__i .,. . . . . . _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . 2-11
2.6.7 TRMS AC Voltage Measurements . . _~. . . . _ . . . . _. . .,. _.A-_‘. _ . . .~__ _~. ~2-12
2.68 Current Measurements (DC OTTRMS AC) :. ., _. __ _ . _ . . _ . _ _- _ _ _.. _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . 2-I2
2.6.9 dBMeasurements .._._...____ I.~__._._ ____. _.“_+, ,.L...._____ c_.j __... in..__ ;__l~ __.____~....__,____ 2-13
2.6.10 TRMSConsiderations . .._......__._ t_ ~_..._..__,._..__...._. r.-...~..i ___...... ,I ______.__; ._._ ~ 2-14
2.6.11 dB Applications . .~.. . _ _. . . .,__ __,_. . . . . _ _. _. _ _~_~_~. _-__ __ . _ ._ _ _ ___ _. . .~__,__~.. .~_ . ,. . 2-16
2.7 DMM SETUp PROGRAMS _ . ,_.~1l~=I~~f~. _ _ _. . _.:.I. _. i. .~. .~>_____. _. . _: :~. . ;. _ . . _~._ _; 2-16
2.7.1 SoftwareRevisionLeveI ._...._.___ __._~ _._,____ I,_ _......_._._.... i_i,.i ._...... 1 .__...____._ :.. 2-17
2.7.2 Multiplexer, AutoZeroiCal ..______ ~..~._____~__.._._.. _ __.._ L.__- L...~ _,.,_,.,. . ..__ i ___. ~...~_.. ____. 2-17

i
 1.7.3 IEEE-488 Primary Address Programming. ............................................... . .... ._ . .. 2-17
!.7.4 LineFrequency.. ....... ~:.: . ..< .......... ,_,......... . ............. ;-... z= ......... ;..:.r-x.;; ...... ;;.,~2-18
!.%5 save Setup ................ ._~_.... ... ._~_,........ _~.. _. . * .~._ “_.~..,..^..... i,_ >., . ,.___ ... I,. . .i#i . -,. _‘,,.li 2-18
!.7.6 LEDTest ............................... i__~__.,-.I_ .. .._.~..z.< . ,r_.,d., ......... i~.J<.i __ . ..!. ..... ;...;L..,2-19
!.7.7 Debug.. ............................... .._..._~ ___.___.__, . .,._~..r..~...; ...... i ..... .;.....;..ii. .A___ .a-19
L.7.8 Reset.. ....................... I .... L........... i.~. ... r- ___.; .... -~+ . ..< ......... :l-.‘;.~-~: ____ :..,% l9
2.8 FRONT PANELTRIGGERING ..‘.~:~..:......~.-.t..~..~.....~~~.~;,., . * -8,; -,A1_rj ,>,,>,,i . _......... 2%:: ;~_I L.,.,. ,.‘. : J -!.‘&-lg
2.8.1 Trigger Mode Selection .............. _,__,,L ,.,__ _,,_.,.......... --. .............. ._. .................. _j~:__ 2-19
2.8.2 TriggeT Sources ....... : ........ .,_~...... .~:. .; ......... __~_, ..... _ ................ __ ........... 2-20
2.8.3 ,Trigger Delay ................... :_. e ‘v, ,‘:~:,‘:*~‘s~:~,“‘.~:u.) ..... i,._ ,_..~.LI’::.z ... 1 :‘.u~/... i .... ‘.,...... .zz. :‘,.i_ :I :‘Y,... “2-20
2.8.4 Reading Interval ......... .,...... _f __.. _._,_ ..i. ..... _.,i_,,i.. _ . _,. .,,... I, i ,-,I,,;. ,_,_,, . w_; .. ,_ 7: .I. :‘.I ,I .. .‘. ... 2-20
2.8.5 Trigger Programming Examples ....... I. .................. .~j.r.. . .. &. ;_ : .., ii ... >~.,;. ~..i.;~~~-.~..; ._,_,11,2-21
2.9 EXTERNAL TRIGGERING. ..... ~__~.~.~t~__~_ .___ _~.... ~.~~/~ .... ‘.l.~l...‘. ....... ....... ;..i.:..‘..~_~.i.~i. ‘2-U
2.9.1 External Trigger. ................. __ .. .~.:.,I:.:,.~. .... _: ................ , ............... i ...... i.................
2.9.2 Meter Complete ..................... ~____iY_~.iii.i_j~i~i_~i~_~__~jj_~iii~~~:I~_~~._.L~i_~ .... I,.--.~-~,~:-~r,.‘.:.l,~r.,2-22
2.10 D.QA STORE .................... __ .... _ ii_ ..,Ii <,w,tis.i,.: ..... : _ ..... > i .+. i p.~i.......... .i :_ ... ,A.. .,., .. 2-22
2.10.1 StoringDataatProgrammedIntervals ......... ~.~..~rl._~_ ......... ~~...i~.__~. ..... ,.t_.-i.,:i:,.,_,j....i .l 2-22
2.102 Triggeri?g One-s&t Readings into Data Store .......................... _~_~_, .t. _,_. __ ‘,....,‘-...~ -. ....... Z-3
2.10.3 Recalling Data .................... ., ........ _,.............. __ .. .,..,.... _ ........... ._ . _: _,_....... 2-23
2.11 SCz4NNE.R OPERATION (WITH OrrION 1942)’ .. :~;. : : .... 1 .... _ .. 11 _~_... i .... i ,>.> _,/u,./j,/ . j ..,.. ,>. i_:.. ,224
2.11.1 ScannerConnections...~ ............................. _~.. .._...._. ~_~~........... _._ .............. b,d.,2-24
2.11.2 Scanner Display Format ....... ^~_ .......... ., .. _, ., . ; .,,_... j : .. :‘. I :,.‘~..:.~‘.‘.:I .... _,_.. :I’.‘,..:.:. .., .. _;;_ ..2-30
2.113 Pole Mode Programming. ............ .,.,__ ~,IL.~.I-z,~~ ., .... ..~jli,Y~j,_lY,....~. ... i CL/, i :_ -~-,-.‘~:.‘.Y::~.‘.‘:. :X 2-30
2.11.4 RatioMode.. ............. ................~ ....... _,I.II,_., . -I .,..., ;_.,._~ ........ . .................. :.;2-30
2X.5 Reading Interval ..................................... .~L........ ,_,,._ .............. .___I.: ..... ~_:____~._ 2-30
2.11.6 Scan Limit .................... I .. j ... ,_i zii; ., . .pYYi..rpz,, ..... _ . 1. ‘~r~.:.:;:.r::.:_‘: 1’. i :. . I I . L:‘:‘.‘.:L.... ‘_?~I ‘1:,,2-31
2.11.7 Manual Channel Mode.. ........ .._. ~__~ ........................... i .... L:~...... :_~_,_~ .... ....... 2-31
2X.8 Step Mode Operation .......... I ......... ...~.ii. ... .._. ....................... ;_ . _.- _: ..‘: ... i .. 2-32
2.11.9 Sane’ Mode Operation .......... ., ........ _,l.il_,_ _,-.__ . I .... _i,.~-__, . _.-~.i_,L1._,j,i,_,__~.~_ .... i_ _,:> .‘.:.... 2: . 2-33
2.11.10 Using Data Store with the Scanner.. .......... ................. I~__L.... A~_ ...... ~..I..j..,I..i,...ij. ,2-34
2.11.11 A Practical Scanner Application: Amplifier Testing .......... __ .... .~-__ .......... __....... _ . ._ .. 235
2.xi2 Lw+level Measurement Considerations ............. _ ..... , ................. ,*,,................... 2-37
2.ll.13~ Using the Scanner with Other Instrumentation ............. .,_. _................................ ., . 2-37
2.11.14 Scanner Delay.. ......................................................... ~__* ..................... 2-38
2.11.15 Using Filtering with the Scam-w ....................... , ......... ii~ .... i .. ‘. _,..; .~. ., ..... ;-_._,__....... :;,:.2-38
2.X16 Minimum Scan Interval Ties. ... ,._.__.” ... ._.. ‘ ,.__., i.,il_ ,., i‘~“~_~~~” ___,1L.-‘,--,-IL.,i,~~~~..~~:..,...111’--.-2~ .

SECTION 3-IEEE-488 Programming

3.1 INTRODUCTION ............... .._ .......... L,l_ii_i ............ :_:__/ ..__...__._ ..... :i..:..:.e..;-.r. 3-l
3.2 A SHORTCUT TO IEEE-488 OPERATION. ........... _.......... _,I.,_.... ..e..u .. .,_ <... ..A... _._..L.....~ ... >~.‘:z.... 3-l
3.3 BUSCO~NNECTIONS ............................... .............................. ___., ......... 3-4
3.4 INTERFACEFUNCTIONCODES ......... _ __I__._ ..... .. _ .... ~v.__.~ ...... ~._.~,~___._.r ..... . . . ........ ..~3- 5
3.5 PRIMARY ADDRESS SELECTION ....... _................... _.,_ . _ ... __ ... 1,_,_.................. ., 3-6
3.6 CONTROLLERPROGRAh4MING.. ....... ~.I.~.~____................................ ... _._,____(_ . .__, 3-6
3.61 CotitroIIer Handler Software ........ .., ............................................. ..~_~_~._~._ .... - ... 3-7
3.6.2 ... BASIC Interface Programming Statements ............................... __ .. _ .... .__ ......... _._ 31
3.7 FRONT PANEL ASPECTS OF IEEE-488 OPERATION. ..................................... -. ...... 3-7
3.7.1 FrontPanelEnorMessages .......................................................... i...~ ......... ~3-7
3.7.2 IEEE-488 REMOTE Indicator and LOCAL Key .................................................. 3-9
3.8 GENERAL BUS COMMAND PROGRAMMING .................. _,i,. ................... -. ....... 3-10
3.8.1 REN(RemoteEnabIe) ............... _,.......................................................... 3~10
3.8.2 IFC (InterfaceClear) .................. . ........... ____ _______,_,___ .............. _&_~ ........ _,._,i, ..... . 3-10
3.8.3 LLO (Local Lockout) ...................... i .............. _ .... ., . _ ............................. 3-11
3.8.4 GTL(GoToLxaI) .......................... ._,,__,1.~_,___ ____: ...... pi............... ;.:A.-.~. ..... 3-11
3.8.5 DCL (Device Clear) .................. ..c ... , . ._, ..... -__ _,__. ______ .............................. 3-11

ii
3.8.6 SDC (Selective Device Clear) ........... _ _ ....... : ........... _,.. _,_................... : ..... _ ... _ .. 3-12
3.8.7 GET (Group Execute Trigger) ................................. _ .. _. ............ _. .......... , ... 3-12
3.88 SerialPoJIiig(SPE,SPD) ...................... .._. ______ I .._._.._ ... _._._.._ ........... _ .._ _ ... ~..__. 3-W
3.9 DEVICE-DEPENDE&T COMMAND PROGRAMMING .................... ._ ...................... 3-13
3.9.1 Exe&e(X) ........................... ::...: .... ,_____ .................. _. ........................ 3-16
3.92 Fumtion (F). ..... ..~_.._ ...... I..._ ... ~___..................................... .._ .._ _ .......... 3-16
3.9.3 Range(R). .................. ~..~_-.~...~_ .... _ ................................................ 3-16 ~‘~~~1
3.9.4 Zero(Z) .............................. ~_. .............. __~:~< ................................ :?_ ... 3-17 ,,,,
3.9.5 Filter (I’). ................... ._~__.~_ ._~.~..~_...._. _. ....... _ ............................. , ............ 3-17
3.%6 Rate (S) ..................... ..; ....... ~,_,-..._._ .._ I._.~ .. .~..~~_. ........... ................... _....... 3-J.8
3.9.7 TriggerMode(T ............................. .._. r .. ,__^_ _ .__________.__ ___ ____,,__ _____._____ 3-18
3.9.8 Reading Mode (B) ................................ _ ... __ _ ... _ _ ... ____ ...... ., ...... _ _. ...... 3-19
3.9.9 Data Store Interval(Q) and Size (I) ............ .._..._ _:. ... ........................... ~..~...: ... 3-19
3.9.10 Value (V) and Calibration (C) ................................. _ ........................ _.. : ; .... 3-20
29.11 DefaultC&ditions(L). ................................... _._. ........ -. ....... _.l.. ... -...~ ... 3-21
3.922 Data Format (G) ..... , ...................................... ^_ ..................................... 3-21
3.9.u SRQ Mask (M) and Serial Poll Byte Format _ ............................. _. ................ _ ....... 3-22
3.9.14 EOI and Bus Hold-off Modes (K) .............................................. , .............. 3-24
3.9.15 Terminator (Y) ................................ _,_. _ ..... _ .............. __._............... __,L_,_,_.. 3-25
3.9.16 Status(U). ......................... ~_~___..................................................... _ .3-25
3.9.17 Auto/Cal Multiplex (A) .......................... _:........... _ . __. .. __ .. .._ .. _ .. __ ..... _~_. __._,_.... ., . 3-28
3.9.18 Trigger Delay (W) .......................................... ~_................................... 3-28
3.9.19 Self-Test(J) .................................. .... .._ ................... _~......... .._ .. _. .... . ... _. 3-29 ......
3.9.20 Hit Button (H) ............................................ ,_... _. ................ .___ ......... _., 3-29
3.9.21 Display(D). ................................................... _ .............. _. ............ >. .... _ .. 3-30
3.10 TRANSLATORSOFTWARE ......... ._______ _.~......................... . ................... ::...;~3-3 0
3.10.1 Translatoe Format ................ _~......... ..__. .................................. _. ........... 3-31
3.10.2 Wild Card ($) .................................. ________.______._______,_ _,_______._____._______ 3-32
3.10.3 NEW and OLD ................................. _ ...... ..:. .. .: .................................. 3-33
110.4 CombiningTranslator Words ......................................... __~....... __. ............... 3-33 ...
3.10.5 Combining Translator Words With Keithley IEEE-488 Comniarids ...................... , ......... 3-34
3.10.6 Executing Translator Words a& Keithley IEEE Commands .......... _~ .......................... 3-34
3.10.7 SAVE ....................... ..____ .... :..-:...,.e~, _._____ ___I_.~~..-._--..-.-.----- ............ 3-34
3.10.8 LIST.. .................... _. ............ _._._~ ........ - .... .._ ............................. *? ... 3-34~.
3.10.9 FORGET .................... ~;..~... .._ ........ ~..~.w..:..: .. _.__._._. __. ... _ _.._......._...___ _ ___._ .. 3-35
3.11 BUS DATA TRANSMISSION TIMES ... ,__,_r T_ . _~_~_ _ I _ _ .. .,.._. _. . _ _ . .z._ ......... _ ........ __- ., _,_,_._m .. _ . _ 335~
3.12 SCANNER PROGRAMMING : ................ __~__.. __~_.__ ........................... .~_. :. ..... _ 3-35
3x.1 Scanner Setup (N) .......................................... _ ............ ._ . __ ....... __ _ ___. ._ _. 3-38
3.12.2 Pole/Ratio Mode (0). ......................... _~................... _~.... _. ...... _. _,T_i__. _ _~.i_. ..... 3-39
3.12.3 Reading Interval and Delay Programming ............... ., ............................... __~___ _ 3-39
3.12.4 Using Data Store with the Scanner .............................................. ._ ........... 3-40
3.12.5 Testing Resistors ............................. _ .. _. _ ... __ __ ........... ., ...... _“. . _. .......... 3-41
3.12.6 Amplifier Gain Testing ..... _~~;:, ............................................................. :_ 3-44

SECTION 4-Performance Verification

4.1 INTRODUCTION ............... ............................................................... 4-1

4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..... _.......... __ ..... _.~__. .... __ .. _ .......................... 4-l
4.3 INITIALCONDITIONS ....................... .1._ ......... _~ .... _,... I~...J _. ... _. ................ .._. ..... 4-l
4.4 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT ........ : ...... : ......................... ., ..... _,........... 4-1
4.5 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES ................................................................... 4-2
4.5.1 DC Volts Verification ............................................................. , ............ 4-2
4.5.2 TRMS AC Volts Verifications ........... .‘.~_...................................................... 4-2
4.5.3 Ohms Verification .............................. _~_~___ .. .,.,_ ..................................... 4-3
4.5.4 DC Current Verification, ............... _. ....................................... ._ ............... 4-4
4.55 TRMS AC Current Verification ............................................ _,_............ ., ... _.,_. 4-5

u1
SECTION 5-Principles of Operation

5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . .._......__._ >.,i_<~r...~ ___r..... 1,__ . . . . . . . . . . . . ..____._..~...... a,>_,,y__,.;:i~;l,:~;~i~5.1

5.2 OVERALLFUNCTIONALDESCRII’TION ___......_....._... _ .I-., _,_.._.__.__ .__.._. _ .___.. I,_.~.._.,. 5.1
5.3 ANALOG CIRCUITRY.. . _. ..__I __-_ __~_~A __~_I_.. _. _ _ ..,. ii,_,..~_ _ z _. . :.‘I-. _. _ .~.,. _. 5-l
5.3-l InputSignalConditioning .._.. .._._. _~_I,._._ 1 . . . . . .~,I ..-.-. i_i~ . . . . . i _.._ ;.)I’..;~.:.’ _.._ i_i_. 5-1
5.32 Multiplexer . ~5-6
5.3.3 -28V Reference Source . ~. . ~. : .~. : ;.::~.. . . . _ .,-._ /. . . . iii _........__ r.‘.;. ______^___ ~_iii_~ ____ ~5.8
513.4~~~ InputBufferAmplifier ... . . . !.~.I ..____..... _ ..,.......... 2 . . . . . . . . i . . . . . ..__....____ ~_i.,_,.. 5-8
5.4 A/D CONVERTER .._.....,_. __._,_,_._~_.~._._~______~..,_ _~.......___....._.___. ..__ ____ ____ i...:.....1=~~5-8
5.5 ~~~:CONTROLCIRCUITRY ~.~.~.,.<..;z .__....__. >,...-,.... i.i..~...~._ . . . . . . . . . . :..:..i~ . .._.... ‘1. 5-10
5.6 : DIGITALCIRCUITRY .__.____tt__ ::w..~.-. _____,_.:___,_._,_..______,_ ~.~_.~______L._t____...; ____._,,. ;v_._ 5-10
5.6.1 Microcomputer . . . .._.._.._..____... ~_~i__,ij .,_. Ijj,__,,j’ . . . . . . . . . .l_-~._..;_;..: . . . . . . . . z..:;..;..;... 5-10
5.6.2 Display Circuitry . ; _ _ -1-i ,“..,
I . .
. .._. _ ___,_ _ , . . :-.: .;~.-- _. .~_~_ j~l~_l, ;. .~_ .‘+z.. .:: :. . . .,. &lO
5.7 POWERSUI’I’LIES _.,__..; .__.__ :..~:.. ._...___ __.. I).~ .._._._ -~.~.-..I...:..;..~ __._.I :._.i _,,.._.__ ~5-IC
5.8 SCANNER . . . . . . . . . .._.._.....~..... ~,_______. _...,. L. . .._.-__I_.._, _.I._..._.... 2 .._...._..__..... 5-10
58.1 c0ntr01cicnilTy . . . . . . . . . ..___. _... -.~..~~-;.~.~-~~,~...~,........ ~_.~.i~....___.....____.. ..,_ _ . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.8.2 Switching Relays .. . . I. _ . _a~.~..z: __.i,. i.i. ._ _ . _.i .~:; . i: . . . . I._. _ ) ;~:.~xr:~.. _. . S-11

SECTION 6-Maintenance

6.1 INTRODUCTION ................ .t......_ ... __., i ,a,_:i..>.: ..i.:.;; .. _‘i .... ._I’., ..:.... L.‘:.-,:,-:-~ ....... 6-l
6.2 LINEVOLTAGESELECTION ............. ..I: ... . ............ ._ ............. i;. .,_,_,-.----T.i~...-..L~~ ..- 6-1
6.3 FUSEREPLACEMENT .......... ~.,.-.; ._ 1.; ..... ;...:.~..:..A:.1 ............ l,i~irl_ii_,i,i.~.ii_._‘_1. .... ~61
6.3.1 LineFuse ....................... . ..-L......i.~~..............~:~~~: ..... ;~_; .,._ ... . .. ..~~....~..~..11.... ........... 6-1
6.3.2 Current FU se ..................... L....................... .._ .. i ._.__ f.. ... _ ............... _i ....... 6-2
6.4 CALIBRATION ............. _^__ .. .~.I;~._.~ ........ _.__ ......... ;: : ........... I..:. ....... c. -.-:.‘:a; .... 1~:.... 6-2
6.4.1 Recommended Calibration Equipment ........... ;. : ... __ ........ . ........ _,.;,___ ........................ 6-2
6.4.2 Environmental Conditions ... : . .~; :~.~:::~I. .. ._ _ .~i,l.Lj.l. ._ ...................... ; :. ; __: ....... : ...... :~ 6-3
6.4.3 .. Warm-UpPeriod.. ...................... :_ili.. .. ~.i. ... . ................................ .: ............. 6-3
6.4.4 CAL Lock Switch .............. ,.,__,_ L., _ ... _yy_~I _ jmj.i.... i .. j i~i..* :.. _ ....~..~.L~...~. ... i .. _ _ -‘: ;.r: .z: : . : . ; ..... 6-3
6.4.5 Front Panel Calibration ............ ...._: ......... . . ... . ..... . .. ::. ..... I .............................. 6-3
6.4.6 IEEE-488 Bus Calibration ........................... . ............... :. .. .~.+ ;.. .... .*. ............ 6-4
6.41 Calibration Sequence ..................... ._ ................. _. ..... .,,_,, .... _.. , _._.. _,_ .; L__ : .. ‘L#,,.,jl, 6-5
6.4.8 DCVoltsCalibration.. ........................ _ . .._ ..... ,__L.__~. ..... ..~.....‘....‘~~~.i.‘.~.......‘.:.’.:’.~..l. 6-5
6.4.9 Resistance C&&ration .................... _ ............ . pi.~ii. .. i:. ...................... ., _:_...... _~;. ; 6-6
6.4.10 TRMSACVoltsCalibration ...... ........ L.... l.. ................ ....t...ii ..__ _. ..;: ....... _ ....... _ 2, 6-8
6.& DCC unrent Calibration ......... ~.,~“~.-~ ........ . .................. __,_._______ ..... .:..~ ........... 6-12
TRMS AC Current Calibration ........... _ .............. i _.__ .._._._,.,_.. _~.,:......... .,_ ...... ..; .... 1’: 6-12
6.5. DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.. ............................. +........... ................... L.. .. ~...6- I3
6.6 SPECIAL HANDLING ............................ __._ ......... ~.~..6-17.
6.7 TROUBLESHOOTING ................ .~:~I....... ._I,, _ .... ._,__ _._i~_.i_. .... ..i .... L... ii :..::z:.: ............. I 6-v
67.1 Recommended Test Equipment .................. ,_.,_............ Il~_~_~.~i ..... i_ ..... i .... _‘*._ _‘wr~_:_ ~6-17
6.7.2 .. I’owerUpSeIfTest ............. _.._. _._--,.L~.i.~~__~~i,.~ .... ..^ ._ i ........ ;..e_ .._._; _ ...... ~;.;....~6- 17
6.7.3 Diagnostics ............ .._.__ ..................... _. ... ..___ _ i.__._-__.iz~ . ..__ .. -..;..~.:.~..:. 6-l8
6.%4 PowerStipplies.. .................... _.____.^ .~.........._. .: .__, L___ .... __I ..... .._ ............ 6-18
6.7.5 Signal Conditioning Checks ............ _ _....... . .- ....~=.;...... _ ............................ ..L. _._........... 6-18
6.76 DigitalandDisplayCircuitryChecks.. ..... _._ .... ji,. ............................. . ___._._.__._ 6-18
6.7.7 Scanner Checks.. .............. .~...~__.__ __ ..... ____., i _.___ __w,i_~/................. .___.__ ii._i,_i_i 6-18
6.8 ~SCANNERINSTALLATIONANDCHECKOUT. ........ _..i.....l.i.....l.._i_ i ..... .._. izi,.__ ...... .._ .. 6-22
6.8.1 Installation .......................... _ ............ .___ ,i .......... .._. ..... ;.: ._. ...... .;- ........... 6-22
6.8.2 Card Checkout ..................................................... _._&.................. i ......... 6-23
6.8.3 Relay Shield Jumper .................. . ............ _. ............ _,_...... .__ ___ . _._. ........ ; .... 6-24

iv
SECTION 7-Replaceable Parts

7.1. INTRODUCTION .......................... l,_ ....... ..1~..... : ., . ., L.II II~,.~........ .,.~. ..... ,.“i_I:,,.1 i _., _.ii i: i _~_;~7-1
7.2 PARTS LIST ................... ..... ,,--..-.-.
~.~.~...:~..~: .:. ........ _.-._ .---- .. ......... .._,“. ... . “....~L .. 7-l
7.3 ORDERING INFORMATION .......................................................................... 7-1
7.4 FACTORY SERVICE ................................. _ ................................. ..I, ................. 7-1
7.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LOCATION ~DRKWINGS .... : .............. ;. ...... 7-1

APPENDIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND TEEE-188~ MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES _ . . A-l

APPENDIX B

CONTROLLER PROGRAMS _~. ~._. . . . . _ . _ . t .. . . . _ _ ___ _ _ __ _,. L . _,_ B-l

APPENDIX C

IEEE-488 BUS OVERVIEW :. : .:: :: ,. .: .‘. : :. r .. . . . . . _. . _~._ _ , . : C-l

 List Of Illustrations

SECTION 2-Basic DMM Operation

2-l Model 199 Front Panel. ........................................................................... 2-3

2-2 Model 199 Rear Panel ........................................................ ,~_ __ ................. 2-s
2-3 DCVoltageMeasurements ................... _ ................. _... . ............... _ _,__ ~__... .._ .._ 2-10
2-4 Two-Terminal Resistance Measurements. ................................................ _ ....... _ . 2-11
2-5 Four-Terminal Resistance Measurements .......................................................... 2-11
2-6 TRh4S AC Voltage Measurement ......................................................... . ........ 2-12
2-7 Current Measurements.. ....................................................................... 2.12
2-8 External Trigger Pulse Specifications ............................................. _.. , ............. 2-21
2-9 Meter Complete Pulse SpecifZations. .... (. ................................................... _,_,,., Z-22
2-10 Scanner Connections .................... : ................................ __ ......... __~_.~._.~_.__- _~__,2-24
2-u Output Cable Connections ........................................................ ..~..~.~_,..... _ .... 2-26
2-12 Voltage Test Connections ; ............ .I. .................................... _:: _~:L_..... ..L. L.~.~ ...... 2-27
2-13 2-l’& Resistor Test Connections ............ : ................. : ................ L .. _~___ ___ ___ _____. _ 2-28
2-14 4-P&? Resistor Test Connections. ....... .Lz ............. :. ................................. __ __ .. ..:-..2-2 9
2-15 Amplifier Gain Test Configuration. ............................................... L_... L.; ........ 2-35
2-16 Amplifier Frequency Response Test Configuration .................................... __ ......... 2-36
2-w Using Scanner Card with Nanovoltmeter ............................................................ 2-39

SECTION 3-IEEE-488 Programming

3-l Typical Program Flow Chart _. .~.~.. .~_. .~. . .~. . _ _. _ _ ___ _ 3-2
3-2 IEEE-488 Connector _ :Y: .: .~. ._ . .~. ._ : 3-4
3-3 IEEE-488 Connections .. .. .. .. . _ . . . _. . .~. _. .~_.~_~_ __- _ _. _ . . _ _ 3-4
3-4 IEEE-488 Connector Location. .~. . . .~.. _. . . ,. . .~. . . _. _. . _. . 3-5
3-5 ContactAssignments _____._._r.~.__...~ _.._ _.__ _ I______ ~_.__. _ . . . . . . ^_.... I._ .___. _L_________..,___. 3-5
3-6 General Dat Format . . . _ . . ... . . . t _ .._ 3-22
37 SRQ Mask and Serial Poll Byte Format .~. :_ . ~ _. _. . . 3-23
3-8 UO Machine Status Word and Default Values . ..__. . .,.... ~..~ .,.,.. . . . . .. . . . . __ ________ ~-~3-26
3-9 UlErrorStatusWord . . . . ..___......_._........... ^ . .._... ^_I..~ . . . . . . . _._____ ____..___.. ~,_-I_ 3-27
3-10 2-l’& Resistor Test Connections : . . .~. .~; : .~. . .~. .~.. : . ; .~. 1_.~~.3-42
3-n 4-P& Resistor test Connections .+; .;. _ ., . . . 3-43
3-12 Amplifier Gain Test Configurations I 1’:. _~_ 1 . .‘. _ _‘. ._~. .‘I 1. 1.‘. 1 _ I _ 1.. _‘_. _ _,_,1. _ _ _‘_ 346

SECTION 4-Performance Verification

4-l Connections for DC VoltsVerification . . . . . . . . . ..___ I __________.___._._ 1 _____ _ ..___-._ ~_~._.,_ ~...~4-2
4-2 Connections for TRMS AC Volts Verification.. :‘. :. , . _. . I~. . . . .~. . . __ _. 4-3
4-3 Connectionsfor Ohms Verification (300%3Ok0 Range). . . . 4-4
44 Connectionsfor Ohms Verification (300kil-3OOM0 Ranges) . .~..~. . 4-4
4-5 Connections for DC Current Verification _ . _ . . _. .. , 4-5
4-6 Connections for TRMS AC Current Verification .~. . . 4-5

vii
SECTION t&-Principles of Operation

5-l &&all Block Diagram . _ __. ~.,,- __ .._ .~~II__ _._:*,. I;-.,. _ . :. . . . *.. ., .,_ <:I,i i _ . . i:. . . . _ _ . _; :; 5-2
5-2 Input Configurati& During 2 and 4-terminal Resistance~Measurement, . _ _.. . . _ _ . _ _ _ _. I _ . . . _. S-4
5-3 ~: ResistanceMeasurementSimplIfiedCircuitry _....._, _ _.__....__..... Lji,.i__.j .___. ii:....i~rl.‘.l’,~;. 5-5
5-4 JFET MuliipIexer . . . . . . _ . . . __,_,__,___ ,__ . . . . .~.~.. _. _. _ _,_<.<,,I * .~_2 . _ _ i,,. .’ .:;: i ii i ‘2%: :‘i:~. 5-6
5-5 MultiplexerPhases _........._,._ _ ,.__. ___~_~.~~,ll~.~.__~I.._..___._. j _...._ \~..> . . . . . . . ..____. . . . . . . . . ~.. 5-7
5-6 A/D Conveitei Simplified Schematic. _ .. . . _ _ _ . . . _ . . . _. . . ,. _ _ ;. . . _~~.,, I . , . _ _ 5-9

SECTION 6-Maintenance

DCVoltsCalibrationConfiguration(3CQmV~nge) __..____..._ ‘I.... ,.=. . . ...1.-.* __,. L_i.l~i .___ -.~.;....6-6~

t-i DC Volts Calibration Cbnfiguratioti (3V-300V Ranges) ,. ,. . . . . _ . _. . . ..._..,,_..__,__ . . __. _ _,. _ _ . i i _ 6-6
6-3 ~~ Four-wire Resistance Calibration Configuration (300%3OkQ Ranges) . . . _ .~.. _ _ .~. _ _ 6-7
6-4 Two-Wire Resistance Calibration Configuration (300kQ-300MQ Ranges). . . . . . _. __ I _ . . _: 6-7
6-5 Flowchart of AC Volts Calibration Procedure . _. . . , . _I_ _ . . _. _ . . ,. _..,..”_. . _ . . . . . 6-10
6-6 TRMS AC Volts Call&ration Configuration . ~__ , _. _,__. __ ..,_,, I,. __ __,_ i .,,. _,,.: . .i . . .,.. .‘. Y. : I .’ 6-10
6-7 TRMS AC Volts High Frequency Calibration, &ljustments (30V and 3OOv, Ranges) . . . _. . . . 6-11
6-B DCCurrentCalibrationConfiguration..’.. ..__ _..._.___...___.._ *.___ ___....___.._.._...._ -..--;_.:. 6-12
6-9 ~~ACCur?entCalibrationConfiguration .._... _ __.._ ________,..__ _.l~l_____i_~__.l_~._.;~.j~~_.j~.yl~..j_ ._... 6-13
6-10 Model 199 Exploded View . . _. . . . ~.. ._.___ _ __._, . _ _ . ._~_ _ . , I . . i. _ ;. . _ . . _ . 6-15
6-n Connector Locations.. .. ... ..~. ...__.i,. e,m..i ..,.._. ..~.__. . _.. . ._... . ..~ . . . . .~*..i.. . . . .~_. 6-16
6-12 Scanner Installation . . . . _ =_..I.DI,i._m.v~_,,L
,Y,18.=..I L Z:. : ‘_‘.i~i_ ;‘:‘YYI: ,: ‘. ; :. . zi I; .‘:. I’:‘: .., :“.‘.r. 1”.:6-24
6-13 Scanner ConneCtor Location _ _ YL.. _ ij ._ . _ .~(_ _ _. _ _ _. . , _~.~*.=_ _.z~. _ __ ___&. ;~. . ._.. __ . :. 6-25

SECTION 7-Replaceable parts

APPENDIX C-IEEE-488 BUS OVERVIEW

C-l IEEEBusCoiifiguration .._..... :..L ._._I, .~*..,.~...: ___.__._ ~..; .__..__.__.________._ ~-~.-,.~~-~.,I~;~-I.C~l
c-2 IEEE Handshake Sequence __ ~~~. : ;. _ _ _ _ _ _,_,;-.LLu,.,. ,_/,_~..I_,+ ,,_,.G.. __ . i i _,: .~...?._ _,. _~:‘-. _:I C-3
c-3 Command Codes. L. L. _ . . _ _ _~i~.. i_ _ . i .~,,A .“L‘P,:::_ii___ , _~j_,.~.. ‘r. ;‘. :‘-:: :“. _ ;.‘;.. . .,. <_,;.‘~A_ . C-6
 List Of Tables

SECTION 2-Basic DMM Operation

2-l Factory Default Conditions. .~.1 , _~. . _. ___ . __:-_ _ _ _ _ _.,___._ _ . __ _ _ __ ., _. 2-2
2-2 Error Messages _: .z.. _ . _ _ _ , ..* _ . . .,. . _ _ _ . 2-6
2-3 Resistance Ranges .~_ _~. ~., _~~,~_,
.~. . .~_. . . . ~_. . _ .. . . . _ . . __ _ _. 2-11
2-4 Corresponding Voltage Reference Levels for Impedance References.. . ,~._~. _,. . _. _ _ __ _ _ _~._ _ .~ 2-14
2-5 Comparison of Average and TRMS Meter Readings _ _. _, ..._........ . _. __ __. 2-15
2-6 DMM Setup Programs _ _ _ . . . _ . __ _ . ,~. . .~,r ;. _. . _ .~. .~ _ .~_ 2-16
2-7 Typical Minimum Usable Scan Intervals .~_ .~.~.. ....,_ _ __ .._ . .._.,___ 2-38

SECTION 3-IEEE-488 Progamming

3-l IEEE-488 Commknds USed to Select Function and Range. . . , _ . _.. . . _ . . . 3-3
3-2 JEEEContact Designations...: . . . .~; . ~;~:~;::.~. . . . . . . . :: .~..;..: . . . .._............ . . . ..I . . ~::~. . . . . 3-5
3-3 Model 199 Interface Function Codes . . _~_.~. . . ~. . . . _~_._ __ _ .. . _ . 3-6 .~~
3-4 BASIC Statements Necessary to Send Bus Commands. _ . .~. . . . . . _ . _. . . _ . . . .~_. . . 3-7
3-5 Front Panel IEEE-488 Messages. . . _~.~~_ ~ ,.~.__,. _. _ __ _.. _ _ _ _ __ __ _ . 3-8
56 General Bus Commands and Associated BASIC Statements , .,. . . _., , __ _ _ _ _ _ _. _ _. . . . . . , _ . 3-10
3-7 FactoryDefaultConditions ____..._._.... .__._..._._ jj ____._......_.._...__ _~t________....... ~..~. . . . 3-11
3-8 Device-Dependent Command Summary .~_.. _ _ . _ __ _ _ .;,. __,. _ _. _ . . _ . .~. 3-14
3-9 Range Comniand Summary . _~_ ,. . .,~_~_ _ _ _ __ _ _ _>_. 3-17
3-10 Rate Command Summary.. ..~. . _. _.._... .._. ..~. . . .~.. . _. .. . . . . . 3-li3
3-11 SRQ Command Parameters . _~ _~_.~_, . . . , . _. . . . . __ . __. ____ 3-23
3-Y Bus Hold-off Times (Typical) . _ _~~_
~_~L
.~._ , . _ __ _ _ _~___ I . __ _ _ . _ . _ _ . _ _ _ . _ ______ 3-25
3-w Translator Reserved Words and Character . . .. 330
3-14 Translator Error Messages . . . __ , . _ . .~. .~. . . . . _ . _.. _, .... _. I 3-32
3-15 TypicaITriggertoFirstByteOutliies __. . ...,,.. ~1.__...,..__.__ I____ I.... Y;;.:....,. _ ._.__...__ 336
3% Scanner Programming Commands. _ . _ . I _~L _ _ _ _ _ . _.._ _ _ . _ . . . _.. . _,. _. . __ 3-37

SECTION 4-Performance Verification

4-l Recommended TZ+s Equipment .~, _ _ _ _ __ _ __ _ _ _ _ . ~ I in. I~ _ _~~_

_ ~._ 4-1
4-2 Liits for DC Volts Verification.~. _. _. _ __ , _ _ _ _,. .,_%,.,.”. _. _~_iia.l . . . . . .,,. .,_. _i _ _~_,_,. __,_ 4-2
4-3 Limits for TRMS AC Volts Verification .~_ .~_ _. _ =_, . . . ,::. .lI.. ,~. . _ .,_. 4-3
4-4 LiitsforOHmsVerification _.___.._. _ . . . . . . . . _ ________....SC...~l~ _,,,._j___._._ Liil..___l‘L .... 44
4-5 Limits for DC Current Verificatidn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._. _..,... ~. . . ,,.. . . . . .._. i_ . . . . . 4-4
4-6 Limits for AC Current VeriFication. .~._~__ . . __ . . . _. _ . __ ~.~_._. . _. 4-5

SECTION 5-Principles of Operation

5-l Input Buffer Ampliiier (U46) Gain Configtiration . .‘. . _. _ . . _ _ . .. . . . . 5-8

ix
SECTION 6-Maintenance

6-l line Voltage Selection .............. . ...... _, .......................................................... 6-l

6-2 Line Fuse Replacement ............................................................................ 6-2
6-3 Current Fuse Replacement ......................................................... 1 ......... _ ... 6-2
6-4 Recommended Calibration Equipment .......... : ....................................... L.. I.. ... .~,_6-3~
6-5 DC Volts Calibration ......................... _~~_~_ ................................. I .... I ... , ... , 6-6
6-6 Resistance Calibration ........................................................ ,~. ...................... 1 ~6-8
6-7 TRMS AC Volts Calibration ..................................................................... 6-9
6-8 DC Current Calibration ............................................................ L_. ....... .. ... . . 6-1.2
6-9 TRMS AC Current Calibration .................................................................. 6-13
6-10 Recommended Troubleshooting Equipment ........................................................ 6-18
6-11 ~ModelWTroubIeshootingMode ........................ _. ....... _~
...... ~,-^~. ......... - .... ~.-~.~ .. 6-19
6-12 Power Supply Checks ................... _.~.~ ..... . ... .I ......................................... 6-21
6-13 Digital Circuitry .Checks ....................................................................... , ....... 6-21
6-14 Display Circuitry Checks ......................................................................... 6-22
645 ScannerBoard Checks ...................... ..~................~....................~ ......... 6-22

APPENDIX C-IEEE-488 BUS OVERVIEW

C-l IEEE-488 Bus Command Summary _ _~. . . _1_ C-3

c-2 Hexadecimal and Decimal Command Codes __ . . ._ . ... .._ . . ~..~_ C-7
c-3 Typical Addressed Command Sequence : .~.: .~.~1. . .,. . .~;.~. _~. _~. ; C-7
C-4 Typical Device-Dependent Command Sequence I _~ .~. . . _,. C-7
c-5 IEEE Command Group.. . . .~_~_.~.~, _. . . . . . . L C-7
 i~fl10N I

General Information

1.1 INTRODUCTION l Optional Field-Installable Internal Scanner-Allows the

unit to switch up to 8, 2-pole channels, or 4, 4pole
channels.
The Keithley Model 199 System DhJM Scanner is a five
function autoranging digital multimeter. At 5% digit resolu-
tion, the LED display can display &02,999 counts. The
range of this analog-to-digital (A/D) converter is greater 1.3 WARRANTY INFORMATION
than the normal *199,999-count A/D converter
used in many 5% digit DMMs. The built-in IEEE-488 titer- Warranty information may be found on the inside front
face makes the instrument fully programmable over the cover of this manual. Should it become necessary to exer-
LEEE-488 bus. The Model 199 can make the foBowing basic cise the warranty, contact your KeithIey representative or
measurements: the factory to determine the proper course of action.
Keithley Instruments maintains service facilities in the
1. DC voltage measurements from l&V to 3OOV. United States, United Kingdom and throughout Europe.
2. Resistance measurements from II& to 3OOMR. Information concerning the application, operation or ser-
3. TRMS AC voltage measurements from 1pV to 309V. vice of your instrument may be directed to the applications
engineer at any of these locations. Check the inside front
4. DC current measurements from lOOnA to 3A.
cover for addresses.
5. I’RMS AC current measurements from lOOnA to 3A.

In addition to the above mentioned measurement

1.4 MANUAL ADDENDA
capabilities, the Model 199 can make ACTdB voltage and
current measurements. Information concerning improvements or changes to the
instrument which occur after the printing of this manual
will be found on an addendum sheet included with the
1.2 FEATURES manual. Be sure to review these changes before attempt-
ing to operate or service the instrument.

Some important Model 199 features include:

l 10 Character Alphanumeric Display-Easy to read 14

1.5 SAFETY SYMBOLS AN6 TERMS
segment LEDs used for readings and front panel
messages. The following safety symbols and terms are used in this
l Zero-Used to cancel offsets or establish baselines. manual or found on the Model 199.
l Data Store-Can store up to 500 readings and is access-
ible over the bus or from the front panel. The A symbol on the instrument denotes that the user
should refer to the operating instructions in this manual.
l Digital Calibration-The instrument may be digitally
calibrated from either the front panel or over the bus.
The& on the mstrument denotes that a hazardous
l User Programmable Default Conditions-Any instru- potential may be present on the terminal(s). Standard safe-
ment measurement configuration can be established as ty practices should be observed when such dangerous
the power-up default conditions. levels are encountered.
l Translator Software-User defined words (stored innon-
volatile memory) can be used to replace standard com- The WARNING used in this manual explains dangers that
mand strings over the IEEE-493 bus. could result in personal injury or death.

The CAUTION used in this manual explains hazards that

could damage the instrument.

l-1
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 SPECIFICATIONS * Section 6 contains information for servicing the instru-

ment. ‘Ihis section includes information on fuse replace-
ment, line voltage selection, calibration and trouble-
Detailed Model 159 specifications may be found preceding
shooting.
the Table of Contents of this manual.
l Section 7 contains replaceable pats information.

1.7 INSPECTION
1.9 GETTING STARTED
The Model 199 System DMM was carefully inspected, “th
electricalIy and mechanically before shipment. After Un- The Model 199 System DMM is a highly sophisticated in-
packing all items from the shipping carton, check for any strument with many capabilities. To get the instrument up
obvious signs of physical damage that may have occurred and running quickly use the following procedure. For com-
during transit. Report any damage to the shipping plete information on operating the Model 199 consult the
agent. Retain and use the original packing materials in case appropriate section of this manual.
reshipment is necessary, The following items are shipped
with every Model 159 order:
Power up
Model 199 System DMM
1. Plug the line cord into the rear panel power jack and
Model 199 Instruction Manual
plug the other end of the cord into an appropriate,
Safety shrouded test leads (Model 1751). grounded power source. See paragraph 22.1 for more
Additional accessories as ordered. complete information.
2. Press in the POWER switch to apply power to the in-
strument. The instrument will power up in the 3WV DC
If an additional instruction manual is required, order the range.
manual package (Keithley Part Number 199-901-00). The
manuai package includes an instruction manual and any~
applicable addenda. Making Measurements

1. Connect the supplied safety shrouded test leads to the

1.8 USING THE MODEL 199 MANUAL front panel VOLTS HI and Lo input terminals. Make
sure the INPUT switch on th-e front panel is in the front
This manual contains information necessary for operating position.
and servicing the Model 199 System DMM. The informa- 2. To make a voltage measurement, simply connect the in-
tion iS divided into the following sections: ~.~rrufleads to a DC voltage source (up to 30OV) and take
ihe reading from the display.
3. To change to a different measuring function, simply
l Section 1 contains general information about the Model press the desired function button. For example, to
199 including that necessary to inspect the instrument measure resistance, press the OHMS button.
and get it operating as quickly as possible.
l Section 2 contains detailed operating information on
using the front panel controls and programs, making Using DMM Setup
connections, and basic measuring techniques for each
of the available measuring functions. Press SHIFT DMM SETUF, then use NEXT to scroll
l Section 3 contains the information necessary to connect through selections. The following can be selected or
the Model 199 to the IEEE488 bus and program operating viewed:
modes and functions from a controller.
l Section 4 contains performance verification procedures l Software revision
for the instrument. Thii information will be helpful if l MUX on/off
you wish to verify that the instrument is operating in l IEEE-1188 address
compliance with its stated specifications. l Line frequency
l Section 5 contains a description of operating theory. l save setup
Analog, digital, powei supply, and IEEE-488 interface l LED test
operation is included.
l Diagnostics
l unit reset

l-2
 GENERAL INFORMATION

For all selections except software revision and IEEE488 ad- phone tips (0.06 DIA.), two hooks and miniature alligator
dress, use uprangeidownrange to toggle the selection. clips (with boots).

Model 1992 4/8 Channel Scanner-The Model 1992 Scan-

Pa’a~;p~~p,provides the detailed information for using ner option allows scanning of four, 4-pole channels, or
eight, 2-pole channels. The Model 1992 installs within the
Model 199 with connections available on the rear panel of
the instrument.
1.10 ACCESSORIES
Model 1993 Quick Disconnect Scanner Connector Kit-
The Model 1993 includes two connector blocks, 10 tie
The~following accessories are available to enhance Mode1
wraps, and two sets of red and black output cables for~the
199 capabilities.
Model 1992 Scanner Card.

Model 1651 SO-Ampere Current Shunt--The Model 1651 is

Model 1998 Rack Mounting Kit-The Model 1998-l Single
an external O.oOlQ *l% 4-terminal shunt, which permits Fixed Rack Mounting Kit mounts a single Model 199 in a
current measurements from 0 to 5OA AC or DC. ~~
gandard 19 inch rack. The Model 1998-2 Dual Fied Rack
Mounting Kit mounts two Model 199s side by side in a
Model 1681 Clip-On Test Lead Set-The Model 1681 con-
standard 19 inch rack.
tains two leads, 1.2m (4 ft.) long terminated with banana
plugs and spring action clip probes.
Model 5806 Kelvin Clip Lead Set-The Model 5806 includes
two Kelvin clip test lead assemblies with banana plug ter-
Model l682A RF Probe-The Model 1682A permits voltage
mination (one red, one black). A set of eight replacement
measurements from 1oOktrz to 25OMH.z. AC to DC t&&r
rubber bands for the Model 5806 is also available (Keithley
accuracy is *ldB from 1OOkHz to 25OMHz at IV, peak
PIN GA-22).
responding, calibrated in RMS of a sine wave.
Model 7007 IEEE-488 Shielded Cables-l-he Model 7007
Model 1685 Clamp-On AC Probe-The Model 1685
connects the Model 199 to the IEEE-488 bus using shield-
measures AC current by clamping on to a single conduc-
ed cables to reduce electromagnetic interference @MI). The
tor. Interruption of the circuit is unnecessary. The Model
Model 7007-1 is one meter in length and has a EMI shield-
1685 detects currents by sensing the changing magnetic
ed IEEE-488 connector at each end. The Model 7007-2 is
field produced by the current flow.
identical to the Model 7007-1, but is two meters in length.

Model 1751 Safety Test Leads-Finger guards and

Model 7008 IEEE488 Cables--The Model 7008 connectsthe
shrouded banana plugs help minimize the chance of
Model 199 to the IEEE-488 bus. The Model 7008-3 is 0.9m
making contact with live circuitry. (3 ft.) in length and has a standard IEEE-488 connector at
each end. The Model 7008-6 cable is identical to the Model
Model I754 Universal Test Lead Kit-The Model I754 is a
7008-3, but is 1.8m (6 ft.) in length.
12 piece test lead kit, with interchangeable plug-in ac-
cessories. Induded in the kit is one~set Of test leads (l-red,
l-black), two spade lugs, hvo standard banana plugs, two

l-3/1-4
 SECTION 2

Basic DMM Operation

2.1 INTRODUCTION CAUTION

Be sure that the power line voltage agrees with
Operation of the Model I.99 can be divided into two general the indicated range on the rear panel of the in-
categories: front panel operation and IEEE-188 bus op~a- strument. Failure to observe this precaution
tion. This section contains information necessa?y to use may result in instrument damage.
the instrument from the front panel. These functions can
also be programmed over the IEEE-488 bus, as described
in Section 3. 2.2.2 Power Up Sequence

The instrument can be turned on by pressing in the front

2.2 POWER UP PROCEDURE panel POWER switch. The switch will be at the i&w most
position when the instrument is turned on. Upon power
up, the instrument wiIl do a number of tests on itself. Tests
are performed on memory (ROM, RAM and E’PROM). If
2.2.1 Line Power
RAM or ROM fails, the inshument will lock up. If E*PROM
FAILS,the message “UNCAL” will be displayed. See para-
Use the following procedure to connect the Model 199 to graph 6.7.2 for a complete description of the power up self
line power and power up the instrument. test and recommendations to resolve failures.~

1. Check that the instrument is set to correspond to the

available lie power. When the instrument leaves the Immediately upon power up- the unit will display the pro-
factory, the externally selected line voltage is marked on grammed line frequency. For example:
the rear panel. Ranges are 105WZ5V or 21OV-25OV
50/6OHz AC (9GllOV, 180~220V with optional trans- FREQ = 60HZ
former). If the line voltage setting of the instrutitint
needs to be changed, set switch as required. If the line
frequency setting of the instrument needs to be checked 2.2.3 Default Conditions
and/or changed, utilize front panel DMM SETUP (see
paragraph 2.7) after the instrument completes the power
up sequence (the line frequency is displayed upon Default conditions can be defined as setup conditions that
power up). the instrument will return to when a particular feature or
command is asserted. The Model 199 will return to either
2. Ctmnect the female end of the power cord to the AC
factory default conditions or user saved default conditions.
receptacle on the rear panel of the instrument. Connect
the other end of the cord to a grounded AC outlet.
Factory Default Conditions
WARNING
At the factory, the Model 199 is set up so that the instru-
The Model 199 is equipped with a 3-wire power
ment is configured to certain setup conditions on the initial
cord that contains a separate ground wire and
power up. These factory default conditions are listed in
is designed to be used with grounded outlets.
Tables 2-l and 3-7 (located in Section 3). If alternate setup
When properconnectiins are made, instrument
conditions are saved (see User Saved Default Conditions),
chassis is connected to power line ground.
the instrument can be returned to the factory default con-
Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in
ditions by using Reset, available under DMM SETUP See
personal injury or death because of electric
paragraph 2.7.
shock.

2-l
BASIC DMM OPERATION

Table Z-l. Factory Default Conditions measurement cotiguration that it was set up for (such as
range, zero value, etc). Switchiig back and forth between
functions will not affect the unique configuration of each
ContmllFeature function. However, the instrument will “forget” the con-
figurations on power-down unless they are saved (only one
instnnnent configuration can be saved).
Function*
Range*
Resolution* 5% Digits
Unique setup conditions can be saved by using SAVE
zero’ Off
under Dh4M SETUl? or by sending device-dependent com-
dB* off _ ~~=
mand Ll over the IEEE-488 bus. These user saved default
Filter* Offs
conditions will prevail over the factory default conditions
Multiplexer* On
on power-up, or when a DCL or SDC~is asserted over the
IEEE-488 Primary Address* 26
bus.
Line Frequency* 6OHZ I
Trigger Delay= Omsec
OIlVET
Reading Interval* l75msec (select OffJ
IEEE Address and Line Frequency
Trigger Mode* continuous
Data Store Off
Any IEEE address and line frequency setting can be saved
Polest 2
as default conditions by using the SAVE option under
Ratiot Off
DMM SETUP or by sending Ll over the bus. See para-
Scan Modet Ma*d I
graph 2.7 for complete tionnation on using DMM SETUP
%ese modes can be altered by using save setup,
tWith optional 1992 scanner. NOTE
An “UNCAL” error will set the IEEE address to
26 and the line frequency to 60H.z.
User Saved Default Conditions

Each function of the Model 199 “remembers” the last

 BASIC DHM OPERATION

Figure 2-1. Model 199 Front Panel

2.3 FRONT PANEL FAMILIARIZATION AUTO is off.

Zero Indicator-ZERO will be on when the zero mode is

The front panel of the Model 199 is shown in Figure 2-l.
The following paragraphs describe the vaious components enabled. Zero is used to subtracf a baseline value from the
measured signal. ZERO will flash when zero has been
of the front panel in detail.
enabled, but a reading that has yet to be triggered.

Filter Indicator-FIXR indicates when the running average

2.3.1 Display and Indicators filter is enabled. A flashing FLTR indicates the filter has
not yet settled and shows the update rate.
Display-The l&character alphanumeric LED display is
used to display numeric data, range and functions Remote Indicator-REM shows when the Model 199 is in
mnemonics (for ample, mV), as well as messages. When the IEEE-488 remote state. See Section 3 for move detailed
the optional Model 1992 Scanner is being used, the chan- IEEE-488 information.
nel number is displayed in the right most digit.
Data Store Indicators-ST0 shows when the instrument
Function Indicators-The indicator or indicators that are is storing data in the data store buffer. RCL Indicates that
on identify the measurement function presently selected. data store information is being displayed (RCL flashes
when data-store is full).
Range Indicator-The AUTO indicator will be on when
autoranging is selected. Manual ranging is in effect when Display Update Indication-The decimal point flashes to
indicate the display update rate.

2-3
BASIC DMY OPERATION

2.3.2 Power Switch for zero correction (paragraph 2.62). (RESOLN)

toggles the display between 4% digit and 5% digit
resolution. The third function for this key is to enter
POWER controls AC line power to then instrument.
the number 4 when numeric input is required.
Depressing and releasing the switch once turns the power
on; depressing and releasing the switch a sec?nd, time
LOCAL-The LOCAL key takesthe instrument out
turns the power off. The on and off positions are marked
of remote when it is being used over the IEEE-488
on the front panel immediately above the POWER switch.
bus. Note that all other control keys will be locked
out when the unit is in remote (LOCAL will also
be inoperative when LLO is ifi effect).
2.3.3 Controls
AUTOQDMM SETUP)-ALJTO places the instru-
The &in controls discussed below are all momentary- ment in autoranging, which is available for all
contact switches. These controls are numbered on Figure ranges and functions. While in autoranging, the
2-1. Many of the controls have a secondary function that unit will go to the best range to measure the ap-
is selected by pressing SHIFT before pressing the control plied signal. Autoranging can be cancelled by press-
in question. SHIFTed controls are placed in parentheses ing AUTO or one of the two manual ranging but-
in the following diiussions. tons (discussed below). (DMM SEl’Ul’) allows ac-
cess to the following functions: software revision
VOLTSI(STORE)-VOLTS places the ii%.trument in level, multiplexer on/off, IEEE-488 primary address
the volts function. See paragraphs 2.6.4 and 2.6.7 programming, 50/60& line frequency~ selection,
for DCV and ACV measurement informatitin. save setup, LED test, debug, and instrument reset
(STORE) allows access to the data store buffer to (see paragraph 2.7). Entering the number 5 is the
select buffer size and initate the storage of readings. third function of this key.
A third function of this key is to enter the number
0 for some numeric input operations. DownYang= (v)-decrements the range and also
cancels autorange if selected. The secondary func-
OHMS/(RECALL)-OHMS selects the resistance tion of this key is to enter the number 6.
measurement function, as discussed in paragraph
2.6.6. (RECALL) allows you to display data store Uprange (A)-increments the range and also
buffer information on the front panel display. A cancels autorange if selected. The secondary func-
third function of this key is to enter the number 1 tion of this key is to enter the number 7.
for numeric input operations.
SCANNERI(SCAN SETUP)- SCANNER aJIows
AMFS/(FImR)-The AMPS buttons select current you to select the scanner channel limit and scan-
measurement, as discussed in paragraph 2.6.8. ner channel number. (SCAN SETUP) allows you to
(FIIXER) toggles the filter between internal and user program 214 pole operation, ratio, and scanner trig-
falter (FLTR on ftir user). See paragraph 2.6.3 for ger mode. See paragraph 2.11 for more scanner in-
details on filter operation. The third function of this formation. The third function of this key is to enter
key is to enter the number 2 when numeric input the number 8 for numeric input operations.
is required.
xxIGGEW(wG SETLJP)-TRIGGER triggers in-
strument readings. (TRIG SETUP) allows you to
AU(dB)-AC selects AC volts 01~ AC current
select the trigger mode, delay, and interval. The
measurement, depending on whether VOLE oi
default delay is Omsec, and the~default interval is
AMPS is in effect. (dB) toggles the dB function on
l75msec. See paragraphs 2.8 and 2.9 for more in-
or off for AC voltage or current measurements. OdB
formation on triggering. A third function of th& key
reference for these functions is 1V (volts) or lmA
is to enter the number 9.
(amps). Paragraph 2.6.9 gives more i&%iiiati~~ on
dB measurements. The third function of this key
SHIFI/NEXT-SHIFT allows access to secondary
is to enter the number 3 for numeric inputs.
functions of many of the control keys (for example,
DMM SETUP). NMT scrolls through menu selec-
ZERO/(RESOLN)-ZERO enables the zero mode,
tions for those functions with menus.
which allows baseline values to be subtracted from
subsequent measurements, and can also be used

2-4
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.3.4 CAL LOCK Switch q 2.3.7 input Terminals~

The CAL LOCK switch disables calibration from the front The input terminals are intended to be used with safety
paml OI over the IEEE488 bus. Before the unit can be shrouded te$ leads to help minimize the possibility of con-
calibrated, this switch must be enabled. See paragraph 6.4 tact with live circuits. Note that all the terminals except
for more calibration information. AMPS are duplicated on the rear panel. The front panel
INPUT switch determines which set of terminals is active.

2.3.5 INPUT Switch@ VOLTS OHMS HI and LO-The VOJ2-S OHMS HI and LO
terminals are used for making DC volts, AC volts, and two-
wire resistance measurements.
The front panel JNPLTI switch selects between the front
and rear panel input terminals. Front panel terminals are
AMPS-AMPS is used in conjunction with LO to make
selected with the switch-aut, while rear-panel term&.&
DC current and AC current measWements.
are selected with the switch in. The switch positions are
marked immediately above the switch on the front panel. OHMS SENSE HI and LO-These terminals are used with
VOLTS OHMS HI and LO to make four-wire resistance
measurements.
2.3.6 Current Input Fusea
2.4 REAR PANEL FAMILIARIZATION
The
Theclmcurrent input fuse
. is a 3A
-. normal . blow
. fuse that~pm=
t&s
tects AMPS Input
the AMY> input rrom
from excess
excessive c&rent. See”
paragraph 6.3 for fuse replace~“en+
replacement “7‘
procedures. The rear panel of the Model 199 is shown in Figure Z-2.
The various items located on the rear panel are discussed
in the following paragraphs.

r!l
6

Figure 2-2. Model 199 Rear Panel

2-5
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.4.1 Connectors and Terminals 2.4.4 Scanner Card Sloth

El Input terminals-The rear panel VOLTS OHMS and The optional Model 1992 Scanner Card installs in this slot.
OHMS SENSE terminals perform the same fufic- Refer to paragraphs 2.11 and 3.12 for scanner operation and
tions as the equivalent front panel terminals. programming information. Section 6 contains scanner in-
Voltage and two-wire resistance measurements are stallation procedures.
made using the VOm OHMS ~terminals, while
four-wire r&stance measurements are made using
both the OI-IMS SENSE eland VOLTS OHMS
2.5 DISPLAY MESSAGES
termin&.

El EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT--This BNC connec- Table 2-2 liits and explains the various display messages
tor is used to apply negative-going. TlLconipatible associated with front panel operation of the Model 199.
trigger pulses to take one or more readings depen-
dig on the selected trigger mode. See paragraph
2.9 for additional information. Table 2-2. Error Messages
q ~~
VOLTMETER COMPLETE OUTPUT-Thii BNC
output connector provides a lTLcompatible, Message Explanation
negative-going pulse when the Model 1% has com-
pleted a reading. It can be used to trigger other in-
UNCAL E’PROM failure on power
struments, as discussed in paragraph 2.9.
up. See paragraph 6.7.2.
NO FUNC No shifted function.
O.VERFL KQ Overrange-Decimal pointy
2.4.2 Line Voltage Aspects position and mnemonics
define function and range
El Lme Voltage Selection Switch-This switch selects (3k0 range shown). The
the operating lie voltage of the instrument. Before number of characters in the
operation, be sure the switch is in the correct pOsi- “OVEKW’ message defines
tion for the lie voltage in your area. the display resolution (5%d
resolut~on~shown).
El LINE FUSE-The line fuse provides protection for TRIGGER OVERRUN Trigger received while still
the AC pokier line input. Refer to paragraph 6.3 for processing reading from last
fuse replacement procedures. trigger.
AC ONLY Selecting dB with instru-
I3 LINE VOLZ4GE receptacle-Power is applied to the ment not in ACV or ACA.
instrument through the supplied power cord to the NO RANGE Pressing a range button
three-terminal, grounded AC receptacle. Note that while in ACV dB or ACA
the selected supply voltage is marked on the rear dB.
panel below the receptacle. CONFLICT Improper state when
calibrating (i.e., dB).
INTERVAL OVERRUN Interval too short.
2.4.3 IEEE-488 Connector El NO DATA No data store data
NO SCANNER Scanner not installed
CAL LOCKED Calibration locked out
The IEEE488 connector is used to interface the Model 199 CHAN 4 MAX Channel limit is 4 in 4-pole
to the IEEE-488 bus. IEEE-488 interfa& fU&io% ‘s mode*
marked immediately above the connector. Refer to Section CHAN 8 MAX Channel limit is 8 in Z-pole
3 for detailed IEEE-488 information. mode*

*With optional scanner

2-6
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.6 BASIC MEASUREMENTS CAUTION

The maximum common-mode input voltage
The following paragraphs describe the basic procedures (the voltage between input LO and chassis
for making voltage, resistance, current, and dB measure- ground) is 500V peak. Exceeding this value may
ments. damage the instrument.

High Energy Circuit Salty Precauticms 2.6.1 Warm Up Period

The Model 199 is usablq~jmmediately when it is f&t turned

To optimize safety when measuring voltage in high energy on. Howeve!, the instrument must be aowed to warm up
distribution circuits, read and use the directions in the for at least two hours to achieve rated accuracy.
following warning.

2.6.2 Zero
WARNING
Dangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a high
energy circuit can cause severe personal injury The zero feature serves as a means of baseline %uppres-
or death. If the meter is connected to a high sion by allowing a stored offset value to be subtracted from
energy circuit when set to a current range, low subsequent readings. When the ZERO button is pressed,
resistance range or any other low impedance the instrument takes the currently displayed reading as
range, the circuit is virtually shorted. Dangerous a baseline value. All subsequent readings represent the dif-
arcing can also result when the meter is set to ference between the applied signal level and the stored
a voltage range if the minimum voltage spac- baseline.
ing is reduced.

A baseline level can be established for any or all measure-

When making measurements in high energy circuits use ment functions and is remembered by each function. For
test leads that-meet the following requirements: Ample, a 1OV baseline can be established on DCV, a 5V
baseline can be established on ACV and a 1OkQ baseline
l Test leads should be fully insulated. can be established on OHMS at the same time. These levels
will not be cancelled by switching back and forth between
l Only use test leads that can be connected to the circuit
functions. Once a baseline is established for a measure-
(e.g. alligator clips, spade lugs, etc.) for hands-off
ment function, that stored level wiU be the same regardless
measurements.
of what range the Model 199 is on. For example, if 1V is
Do not use test leads that decrease voltage spacing. This
established as the baseline on the 3V range, then the
l

diminishes arc protection and creates a hazardous baseline will also be 1V on the 30V through 3oOV ranges.
condition.
A zero baseline level can be as large as full range.

Use the following sequence when testing power circuits: NOTE

The following discussion on dynamic range is
1. De-energize the circuit using the regular installed
based on a disolav resolution of 5% dieits. At 41/zd
connect-disconnect device such as the circuit breaker, ”

resolution, th’e Lumber of counts would be re-

main switch, etc.
duced by a factor of 10.
2. Attach the test leads to the circuit under test. Use ap-
propriate safety rated leads for thii application.
3. Set the DMh4 to the proper function and range. By design, the dynamic measurement range of the Model
4. Energize the circuit using the installed connect- 199, at 5%digit resolution, is 606,OKl counts. With zero
disconnect device and make measurements without disabled, the displayed reading range of the instrument
disconnecting the DMM. is GO3,OCHlcounts. With zero enabled, the Model 199 has
5. De-energize the circuit using the installed connect- the capability to display ~606,OCKlc&n-&. This increased
disconnect device. display range ensures that~~the dynamic measurement
6. Dkonnect range of the instrument is not reduced when using a zero
the test leads from the circuit under test.

2-7
baseline value. The following two examples will use the for when zeroing the 309Q range with the above procedure.
maximum allowable zero values (303,000 counts and
-303,000 cotints) to show that djkamic measurement
range will not be reduced. It is important to note that the Baseline Levels--Baseline v&es can be established by ap
inaased display range does not increase the maximum plying baseline levels to the instrument. To establish a
allowable input level to the instrument. For example, on baseline level by applying a level to the Model 199, per-
the 3V range, the Model 199 will always over-range when form the following steps:
more than i3.03V is connected to the input.
1. Disable zero, if presently enabled, by pressing the
ZERO button. The ZERO indicator will turn off.
Example l-The instrument is set to the y DC range+ 2. Select a function and range that is appropriate for the
a maximum -3.03OOOV is established as the zero value. anticipated measurement.
When -3.03OOCV is connected to the input of the Model 3. Connect the desired baseline level to the input of the
199, the display will read 0.0000W. When +3.03oooV is con- Model 199 and note that level on the display.
nected to the inpui, the display will read +6.06OOOV.Thus,
4. Press the ZERO button. The display will zero and the
the dynamic measurement range ot the Model~le is OV
ZERO indicator will be enabled. The previously
to 6.06V, which is 606,000 counts.
displayed reading will be the stored baseline.

Example Z-The instrument is still set to the 3V DC range, WARNING

but a maximum +3.03OOOV is the zero level. When
With ZERO enabled, a hazardous voltage
+3.03OCKiVis connected to the input of the Model 199, the
baseline level (i4OV or more), not displayed,
display will read 0.01IO00V. When -3.03OGOV is connected
may be present on the input terminals. If not
to the input, the display will read -6.06OOOV. Thus the
sun? what is applied to the input, assume that
dynamic measurement range of the instrument is -6.06V
a hazardous voltage is present.
to OV, which is still 606,000 counts.

5. Disconnect the stored signal from the input and con-

Zero Correction-The Model 199 must be properly zeroed
nect the signal to be measured in its place. Subsequent
when using the 3COmV DC or~the 3003 range in order to
readings wiU be the difference between the stored value
achieve rated accuracy specifications. This procedure
and the applied signal.
should be performed whenever the ambient temperature
changes. To use ZERO for zero correction, perform the
following steps:
Notes:

1. Disable zero, if presently enabled, by pressing fie

1. Disabling zero cancels the zero baseline value on that
ZERO button. The ZERO indicator will turn off.
selected fun@ion. Baselines established on other func-
2. Select the 3OOmV DC or the 30011 range. tions are not affected.
3. Connect the test leads to the input of the Model 199 2 To store a new baseline on a selected function, zero
and short them together. If four-wire resistance must first be disabled and then enabled again. The new
measurements are to be made, connect and short all value wiIl be stored with the first triggered conversion.
four leads together. Allow any thermals to stabilize.
3. Setting the range lower than the suppressed value will
Note: At 5Yxiigit resolution, low level measurement overrange the display; the instrument ti display the
techniques need to be employed. Use Kelvin test leads overflow message under these conditions.
or shielded test leads.~See paragraph 2.6.5 for low level
4. When the ZERO button is pressed to enable zero, the
measurement considerations.
ZERO indicator light will blink until an on scale reading
4. Press the ZERO button. The display will read zero. is available to use as a zero level. In the one-shot trig-
5. Remove the short and connect the test leads to the sig- ger mode, the unit must be triggered to store the zero
nal or resistance to be measured. value.
Note: Test lead resistance (Z-wire) is also compensated
2.6.3 Filter and Resolution of 1000 counts with 30 readings averaged per reading on
all ranges and functions.
The following paragraphs discuss the internal running
average filter and the 4% and 5% digit resolution modes
of the Model 199. NOTES:

1. In a continuous trigger mode, the FLTR indicator will

Filter flash until the filter is settled. Readings will continue
to update the display while the falter is settling, but the
The Model 199 uses two running average filters in order display will not represent the final, filtered reading value
to reduce reading noise. The two filters include the inter- until FLTR stops flashing (when the proper number of
nal filter and the front panel filter, as described below. readings have been averaged).
2. In a one-shot trigger mode, no readings will be
displayed or transmitted over the IEEE-488 bus until the
When the front panel FLTR light is off, the internal filter filter has settled. Each trigger clears the filter, fills the
is enabled, and the number of integrations Peru reading filter with new readings, and then issues a METER corn-
averaged depends on the selected range and function, as plete pulse once the reading is available. Therefore,
indicated below. ftitered one-shot times can be long.
3. The filter can be turned off entirely by sending the POX
command over the IEEE-488 bus; see paragraph 3.9.
#Integrations
Window Averaged
Function Range @3me.s) Per Reading &WllUtiOIl

DCV 3OOmv 6 T+ Model 199 can be operated with either 4% or 5% digits

DCV 3V-3OCv 3 i? of display resolution. In the 4?&digit mode, the instrument
ACV All N0P.e None displays &30,300 counts, while +303,OOO counts are
Ohms 300%30kQ 4 6 displayed in the 5%digit mode. Tlw~@ution can be pro-
Ohms 3OOkQ 11 g&nmed separately for each of the five measuring
Ohms 3MR ii functions.
Ohms 30MQ-300MQ 400 ;
DCA All 6 11
ACA All NOIW None NOTE
dBV NlXE None On the 3OOkQand higher resistance ranges, only
dBA None None 5%digit resolution is available.

To change display resolution press SHIFT RESOLN. The

In order to speed up response to large signal steps change,
display will toggleto the opposite resolution each time you
the Model 199 uses a “window” around the displayed
perform this keystroke sequence. Note that changing the
average. As long as the readings are within this window,
resolution restarts the ffiter; the instrumetit will display
the displayed value is based on the average of the most
dashes after changing resolution until a new reading is
recent number of integrations. If a new integratidn is out-
available for display.
side this window, the displayed value will be the new
reading, and new averaging will start from this point. The
window value for the internal filter also depends on the
The integration period of the AID converter is 2.591~~
range and function (see above).
in the 4%-d@ mode, while line cycle integration (2Omsec,
50Hz; 16.671&c, 60H.Z) is used !for 5%digits. Thus the
selected resolution affects the overall reading rate (as does
The front panel filter is enabled when the front panel FUR
the selected function and amount of filtering).
indicator is on. The front panel filter uses a fixed window

2-9
2.6.4 DC Voltage Measurements with higher voltages are significant in microvolt signals.
The Model 199 reads only the sipnal received at its inout:
The Model 199 can be used to make DC voltage measure- therefore, it is import& that-this signal be prop’erl;
ments in the range of *lpV to +30W.-Use the folIowing tiansmitted from the source. Se following paragraphs in-
dicate factors which affect accuracy, including thermal ernfs
procedures to make DC voltage measurements.
and stray pick-up.-

CAUTION
The maximum input voltage between the HI and Shielding-AC voltages
,tages which are extremely Iage
large com-
LO terminals is 42% peak or 300V RMS pared with : tne
the vc‘
DC signal may erroneously produce a DC
whichever is less. Exceeding this value may output. Therefore,
wefore, if there is AC interference, the circuit
cause instrument damage. should be shielded
-L’-‘J-J, with the shield connected to the Model
199 input LON (particularly
~par&ularly for low-level sources). Improper
sn cause the Model 199 to behave in one or more
shielding can
of the following
wing ways:
1. Select the DC volts function by__
__ pressings-- the VOLTS
hntton
button.
1. Unexpected d offset voltages.
2. Select a range consistent with the expected voltage or
2 Inconsistent -‘ readings
----lings between ranges,
use autorange.
3. Select the front or rear panel input terminals with the 3. Sudden shifts
um m in reading.
INPUT switch.
To minimize pick-up, keep the voltage source and the
NnTF Model 199 away from strong AC rn@~etic sources. The
._-.-
The 3OOmV DC range requires zero to be-set in voltage induced due to magnetic flux ii proportional to the
order to achieve rated accuracy. The zero correc- area of the loop formed by the input leads. Therefore,
tion procedure can be found in paragraph 26.2. minimize the loop area of the input leads and connect each
Signal at otily one point.

g. Cofinect the signal to be measured to the selected in-

put terminals as shown in Figure 2-3. Thermal EMFs-Thermal emfs (thermoelecttic potentials)
are generated by thermal differences between the junction
5. Take the reading from the display.
of dissimilar metals. These can be large compared to the
signal which the Model 199 can measure. Thermal emfs
can cause the following problems:

1. Instability or zero offset is much higher than expected.

2. The reading is sensitive to (and responds to)
DC Voltage temperature changes. This effect can be demonstrated
source by touching the circuit, by placing a heat source near
the circuit or by a regular pattern of instability (cor-
responding to heating and air-condition@ systems or
MODEL 199
changes in sunlight).~
I 3. To minimize the drift caused by thermal emfs, use cop-
Caution : per leads to connect the circuit to the Model 199. A
Maximum Input = 300V RMS, 425V Peak banana plug is generally suitable and generates just a
Input Resistance = 300rnV, 3V ; > lCX2 ; 3OV,llMQ few microvolts. ~A clean copper conductor such as #lO
300V : 1 OMR bus wire is about the best for this aonlication. The leads
. .,-,..._~~ to the *put may Abe shiclded’ir unshielded, as
” “‘n&essary. Refer to Shielding.
Figure 2-3. DC Voltage Measurements 4. Widely varying temperatures-w&ii the circuit can also
create thermal emfs. Therefore, maintain constant
temperatures to minimize these thermal emfs. A card-
board box around the circuit under test also helps by
2.6.5 Low-Level Measurement Considerations minimizing air currents.
5. The ZERO control can be used to null out constant off-
Accuracy Considerations-For sensitive measurements; set voltages.
other external considerations besides the Model 199 will 6. Additional thermals may be generated by the optional
affect the accuracy. Effects not noticeable when working Model 1992 Scanner.

Z-10
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.6.6 Resistance Measurements

The Model 199 can make resistance measurements from

lmf? to 300MQ. The Model 199 provides automatic selec-
tion of Z-terminal or 4terminal resistance measurements.
Th% means that if the ohms sense leads are not connected,
the measurement is done 2-terminal. If the sense leads are
connected, the measurement is done 4terminal. For MODEL 199
4-terminal measurements, rated accuracy can be obtained ----
as long as the maximum lead resistance does not exceed
the values listed in Table 2-3. For best results on the 3WQ.
3k0 and 3OkQ ranges, it is recommended that 4terminal
measurements be made to eliminate errors caused by the Figure 2-5. Four-Terminal Resistance
voltage drop across the test leads which will occur when Measurements
2-ten&al meazuements are made. The Model 5806
Kelvin Test Lead Set is ideal for low resistance 4termina.l
measurements. In the 4% digit mode, use 4terminsl or Notes:
connect the source leads to the sense leads at the instru-
ment to avoid extra noise pickup. 1. Table 2-3 shows the current output for each resistance
range.
2. It helps to shield resistance greater than 1OOkQ (or
To ~make resistance measurements, proceed as follows: anytime 4% digit resolution is used) to achieve a stable
reading. Place the resistance in a shielded enclosure and
1. Select the ohms function by pressing the QHMS buttqn. electrically connect the shield to the LO input terminal
2. Select a range consistent with the expected resistance of the instrument.
or use autoranee.
” 3. Diode Test-The 3kQ range can be used to test diodes
3. Select the front or rear panel input termirials using the as follows:
J.NruT switch. A. Select the 3kR range.
4. For 2-terminal measurements connect the resistance to 8. Forward bias the diode by connecting the red ter-
the instrument as shown in Figure 2-4. For 4terminal minal of the Model 199 to the diode anode. A good
measurements connect the resistance to the instrument diode will typically measure between 3GGQand IkO.
as shown in Figure 2-5.
C. Reverse bias the diode by reversing the c+u-wtions
5. Take the reading from the display. on the diode. A good diode will overrange the
display.

Shielded
Table 2-3. Resistance Ranges
Optional shield

Maximum Test Lead

S=hd Nominal Resistance (Q) for
Range Resolution I-Short ~1 Count Error (Wzd)

300 0 hnfl 1.7mA 10

3kfl lOmQ 1.7mA 30
30kR lOOmdt le.4 100
Figure 2-4. Two-TerminalResistance Measurements 300kR 10 5w 300
3MQ 10 n $A Ik
30MQ 100 n O&A 3k
3ooMO 1 kO 0.5&4 30k

NOTE: Typical open circuit voltage is 5.511

2-11
BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.6.7 TRMS AC Voltage Measurements Setiling Time-&c to within 0.1% of change in reading.
This time specification does not include A/D conversion
time.
The in.Wument can make TFNS AC voltage mez+rements
from 1pV to 3OOV.To m&Wire AC volts, proceed as follows:

1. Select the AC volts function by pressing the VOLTS and

AC buttons.
2. Select a range consistent with the expected voltage or AC Voltage
use autorange. SOWX
3. Select the front or rear panel input terminals using the
INPUT switch.
MODEL 199

NOTE Caution :
There is a small amount of offset (typicaUy 150 Maximum input = 300V RMS. 425V Peak, 1d V. Hz
counts at 5*/zd) present when using. the ACV Input Impedance = 1MR Shunted by < 1 OOpF
function. Do n&zero this level o&Paragraph
2.610 provides an explanation of AC voltage
offset.
Figure 2-6. TRMS AC Voltage Measurement

4. Con&a the signal to be measured to the selected in-

put terminals as shown in Figure 2-6. 2.6.8 Current Measurements (DC or TRMS AC)
5. Take the reading from the display.
The Model 199 can make DC or TRMS AC current
measurements from lOOn.4 (at Wtd resolution) to 3A. Use
Clarifications of TRMS ACV Specificatioik the following procedure to make current measurements.

Maximum AIlowable Input-The following graph sum- 1. Select the DC current or AC -nt ‘Kiticfion by prrssing
ma&es the maximum input based on the lOY*Hz the AMPS button (also press AC for AC current).
specification. 2. Select a range consistent with the expected current or
use autorange.
3. Connect the signal to be measured to the front-panel
Maximum Input TRMS AC Volts
input terminals as shown in Figure 2-7.
4. Take the reading from the display.
Maximum Input TRMS AC Volts

MODEL 199
Front Panel

Caution ; Maximum Continuous input = 3A

Figure 2-7. Current Measurements

2-12
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.6.9 dB Measurements 5-tenable the dB measurement mode by pressing SHIFT

dB.
The dB measurement mode makes it possible to compress 6. Take the dB reading from the display.
a large range of measurements into a much smaller scope.
AC dB measurements can be made with the instrument
in the ACV or AC4 function. The relationship between dB WARNING
and voltage and current, can be expressed by the follow With dB enabled, a hazardous voltage baseline
ing equations: level (34OV or more), not displayed, may be pre-
sent on the input terminals. If not sure what is
applied to the input, assume that a hazardous
voltage is present.

dBm Measurements-dBm is defined as decibels above or

below a lmW reference. dB measurements can be made
in terms of impedance rather than voltage or current.
Because the instrument cannot directly establish im-
pedance references, a voltage reference must be calculated
and established for a particular impedance reference. Use
In ACV, the instrument will read OdB when 1V is applied the following equation to calculate the voltage reference
to the input. With ACA dB selected, the instrument will needed for a particular impedance reference:
read OdB when ImA is applied to the input.

Reference levels other than 1V and l.mA cannot be directly

programmed, but they can be established with the zero
feature. This procedure simply consists of applying a signal Example: Calculate the voltage reference needed to make
to the instrument and pressing the ZERO buttonThat dBm measurements referenced to 6000.
suppressed level is the dB reference (OdB point).

For OdBm, V,., = ~O.oOlW l 6OOQ

The following procedure explains how to use the zero = -iiF
feature to establish a reference: = 77456V

1. Apply a voltage or current signal, that is to~@used as

the dB reference, to the input of the Model 199. Once the necessary voltage reference is known, it~~canbe
2. Press the ZERO button. The ZERO indicator will turn established in the Model 199 with the dB program. Subse-
on and the display will zero. The reference is now quent dBm readings will be referenced to the correspond-
whatever the applied signal is. ing impedance reference. Table 2-4 lists the voltage
3. Disconnect the signal from the instrument. references needed for some commonly used impedance
references.

AC dB Measurements-Perform the following steps to

make dB measurements: dBW Measurements-dBW is defined as decibels above or
below a 1W reference. dBW measurements are made in the
1. Select the AC volts or AC amps function. (Press,VOlX same manner as dBm measurements; that is, calculate the
or AMPS, then AC). voltage reference for a particular impedance and set the
2. Select the front or rear panel input terminals with the instrument to it with the dB program. The only difference
INPUT switch. between dBm and dBW is the reference point; lmW vs 1W.
The following equation can be used to calculate the voltage
3. Check and/or change the dB reference as previously
reference:
explained.
4. Connect the signal to be measured to the .tiput of the
For OdBW, V,., = K
Model 199.

24.3
BASIC DMM OPERATION

Table 2-4. Corresponding Voltage Reference Levels wave with a peak amplitude of NV. The average value of
for Impedance References the voltage is 6.37V while its RMS value is 7UV. If we app-
ly the 1.11 correction factor to the average reading, it can
be seen that both meters will give the same reading,
Reference Reference Voltage resulting is no error in the average-type meter reading.

I
Impedance Level for:
W) OdBm ’ OdBW
The situation changes with the half-wave rectified sine
wave. As before, the peak value of the waveform is lOV,
8 0.0894 2.828
but the average value drops to 3.18V. The KMS value of
50 0.2236
this waveform is 3&V, but the average responding meter
75 0.2739
will give a reading of 3.53V (3.18 x 1X), creating an error
150 0.3873
of 11%.
300 0.5477
600 0.7746
lml 1.0000
A similar situation exists for the rectified square wave,
I which has an average value of 5V and an F&IS value of
V,, for OdBm = q 10~‘W*Z,, 5.OV.The average responding meter gives a TRMS reading
of 5.55V (5 x Ill), while the Model 199 gives a TRMS
V,, for OdBW = 4 Z., reading of 5V. Other waveform comparisons can be found
I. in Table 2-5.

2.6.10 TRMS Considerations

AC Voltage Offset-The Model 199, at 5&d resolution, will
typically display 150 counts of offset on AC volts with the
Most DMMs actually measure the average value of an in-
input shorted. This offset is caused by the offset of the
put waveform but are calibrated to read its RMS equivalent.
TENS converter. This offset will not affect reading accuracy
This poses no problems as long as the waveform being
and should not be zeroed out using the zero feature. The
measured is a pure, low-distortion sine wave. For complex,
following equation expresses how this offset (V+,) is add-
nonsinusodial waveforms, however, measurements made
ed to the signal input (V,.):~
with an averaging type meter can be grossly inaccurate.
Because of its TRMS measuring capabilities, the Model 199
provides accurate AC measurements for a wide variety of
AC input waveforms.
Example: Range = 2VAC
Offset = 150 counts (1.5mV)
TRMS Measurement Comparison-The RMS value of a
Input = 2COmV RMS
pure sine wave is equal to 0.707 times its peak value. The
average value of such a waveform is 0.637 times the peak
value. Thus, for an average-responding meter, a correction
Display reading = -V)’ +~ (l.Smv)>
factor must be designed in. This correction factor, K can
be found by dividing the RMS valued by the average value = J 0.04v + (2.25 x 10%)
as follows: = .200005V
K = OX7 / 0.637
= 1.11
The offset is seen as the last digit which is not-displayed.
Therefore, the offset is negligible. If the zero feature were
By applying this correction factor to an averaged reading, used~ to zero the display, the 150 counts of offset would
a typical meter can be designed to gives the RMS be subtracted from Vi. resulting in an error of I50 counts
equivalent. This works fme as long as the waveform is a in the displayed reading.
pure sine, but the ratios between the RMS and average
values of different waveforms is far from constant, and can
vary considerably. Crest Factor-The crest factor of a waveform is the ratio of
itspeak value to its RMS value. Thus, the crest factor
specifies the dynamic range of a TRMS instrument. For
Table 2-5 shows a comparison of common types of wave- sinusoidal waveforms, the crest factor is 1.414. For a sym-
forms. For reference, the first waveform is an ordinary sine metrical square wave, the crest factor is unity.

2-14
 ElASlC DMM OPERATION

The aest factor of other wavefoms will, of course, depend Where T = period
on the waveform in question because the ratio of peak to t = pulse width
RMS value will vary Fbr -pie, the crest factor of a pulse
is computed as follows:
This relationship holds for all pulse waveforms.

Table 2-5. Comparison of Average and TRMS Meter Readings

AC AVerage AC Coupled Averaging

Coupled Responding TRMS M&r
Peak RMS Meter M&T Percent
Waveform V&E Vah Reading Reading Error
%lle lov ZON 7.07v zO7V 0%
+,O--

47

Half-Wave Rectified Sine lov 3.86V 3.9ov 3.86V 1%

+:m

?ull-Wave Rectified Sine 1ov 3.08V 2.98v 3.08V 3.2%

+:m

>quare lov 1o.oov 11.10v 1o.ooV 11%

+10- -
0
%-
Rectified Square Wave XIV 5.OOV 5.55v 5.Oov 11%

‘7-

&tangular Pulse lov 10. JK 22x lO’Jk---- [ 2.y”‘-K] xl00

+10-- -
x
D.W
o4?fP Y K.D.D’
iiangular Sawtooth XIV 5.77v 5.55v 5.77v 4%
2.6.11 dB Applications 2.7 DMM SETUP PROGRAMS

Measuring Circuit Gain/Loss-Any point in a circuit can There are eight DMM setup programs available from the
be established as the OdB point. Measurements in that cir- front panel of the Model 199, as summarized in Table 2-6.
cuit are then referenced to that point expressed in terms These programs are described in detail in the following
of gain (+dB) or loss (-dB). To set the zero dB point pm- paragraphs.
teed as follows:

1. Place the Model 199 in AC volts and dB. Program Selection-Programs can be selected by pressing
2. Connect the Model 199 to the desired location in the SHIFT DMM SETUP on the front panel. To scroll through
circuit. programs, press the NEXT key. Once the desired program
3. Press the ZERO button. The display will read OdB. is displayed, perform the necessary operation, as described
below.
4. Gainlloss measurements can now be made referenced
to the OdB point.
Data Entry-The IEEE-488 primary address program re-
quires numeric data entry. To enter data, use the data en-
try keys (O-9). The cursor location for data entry is indicated
Measuring Bandwidth-The Model 199 can be used to
by the bright, flashing display digit. The cursor moves right
determine the bandwidth of an amplifier as follows:
each time a number is entered. The cursor will wrap
around to the left after exiting the right most digit. When
1. Connect a signal generator and a frequency counter to
the desired value is displayed, press SHIFf to program
the input of the amplifier.
the value.
2. Set the Model 199 to AC v&s and autorange.
3. Connect the Model 199 to the load of the amplifier. Alternate Condition Selection-Most DMM setup pro-
4. Adjust the frequency of the signal generat& until ape+ grams have a&mate conditions that can be selected. TO
AC voltage reading is measured on the Model 199. This toggle the conditiop, press uprange or dowmange to alter-
is the center frequency. nate between the the two selections.
5. Press SHIFT dB button and then press the ZERO but-
ton. The OdB point is now established. Exiting DMM Setup-To exit DMM setups, repeatedly
press NEXT and scroll through the complete list in the
6. Increase the frequency input until the Model 199 reads
UlH-l”.
-3.OOdB. The frequency measured on the frequency
counter is the high-end limit of the bandwidth.
7. Decrease the frequency input until the dB reading again
Table 2-6. DMM Setup Programs
falls to -3.OOdB. The frequency measured on the signal
generator is the low-end limit of the bandwidth.

Note: The bandwidth of the Model 199 is typically Display Message

3CKlkHz. Do not use this application to check amplifiers / Program Description upon Entry
that exceed the bandwidth of the Model 199.
Software revision level REV.A0.66+’
Multiplexer on/off MUX ON
Determining Q-The Q of a tuned circuit can be deter- IEEE Primary Address 26 IEEE*
mined as follows: Line frequency (50 or 6OHz) FREQ=6OHz’
Save instrumerit setups SAVE NO
1. Determine the center frequency and bandwidth as ex- LEDS OFF
plained in the previous application (Measuring DEBUG OFF
Bandwidth). Reset instrument RESET NO
J
2. Calculate Q by using the following formula:
Q = Center Frequency/Bandwidth *Factory default values shown. 6Oti is default in the U.S.
O=lY
“Revision level may vary.

2-16
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.7.1 Software Revision Level NFXT to scroll to the next program and save current
multiplexer status.
Upon entry to the DMM setup programs, the instrument
will briefly display the software revision level presently in-
stalled in the unit, as in the example below: 2.7.3 IEEE-488 Primary Address Programming

REV.AO.66 The IEEE-488 primary address program allows you check

or modify the IEEE-488 primary address of the instrument.
The factory default primary address is 26, but it can be pro-
2.7.2 Multiplexer, Auto Zero/Cal grammed to any valid value between 0 and 30 as outlined
below. Section 3 contains detailed information on IEEE-488
The multiplexer auto/cal routines may be defeated by selec- programming.
ting this option under DMM setups. Using the Model 199
with auto zeroical defeated has two main advantages: (1)
increased measurement speed, and (2) reduced multi- Perform the following steps to use this program,
plexer effects bn high-impedance measurements.
1. Press SHIFT DMM SETUP and then NEXT repeatedly
until the following message is displayed:
NOTE
With the multiplexer disabled, internal calibration 26 IEEE
and zero are affected by changes in input level,
uarticularlv on ohms and the 300V range.
tVheneverihe applied input signal changes, press Here we have assumed the factory default primary address
the selected function button to perform ati auto of 26.
zeroical routine; otherwise, substantial measure-
ment errors will result. Zero and calibration may
also drift with time; thus, it is recommended that 2. ~Toexit the progmm without changing the address, press
the selected function button be pressed periodica- NEXT
ly to attain optimum accuracy while auto +ero 3. To change the address, key in the desired digits~in the
is disabled (multiplexer off). An auto zeroical is range of 030, and press NEXT to go on to the following
performed whenever the range or function is program.
changed.

NOTES:
Run this program as follows:
1. If an invalid address is entered, the primary address will
1. Press DMM SETUP and then NEXT as ~required until be set to 30 upon exiting the program.
the following message is displayed: 2. To change the default address of the instrument, fist
set the address to the desired value, and then use the
MUX ON save setup program (or send Ll over the bus). Cycling
power, or sending SDC, DCL, or LO over the bus will
not affect the newly-saved default~primary address.
2. Use uprange or downrange to select multiplexer on/off, 3 If the IEEE-488 primary address is changed but not
as required. For multiplexer off, the instrument will saved, cycling power will return the instrument to the
display: original default address. However, program reset, or
DCL or SDC commands will not affect the current ad-
MUX OFF dress. Sending LII over the bus will not change the cur-
rent address, but it will change the default address to
the new value.
3. Once the desired multiplexer status is displayed, press 4 An “LJNCAL” error will default the address to 26 and
the line frequency setting to 60Hz.

2-w
BASICDMMOPERATION

2.7.4 Line Frequency or SDC command over the IEEE-488 bus.

The programmed line frequency should match that of the

The following operating parameters are saved by this
power line voltage in order for the instrume~nt to meet its
program:
noise specifications at 5%-d@ resolution (line cycle in-
tegration is used at~S%-digit resolution). The line frequency
program can be used to check the programmed line fre-
Function
quency and set it to 50 or 60Hz.
Range
Resolution
Proceed as follows in order to check or set the line Zero state (on/off)
frequency: Filter state (on/off)
AC dB state (onioffl
1. Press SHIFI DMM SETUP and then NEXT repeatedly
until the line frequency message is displayed. For 6OHz, Multiplexer (on/off)
the display will show: Trigger delay
Reading interval
FREQ=60Hz IEEE488 primary address
Line frequency (50 or 60Hz)
2. For 50Hz, the display message is:
In order to save an instrument setup, proceed as follows:
FREQ=50Hz
1. Setup instrument operating conditions as desired, or use
the reset program (paragraph 2.78) to save default
3. Use uprange or downrange to toggle to the desired @e-
operating conditions.
quency, then press_NEXT to go on to the next program.
2. Press SHIFT DMM SETUP and then NEXT until the
following message appears:
NOTES:
SAVE NO
1. To change the default frequency setting, ftist select the
desired frequency and then use the save setup program
3. Use uprange or downrange to toggle to the following
(or send Ll over the bus) to save the new frequency set-
message:
ting. Cycling power, or sending SDC, DCL, or L1, over
the bus will not affect the programmed line frequency.
SAVESYES
2. Jf the line frequency is changed but not saved with the
save setup progmm, sending SDC or DCL over the bus
will return the line frequency to the default setting. 4. To’save instrument setup conditions, press NEXT. The
However, the reset program will not have any effect orI unit will save the op~erating states and then go on to the
the current frequency setting, and sending LO over the
next program.
bus will not change the setting, but will save the new
frequency.
3. An “UNCAL!’ error will default the IEEE-488 primary NOTES:
address to 26 and set the line frequency to 6OHz.
l.To exit the program without changing the previous
default conditions, press NEXT with the “SAVE NO”
2.7.5 Save Setup message displayed.
2. To return the instrument to the factory power up default
The save setup program allows you to save current instru- conditions, use the reset program and then save those
ment conditions. These conditions will then be assumed conditions using the save setup program.
upon power up, or after the instrument receives the DCL
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.7.6 LED lest 3. Press NEXT to reset the instrument, which will return
to the default conditions listed in Table 2-1.
This program allows you to test all the front panel annun-
ciators and LED display segments to check for proper
NOTES~:
operation. Proceed as follows:
1. The reset program can be aborted by pressing NEXT
1. Press DMM S!CTUP and then NEXT repeatedly until the
with the ‘XESET NO” message displayed.
following message is displayed:
2. Once the instrument has been reset to default condi-
LEDS OFF tions, use save setup to save that configuration if you
desire that the instrument power up in those conditions.
3. The reset program has no effect on the programmed
2. To test the LEDs, use uprange or downrange to toggle IEE~l%488 primary address or line frequency setting.
the display to the following:

LEDS ON 2.8 FRONT PANEL TRIGGERING

The following paragraphs discuss front panel triggering,

3. Press NEXT to initiate the test.
trigger mode selection, as well as trigger delay acd reading
4. During the test, the instrument will turn on all the an- interval programming.
nunciators and walk through the various display
segments and complete displays to verify that ally are.
operating properly. Following the test, the instrument
2.8.1 Trigger Mode Selection
will scroll to the next program.

The Model 199 may be operated in two basic trigger modes:

one-shot and continuous. In the one-shot mode, a separate
2.7.7 Debug
trigger is required to initiate each reading. For the con-
tinuous mode, however, only a single trigger is required,
The debug program is intended to switch various LED% with the conversion rate determined by the programmed
relays, and logic levels to allow signal tracing through the reading interval. The continuous trigger mode is the fac-
instrument duing troubleshooting. Also, memory tests are tory default.
performed. For complete details on using the debug, refer
to paragraph 6.7.3.
To check or change the selected trigger mode, proceed as
follows.
To exit the diagnostic program, press any key except
TRIGGER. 1. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP. The instrument will display
the presently selected trigger mode. For the continuous
mode, the display will show:
2.7.8 Reset
coNTINuous
The reset program restores iristrument setup parameters
to the factory default conditions listed in ‘Tables 2-l and 3-7
2. For the one-shot mode, the display reads:

Perform the following steps to use this program. O~NE SHOT

1. Press SHIFT DMM SETUP and then NEXT repeatedly

until the following message is displayed: 3. TCtij@e the trigger mode, press uprange or dowruange.
4. Once the desired trigger mode is displayed, press NEXT
RESET NO to scroll to the next menu selection (trigger delay), or
press NEXT to relurn to normal fronts panel display.

2.&e uprange or downrange to toggle the display as

follows:

RESFT YES

2-19
2.8.2 Trigger Sources between individual readings when the instrument is in the
continuous trigger mode. Interval also affects the rate of
For standard bench operation, there are two trigger sources data store operation, as discussed in paragraph 2.10, as well
available: front panel TRIGGER button, and the EXTER- as the interval between channels (step mode) or scan se-
NAL TRIGGER INPUT jack. Upon power up both these quences (scan mode) when using the optional Model 1992
trigger sources will be enabled. Additional triggers include Scanner (see paragraph 2.11).
IEEE-488 X, GET, and talk commands, as discussed in
paragraph 3.9.7.
The unit can beprogrammed for either default or selected
interval operation. With default interval (“SELECT OFF’!),
NOTES: a preset interval of l7Smsec is automatically selected. With
selected interval (“SELECT ON”) a user-defined interval
1. TRIGGER is always enabled regardless of the selected can be programmed. The allowable range for selected in-
trigger source; however, all front panel buttons will be terval is l5msec to 999.999sec in lmsec increments.
locked out when the unit is in remote.
2.~Triggering the unit while it is still processing a reading
NOTE
from a previous trigger will generate the “TRIGGER
Programming too short an interval for the present
OVERRUN” message.
instrument configuratiozi when using the scanner
or data store will result in the “INTERVAL OVER-
RUN” message. The interval cannot be programm-
2.8.3 Trigger Delay ed if the unit is in the one-shot trigger mode.

The trigger delay period is the time from the trigger point
until the unit takes a reading. This delay period is also used Reading interval can be checked or programmed with the
after each channel closure when using the scanner. For the TRIG SETUP key, as follows.
continuous mode, the delay period affects only the fast
conversion; however, with the one-shot mode, the delay 1. Press SHTn TRIG SETUP and then NEXT repeatedly
period affects every conversion, with the instrument until the following is displayed:
waiting the programmed delay time after each tr&ger
before taking a reading. For example, if you program a INTERVAL
300msec trigger delay, the unit will wait 3i%msec after each
trigger before taking a reading. Next, the unit displays:

SELECT OFF
The allowable range for the trigger delay peliod is between Or;~

0 and 999.999 seconds in one millisecond increments. The

trigger delay can be programmed with the TRIG SETUP SELECT ON
key, as described below.
2. Use uprange or downrange to select th-e-desired inter-
1. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP and then NEXTand note the val type, select or default, then press NEXT. If default
following message is displayed briefly: (SELEa OFF) is selected, the interval will be set to
l75msec, and the unit Will return to normal display.
DELAY= 3. If select interval is chosen, the presently selected inter-
000.000s val will then be displayed, as in this example:

Here, we have assumed the factory default delay period INTERVAL =

of Osec. ooo.l.75 s
2. Using the the data entry keys (O-9), key in the d#red
trigger delay period in the range of O-9999YYsec. Here we have assumed the default interval of l75msec.
3. Once the desired delay value is programmed, press
4. If desired, key in a new reading interval fin the range
NEXT to go on to the interval selection (or press NEXT
of 15msec to Y99.999seC.
once more to return to normal display).
5. Once the desired interval is displayed, press NEXT to
return to normal display. If you progam too small =*
interval, the following will be displayed:
2.8.4 Reading Interval
MIN = .OlS S
The reading interval parameter determines the time period

2-20
 BASIC OYM OPERATION

2.8.5 Trigger Programming Examples trigger other devices.

Example 1: Continuous with 3.5s~ intervals, between

readings. 2.9.1 External liigger

1. Press SHIFi’ TRIG S.ETUP and then uprange or down- The external trigger input requires a falling edge pulse at
range (if necessary) so the unit displays the following: TTL logic levels, as shown in Figure 2-8. Connections to
the rear panel EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT jack should
coNTINuous be made w~itha standard BNC connector. If the instrument
is in the external trigger mode, it will be triggered to take
readings while in either a continuous or one-shot mode
2. Press NEXT twice to advance to the interval display when the negative-going edge of the external trigger pulse
message. CICCUIS.

3. Use uprange or downrange to choose select interval ,.

(“SELECT ON”), if necessary, then press NEXL
4. Press: 0 0 3 5 0 0 in order to program a 3.5s~ interval.
5. Press NEXT to return to normal display.
6. Connect a time-varying signal to the instrument, and Triggers on
select a function and range suitable for the applied
signal
7. Press TRIGGER to initiate readings. Note that the r(- Edgi
display updates at a rate of once every 3% seconds, as
shown by the following decimal point.

Example 2: One-shot trigger mode with a one second hig-

ger delay.

1. Press SHJFI TRIG SETUP and then uprange or

downrange (if necessary) so the unit displays the
following:
Figure 2-8. External Trigger Pulse Specifications
ONE SHOT

To use the external trigger, proceed as follows:

2. Press NEXT to advance to the delay time selection.
1. Connect the external trigger source to the rear panel
3. Press: 0 0 1 0 0 0 to program a one second delay.
BNC EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT connector. The
4. Press NEXT to return to normal display. shield (outer) part of the connector is connected to
5. Connect a time-varying signal, and select an appropriate digital com.mon. Since an internal pull-up resistor is us-
range and function. ed, a mechanical switch may be connected across the
6. Press TRIGGER to initiate a single reading. Note that jack contacts. Note however, that debouncing circuitry
the display updates once after a delay of approximately will probably be required to avoid a trigger overrun.
one second.
7. Press TRIGGER a number of times, and note that one
reading per trigger is processed with a one second in- WARNING
terval between triggers and readings. The trigger~status Do not exceed 3llV between digital common and
LED (flashing decimal point) indicates the display chassis ground, to avoid a shock hazard and
update. possible instrument damage.

2. Place the instrument in “one-shot on external trigger”

2.9 EXTERNAL TRIGGERING
or “continuous on external trigger” mode as explained
in paragraph 2.8.1.
The Model 199 has two external BNC connectors on the
3. To trigger the instrument, apply a pulse to the external
rear panel associated with instrument triggering. The EX-
trigger input. The instrument will process a single
TERNAL TRIGGER INPUT connector allows the instru-
reading each time the pulse is applied (one-shot), or
ment to be triggered by other devices, while the METER
start a continuous series of readings.
COMPLETES OUTPUT connector allows the instrument to

2-21
BASIC DMM OPERATION

NOTE 2.10 DATA STORE

Triggering the unit while it is processing a reading
from a previous trigger will cause a ‘TRIGGER Data Store cant store ups to 500 readings for later recall. Data
ow3Ruw. can be stored at specified intervals of between l5msec and
999.999sec with lrnsec increments. In addition, one-shot
external or front panel triggering can be used to store data
2.9.2 Meter Complete at user-defined rates.

The Model 199 has an available output pulse that can be

used to trigger other instrumentation. A single lTL- The following paragraphs describe front panel operating
compatible negative-going pulse (see Figure 2-9) ~Wi ap:~ procedures for storing and recalling data.
pear at the METER COMPLETE OUTPUT jack each time
the instrument completes a reading. To use the voltmeter
complete output, proceed as follows: 2.10.1 Storing Data at Programmed Intervals

1. Connect the Model 199 to the instrument to be triggered Use the following procedure for storing data at defined
with a suitable shielded cable. Use a standard BNC~con- intervals.
nectar to make the connection to the Model 199.
1. Select the function and range to be used to make
measurements.
WARNING
2. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP and verify that the con-
Do not exceed 30V between the METER COM-
tinuous trigger mode is selected as follows:
PLETE common (outer ring) and chassis
gmund to avoid a shock hazard and possible in-
CONTINUOUS
strument damage.

3. If necessary, press uprange or downrange to selea the

2. Select the desired function, range, trigger mode, and
continuous trigger mode, then press NEXT and set the
other operating parameters, as desired.
trifzzer delav to the desired value.
3. In a continuous trigger mode, the instrument will out-
4. Pr& NEXT: then use upmnge or downrange to choose
put pulses at the conversion rate; each pulse will occur
“SELECT OFF” (l75msec) OY “SELECT ON” (user-
after the Model 199 has completed a conversion.
programmed) data store interval, then press NEXT.
4. In a one-shot trigger mode, the Model 199 will output
5. For select interval oniy, enter the desired data storage
a pulse once each time it completes a reading after be-
interval in the range of l5msec to 999.999sec. For e%
ing triggered,
ample, to enter a one-second interval, press: 0 0 10 0
0, then press NFXT to complete interval programming.
6. Press SHIFT STORE to enter data store mode. The in-
strument will display the programmed data store size:
Reading Begin Next
DOW Conversion 000 SIZE

The size value determines how many readings will be

zJ t i
stored (up to a maximum of 500) before the storage cycle
stops. However, a size of Ooo indicates that the storage cycle
will continue even after all 500 readings are stored. After,

I
the 500th reading is stored, readings will be stored begin-
ning at the fit memory location, overwriting the previous-
10p-b ly stored data.
Minimum

7. Key in the desired number of readings (use 000 for wrap

around storage), then press the NEXT key to program
Figure 2-9. Meter Complete Pulse Specifications that value. ST0 will flash on to indicate the unit is
waiting for a tripger;

2-22
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

8. Press TRIGGER to initiate storage. The instrument will 4. Press SHIFI STORE to enter the data store; the uni’ will
begin storing data at the programmed interval. While display the programmed size:
storage is active, you can display the most recently stored
~~=o~oo
SIZE
location by entering the recall mode (see paragraph
^ _^^~
L.IV.5,.
9~ Aftm -_.
. _-.__ all -----.‘~-
warlinm have
_.-._ heen stovz=cl
___.. _.___ -, the RCL indicator 5. Key in the desired number of readings to store (l-500),
will start &shine.
..~.._, and
~-~- ST0
- -- will
-~ turn
~~~~~off to indicate that nor select a size of 000 for wrap around storage. Press
the siborage process has been completed (except for con- NEXT to complete- programming. The ST0 light will
tinuous storaee). then flash to indicate the instrument is waiting for a
trigger.
6. Press the TRIGGER button to trigger the unit, or apply
a trigger pulse to the unit (see paragraph 2.9.1). A single
reading will be processed and stored with each trigger
1. Once data storage is initiated, data store can be disabled stimulus.
by pressing any function key (VOLTS, OHMS, etc). Do-
ing so will select that function. However, if recall is also
enabled, fit press NEXT then the desired function key ~~ NOTES: :
to disable da& store.
2. Autoranging can be used with data store, but it must 1. Data can be recalled during the storage process, as
be selecte~d before entering data store. redescribed in paragraph 2.10.3.
3. The front panel “INTERVAL OVERRUN’! message in- 2. To disable data store and return to normal operation,
dicates that the programmed data store interval is too press +y hqion key. If recall is also enabled, you must
short for the presents instrument configuration. first press NEXT to cancel recall and then press any iimc-
Although the instrument will continue to store readings tion key.
as fast as it can, storage will not occur at the programm- 3. The RCL indicator will flash on when all programmed
ed interval under these conditions. ..readings have been stored (except in continuous).
4. Enabling data store clears the buffer of previously stored 4. A ‘ll?IGGER OVERRUN” error will occur if fhe unit is
readings. triggered while processing a reading from a previous
5. If a data store size larger than 500 readings is pro- trigger. The current reading will not be aborted and the
grammed, the following message will be d~isplayed: error triggers will be buffered to re-trigger the unit when
?t is ready.
.~~
MAX = 500

2.10.3 Recalling Data

2.10.2 Triggering One-shot Readings into Data
Store Data can be recalled either during storage or after storage
is complete by using the procedure below.
Reading storage can be controlled by trigger pulses applied
to rear panel EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT (paragraph 1. Press SHIFT RECALL data. ~Ihe
iALL to display data. The instrument
will turn on the RCL
?.CL indicator and display the location
2.9), or by using the front panel TRIGGER button, as
described below. The procedure below assumes that rhe of the last stored data point; for example, for location 35:
default triaer source his not been altered by programming
the instrument over the IEEE-488 bus.

1. Select the function and range to be used to make the

2. For sequential access, use the uprange or downrange key
measurements (autorange can be used with data store).
while displaying the data value. Uprange intiements
2. Press SHLFTti [G SETLTF, and then select the one-shot
locations, while downrange decrements locations. The
trigger mode by pressing uprange or downrange so the
location will wrap around to the opposite end of the data
following is displayed:
store buffer once the lowest or highest location is
accessed.
ONE SHOT
3. To display a particular data location number while in ihe
recall mode, press the RECALL key. Press NEXT to
3. Press NEXT and pmgram the desired trigger delay. Press return to normal recall data display.
NE- note that dashes remain in the display because 4. For random access to a particular location, key in the
the instrument has yet to be triggered. location number with the data entry keys, and then

2-23
BASIC DMM OPERATION

press the NEXT key. The unit will then display the data 2.11 SCANNER OPERATION
value at that location along with the measurement func- (WITH OPTION 1992)
tion in effect ate the time the data was taken.
5. To exit the recall mode, press NEXT while normal recall
With the optional Model 1992 Scanner installed, the Model
data is displayed. RCL Will turn off ~toindicate that recall
199 &m scan four, 4-pole channels, or eight, 2-pole chan-
has been disabled.
nels. The following paragraphs discuss scanner program-
ming, connections, atid operation from the front panel.
Refer to paragraph 3.12 for IEEE-488 scar&r programm-
NOTES:
ing. For scanner installation procedures, refer tomSection 6.
1. If data store has no valid data to display, the unit will
display the following message upon entry to the recall
mode. 2.11.1 Scanner Connections

NO DATA Figure 2-10 shows the Model 1992 Scanner Card and its
two quick-disconnect terminal blocks. To remove each
block from the card, simply pull on the attached handle
2.~The unit will continue to store data while in recall until until it comes free of the card. Screw terminals on the
the data store buffer is full (or continuously in wrap blocks accept up to #14AWG solid or stranded wire.
around mode).

I”
1992 CARD

Figure 2-10. Scanner Connections

2-24
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

Terminal configuratioix are marked on the circuit board panel VOLTS~OHMS HI (red) and LO (black) jacks
and connectig blocks. Channel input terminals are mark- (Figures 2X4).
ed CHl through CHS inclusive. Each channel input has 5. For 4-pole connections, plug the cables in as shown in
a HI and LO terminal, labelled H and L respectively. Two Figure Z-1lB.
sets of output terminals, OUT A and OUT B,+we also
located on the connecting blocks. The output configura-
tion depends on the whether Z-pole or 4-p& mode is to Z-pole Connections
be used, as discussed below.
Two-pole connections are used for volts and 2-wire
resistance measurements. In order to use the 2-p_ole mode,
WARNING the OUT A and OUT B terminals must be connected
Maximum common mode voltage (potential together (H to H, L to L) and to the DMM. In the 2-pole
between any contact and earth ground) is 350V mode, if only OUT A is connected to the DMM input, on-
peak. Exceeding this value may create a shock ly channels l-4 will be routed through the relays. Similar-
hazard. ly, channels 5-8 will be available if only OUT B is
connected.

WARNING
User-supplied lethal voltages may be present on For volts and 2+&e resistance measurements; connect the
the scanner card terminals. outputs to the VOm OHMS terminals (H to HI, L to LO).
The rear panel input jacks are most convenient for this
configuration.
CAUTION
Maximum scanner signal level is 2OOV, 100mA;
any terminal to earth ground is 350V peak. Ex- NOTE
ceeding these values may damage the scanner Make sure the INPUT switch is set for the rear in-
card. put terminals.

Using the Supplied Output Cables Figure 2-G shows typical input connections for voltage
measurements. Input connections for 2-wire ohms
Red and black output cables with banana plugs are sup- measurements are shown in Figure and Z-13.
plied with the scanner for convenient connections to the
rear panel input jacks. Prepare and connect these cables
as follows: 4-p& Connections

1. Ship the ends of the cables =5/W’, then twist the four-pole connections are used exclusively for 4-w& ohms
strands together. measurements. With this configuration, the paired chan-
2. Connect the red cables to OUT A HI and OUT B HI. nels (1 and 5,2 and 6,3 and 7,4 and 8) must be connected
Tighten screws securely. to the resistances-under test, as shown in the typical con-
3. Connect the black cables to OUT A Lo and OUT B La nections of Figure 2-14. The hvo outputs are separately con-
liihten screws securely. nected to VOWS OHMS and OHMS SENSE terminals us-
iii&the supplied output cables. Note that the two outputs
4. For 2-pole connections, plug the two red cables and two
must not be connected together in the 4-p&e mode.
black cables together, and then plug them into the rear

2-25
BASIC DMM OPERATION

8.4 POLE OUTPVT CONNECTlOHS

Figure 2-11. Output Cable Connections

2-26
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

j
CH 8

CH 6
;,:
CH 5

CH4

CH3

CH 2

:
:’
IQ92 CARD

Figure 2-12. Voltage Test Connections

2-w
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

I
Reststors
Under Test

CH 4

CH3

CH 2

:‘...........................................__.._.._.._....~..
I_.
Hi

Ohms

Figure 2-13. 2-Pole Resistor Test Connections

2-28
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH5

Resistors
Under Test

CH4

CH3

CH2

I.., CH 1

:. . ..- _. .-- -.-

1992 CARD
k

NOTE
Connect All Test Leads
Directly To Resistor

Supplied Output
Cables

Figure 2-14. 4-Pole Resistor Test Connections

2-29
BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.11.2 Scanner Display Format Where: R = ratio

CHn = channel 2 through 8
The front panel display format is similar to normal display CHl=CHl
format with one important exception: The channel number
appears in the right most digit of the display while the
scanner is operating. The selected measuring function will The ratio mode is available for all three scan modes
also appear on the display except when on channels 2 (discussed below). While in ratio, the instrument displays
through 8 while in the ratio mode. The ratio mode is the selected function for channel 1, and the actual ratios
discussed in detail in paragraph 2.11.5. without units for channels 2 through 8.

2.11.3 Pole Mode Programming Ratio can be enabled or disabled by using the SCAN
SETUP key as follows:

As discussed in paragraph 2.11.1, the Z-pole mode is in-

1. Press SHIFT SCAN SETUP and then NEXT twice to
tended for use with volts, and 2-wire ohms measurements,
display the current ratio status. With ratio disabled, the
while the $-pole mode is designed for use with 4-wire
display is:
resistance measurements. For proper operation, the pro-
grammed pole mode must agree with the pole cotigura- RATIO OFF
tion discussed in paragraph 2.11.1.

2. For ratio enabled, the display shows:

The pole mode can be programmed by using the SCAN
SElVP key as outlined below. RATIO ON

1. Press SHIFT SCAN SETUP to display the pole mode.

For the 2-pole mode, the display will appear as follows: 3. To change the ratio status, press uprange or downrange.
4. Once the desired ratio status is displayed, press NEXT
2 POLE
once to advance to the next selection, or press NEXT
twice to retom to normal display.
2. For the 4-pole mode, the display shows:

NOTES:
4 POLE
1. In the MANUAL mode, you must manually access
channel 1 first before attempting to display the ratio on
3. Use uprange or downrange as necessary to toggle the
channels 2 through 8.
pole mode to the desired status.
2. The ratio is automatically scaled if the range is chang-
4. Once the desired pole mode is selected, press NEXT
ed after the channel 1 reading is taken in order to main-
once to advance to the next menu selection (ratio), or
tain a constant ratio reference value across ranges. For
press NEXT three times to return to normal display.
example, if you take a 1OVchannel 1 reading on the 3w
reading, the ratio reference wilI remain 1OV on the 3OOV
range.
NOTE
A “CHAN 4 MAX” error will occur if you attempt 3. Setting the range lower than the channel 1 ratio
to select the 4pole mode with a channel limit reference reading will cause an overflow.
greater than four. 4. The minimum ratid display value is equal to the display
resolution. The maximum ratio is 9.99999. Exceeding
this value will cause an overflow error.
2.11.4 Ratio Mode

The ratio mode divides the channel 2 through 8 readings

2.11.5 Reading Interval
by the channel 1 reading as follows:
The reading interval parameter determines the timi period
CHn between channels for the STEP mode, or the time between
R=- channel sets in the SCAN mode when the unit is in the
CHI continuous trigger mode. (In one shot, the trigger period
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

determtnes’the interval). Use the procedure below to pro- 2.11.7 Manual Channel Mode
gram the scan interval.
In the MANUAL channel mode, individual channels can
1. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP and then NEXT as necessary be accessed by pressing the SCANNER key followed by
so that the “SELECT”’ rnessaee iS diiulaved. then use the number of the channel to close. The basic procedure
uprange or downrange to saect the’d&&d interval is outlined below.
mode and press NEXT. Keep in mind that a l75msec in-
terval is automatically selected in the “SELECT OFF”.
2 For the select interval, key in the desired scan interval L Select the function and range required for the rneasure-
in the range of 25msec to 999.995~ ’ ment.
3 Press NEXT to complete interval programming once the 2.Using TRIG SETUP, program the trigger mode and
desired interval is keyed in. delay as required.
3. Press SHIFT SCAN SETUP and program 2-p& or
4-pole operation as necessary.
NOTES:
4.Press NEXT and note the displayed scan mode. If
necessary, use uprange or downrange to select the
1. The programmed interval also affects the display update
following:
rate as well as the data store interval while in the con-
tinuous trigger mode.
MANUAL
2. Smgramming an interval that is too short for the pre-
sent instrument configuration will result in the “TNTER-
VAL OVERRUN” error. Under these conditions, the in- 5. Press NEXT and disable or enable the ratio mode as
strument will continue to scan as fast as it can, but it required.
will not scan at the programmed interval.
6. Press NEXT to complete scanner setup programming.
3. Although the minimum programmable interval is
7. To close a specific channel, press SCANNER. The unit
IEimsec, the minimum usable interval with the scanner
will prompt you for the channel to close:
is 25msec.
4. Scanning rate is affected by selected resolution, delay, CHANNEL?
multiplexer (on/off), filter (on/off), function, and range.

8. Press the desired numeric key to close that channel.

2.11.6 Scan Limit For example to close channel 3, press 3.
9. The unit will close the selected channel and display the
For the mP and SCAN modes, the channel limit must charm+ number in the right most digit.
be programmed as the last step in the scanner setup pro- 10. If you have selected the one-shot tripper mode, press
cess. Note that the pole cotiguration affects the maximum TRIGGER to trigger a reading.
number of channels that can be scanned, and thus the 11. To select a different channel, press SCANNER followed
channel limit. For the Z-pole configuratiofi, the maximum by the new channel number. The unit will open the
limit is eight, while the 4-pole mode is limited to four (for presently selected channel and then close the new
bath mcdes, the minimum limit is one). If you attempt to channel (break before make).
program an improper channel limit, the unit will briefly
l2.To open all channels and return to normal operation,
display the following:
select channel 0 (press SCANNER 0).
CHAN 4 MAX
or, NOTES:
CHAN8MAX
1. When using the ratio mode, you must first access chan-
nel 1 to obtain a ratio reference reading before access-
More information on channel limit programming can be
ing other channels.
found in paragraphs 2.118 and 2.11.9.
2:’ Ins th&-pole mode, the maximum channel number is
channel 4. Selecting channels 5 through 8 will generate
a “CHAN 4 MAX” errm.

2-31
2.11.8 Step Mode Operation NOTES:

1. If an interval too short for the present configuration is

In the STEP mode, the instrument will scan one channel
selected, the instrument will display the “INTERVAL
per reading interval (continuous trigger mode) or one
OVERRUN” message. The instrument will continue to
channel per trigger (one-shot trigger mode). The pro-
step through channels, but it will not be able to scan
cedures for setting up and using the unit are covered
belOW.
the channels at the programmed intervals. The filter
status, resolution, and selected function affects the
overall reading rate, and thus the minimum interval that
Reading Interval Scanning can be used.
2. The “CHAN 4 MAX” message will be displayed if you
1. Select the function and range for the expected measure- attempt to program a channel limit greater than four in
ment. the Ppole mode.
2. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP and select the continuous
trigger mode using uprange or downrange.
Oneshot Triggering
3. PreSS NEXT twice to display the programmed interval
mode. Use uprange or downrange to select the desired
Use the general procedure below to use one-shot trigger-
interval operation, then press NEXT. ing to scan channels in the step mode.
4. For the select interval, key in the desired scan interval
in the range of 25msec and 999.999sec, and press~NFXT 1. Select the function and range as required for the ex-
to complete programming. petted measurement.
5. Press SHIfT SCAN SETLF’ and program the pole con- 2. Press SHIFT TRIG SEW, and select the one-shot trig-
figuration by pressing uprange or downrange. ger mode.~
6. Press NEXT and then uprange or downrange until the 3.~If a circuit~~settling time for each channel is required,
step mode is selected, as indicated by the following program a trigger delay under the TRIG SETUP menu.
message.
4. Return to normal display by pressing NEXT as
necessary.
STEP
5. Press SHIFT SCAN SETUP, and program the pole
configuration.
7. Press NEXT and then select the desired ratio mode by 6. Press NEXT, and select the step mode with uprange
using uprange or downrange. or downrange.
8. press NEXT to complete scanner setup programming. 7. Press NEXT and program the ratio mode as required.
9. Press SCANNER. The unit will prompt you for the last 8. Press NEXT to return to normal display.
channel in the scan sequence as follows: 9. Press SCANNER, and Program the channel limit at the
prompt. Keep in mind that the maximum channel limit
LIMIT? is 4 in the Ppole mode.
10. Press TRIGGER (or apply an external trigger pulse) to
close channel 1 and take a reading on that channel.
10. Press the number key corresponding to the last chan- The read@ and channel number will appear on the
nel in the sequence (remember that the last channel display.
is channel 4 for the 4-pole mode). 11. Trigger the unit to advance to the next channel and take
11. After the channel limit has been selected, the instru- the subsequent reading. One trigger per channel will
ment will return to normal display and begin the scan be required; after all channels up to the programmed
sequence with channel 1. As each channel is scanned, hit have been scanned, the unit will begin again with
the unit will take a reading on that channel and display channel 1.
the results along with the selected channel number. The 12. Program a channel limit of 0 to cancel the scan mode
sequence repeats until the last channel, as determined and return to normal display. To do so, press SCAN-
by the programmed limit, is scanned. After the last NER 0.
channel, the sequence starts over again with channel 1.
12. To stop scanning and return to normal display select
a liit of 0 (press SCANNER 0).

2-32
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

NOTES: 10. Key in the desired limit (l-8, 2-pole; l-4, 4-pole) with
the data entry keys.
1. The unit will display a “TRIGGER OVERRUN” message 11. The unit will then begin scanning one set of channels
if it is triggered while processing a reading from a per programmed interval, displaying the channels
previous trigger. The error trigger will be ignored. numbers as they are sequenced.
2. The Model 199 will display the “CHAN 4 &44X” 12. Tostopsscanningaad return to normal display, program
message if you attempt to program a channel limit a channel limit of 0. To do so, press SCANNER 0.
greater than 4 in the 4-pole mode.
3. In the ratio mode, channel 1 data will be displayed as
the selected function, while channels 2 through 8 will NOTES:
be displayed as the ratio.
1. Because of the relatively rapid scanning rate, it may be
difficult to read data from the display while the unit is
2.11.9 Scan Mode Operation scanning. For that reason, it is recommended that the
SCAN mode be used with data store, as discussed in
paragraph 2.11.11.
In the SCAN mode, the unit will scan one set of channels
2. The “INTERVAL OVERRUN” message will be displayed
per programmed reading interval ~(continuous trigger
if the unit cannot scan channel sets at the programmed
mode), or one set of channels per trigger (one-shot trig-
interval.
ger mode). The number of channels per sequence is deter-
mined by the program channel limit. The following 3. The filter status, resolution, and function affects the
paragraphs outline the general procedures for using scan. overall reading rate, and thus the maximum scanning
rate. For the fastest scan rate for a given function, turn
off the filter, select 4% digit resolution, and turn bff the
Reading Interval Operation multiplexer.

1. Select the range and function as required.

Triggered Scanning
2. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP, and select the continous,
trigger mode with uprange or downrange.
Each scan~sequence can be triggered from the front panel
3. Press NEXT twice to advance to the inter&al display, or with an external trigger pulse by setting up the unit as
then use uprange or downrange to select interval. follows.
4. For select interval, use the data entry keys to program
the desired interval in the range of 25msec~ to L Select the range and function as required.
999.999sec. Keep in mind that the interval is the time
2. Press SHIFT TRIG SETUP, and program the unit for
period between channel sets-- not individual channels the one-shot ~tigger mode.
as is the case with the STEP mode.
3. Press NEXT, and program the desired trigger delay.
5.~Press NEXT to return to normal display once the
4. Press NEXT twice to return to nor@ display.
desired interval has been programmed.
5. Press SHIFT SCAN SETUP, and program the pole
6. Press SHIFT SCAN SETW and program the pole and
mode as required.
mode as desired.
7. Advance to the scan mode display by pressing NEXT, 6. Press NEXT to advance to the scan mode menu, then
then select the scan mode with the following d&play: use uprange or downrange to select the SCAN mode.
Z Press NEXT to program the ratio and to return to nor-
SCAN mal display.
8. Press SCANNER, and program the channel limit as
desired.
8. Press NEXT to program the ratio and return to normal 9. Press TRIGGER (or apply an externaltriggerpulse)to
display. i&i&e the first scan SEQUENCE. The unit will scan
9. Press SCANNER, and program the channel limit at the all channels in the set and then stop. One trigger per
following prompt: SCAN SEQUENCE will be required.
10. To cancel the scan mode, program a channel limit of
LIMIT? 0. To do ~so, press SCANNER 0.

2-33
 12. Press TRIGGER (or apply an external trigger pulse) to
initiate scanning at cahnnel 1 and storage. For the STEF
1. Because of the rapid scan sequence in the scan mode, mode, one channel. per interval will be scanned and
it is recommended that thii mode be used with data stored, while in the SCAN mode, one set of channels
store. as discussed in oarazrauh 2.11.11. per trigger will be scanned and stored.
2. The unit will displa; thi “TRIGGER OVERRUN” X3. Press any function button to cancel data store. Scan-
message if it is still processing a reading from a previous ning can be cancelled by programming a channel limit
trigger. of 0.
14. Data can be recalled during or after storage as dis-
cussed below. RCL will flash when all locations are fu!J
2.11.10 Using Data Store with the Scanner (exe@ in wrap-around mode).

The data store feature of the Model 199 can be used with
One-Shot Trigger Data Store Scanning
the scanner to store data for later recall. For short inter-
vals in the STEP mode, and for the SCAN mode, using
Use the procedure below to trigger scanned data into data
data store is the recommended method of operation
store. In the STEP mode, one channel per trigger will be
because of the rapid scanning rates possible with the
scanned and stored, while in the SCAN mode, one set of
Model 199.
channels per trigger will be scanned and stored.

1. Select the range and function as required.

Scanning at Programmed Intervals
2. Use TRlG SETUP to program the one-shot trigger mode.
1. Select the range and function as required. 3. Using SCAN SETUP, program the pole mode as re-
2. Press SHIFT TRIG SFIZIP, and program the con- quired. Also select the STE? or SCAN modes under the
tinuous trigger mode. SCAN SETUP menu. Return to normal display once all
scanner setup programming has been completed.
3. Press NEXT twice to advance to the interval selection
menu. Use uprange or downrange as necessary to 4. Using the SCANNER button, progmm the desired
select interval, then press NEXT channel limit.
4. With select interval, use the data entry keys to program 5. Press SHIFT store, atid then progmm the desired data
the storage interval in the range of 25msec to store size in readings. The number of readings equals
999.999sec. Keep in mind that the unit will store one the number channels per scan sequence times the
channel per interval in the STEP mode, and one set number of scan,sequences. For example, if the channel
of channels per interval in the SCAN mode. limit is 4, the data store size would be 32 with eight scan
sequences.
5. Press NEXT to return to normal display after selecting
the interval. 6. Press NEXT to exit the data store programming mode.
The ST0 indicator will flash on to indicate the unit is
6. Press SHIFT SCAN SETUP, and program the pole
waiting for a trigger.
mode as required.
~iJ Press TRIGGER to initiate the scan/storage sequence.
7. Press NEXT to advance to the scan mode display. Use
One trigger per channel (STEP) or set of channels
uprange or downrange to select the STEP (one chan-
(SCAN) will be required to complete the sequence.
nel per interval) or SCAN (one set of channels per in-
When all readings have been taken, the RCL indicator
terval) mode.
Will start flashing.
8. Press NEXT to pro~gram ratio and to rehnn to normal
8. Program a limit of 0 to exit the scan sequence. The data
display.
can be recalled as outlined below.
9. Press SCANNER, and program the desired channel
limit. Scanning will begin at this point.
10. When the unit returns to normal display, press SHlPT Recalling Scanned Data
STORE. Key in the desired number of readings to store.
When storing data, the number of readings is equal To recall scanner data from data store, simply press SHIFT
to the number of channels per scan times the number RECALL to enter the recall mode. Press NEXT to view the
of scan sequences desired. For ewmple, if you desire last location, or key in the desired location number and
to scan all eight channels with a total of 10 scan se- then press~ the NEXT key to display the data, which will
quences, the data store size would be 80. also include the channel number in addition to the func-
11. Press NEXT once the desired data store size has been tion (except for ratio on channels 2 through 8 which
selected. The !5TO indicator will flash on to show the displays ratio not function). Use uprange or downrange
unit is waiting for trigper. Scanning will also cease at to scroll through locations, as required. You can exit the
this point. recall mode by pressing NEXT while scanned data is
displayed.
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

Although the Model 199 does not display the scan se-
quence number, you can easily determine which sequence
is being displayed by noting the data store location number
(location number can be displayed by pressing RECALL
while in the recall mode). For example, if eight channels
were scanned, locations 1 through 8 would store channels
I through 8 data for the fist sequence, locations 9 through
16 would store channels 1 through 8 data from the second
sequence, and so on.

2.11.11 A Practical Scanner Application:

Amplifier Testing

The Model 199 equipped with the Model 1992 can perform Signal Generator
tests on amplifiers with minimz4 external equipment. The
following paragmphs discuss two such amplifier test&&in
and bandwidth testing.
To Channel L
Terminals
Amplifier Gain

The ratio mode used in conjunction with the scanner can

be used to determine the gain of seven different amplifier,
using the test configuration shown in Figure 2-15.4 signal
generator is also necessary to supply the test signal to the
inputs of the amplifiers, which are also connected to the
channel 1 input of the scanner. Note that the outputs of
the amplifiers are connected to the channels 2 through 8
inputs of the scanner. Because the maximum ratio the
Model 199 can display is 10, amplifier gains are limited to
that value. For higher gains, the values must be computed
manually.
1992 CARD

Figure 2-15. Amplifier Gain Test Configuration

2-35
BASIC DMM OPERATION

In order to perform the gain tests, the following general To deterr@ne bandwidth, we can use the commonly-used
procedure should be followed. -3dB points in frequency response. The dB~function of the
Model 199 simplifies this task a great deal.
1. Ci%nect the epuipnient together, as shown in Figure
2-Z
2. Assuming that AC gain is to be tested, place the Model
199 in the ACV function, and select a range high
enough to measure the expected output voltages.
3. Press SHIFT TRIG SETLJl? and select the one-shot trig-
eer mode, then oroaram a one-second delav. Return
& non&displa$ af& programming the tri&er mode
and delay.
4. P&s SHIFT SCAN SETUP, and program the 2-pole
mode.
5. Press NEXT, and select the STEP scan mode with
uprange or downrange.
6. Press NEXT, and turn on the ratio mode by using
uprange or downrange.
7. Press NEXT to exit the scanner setup mode.
8. Press SCANNER, and select a channel limit of 8.
9. If you wish to store the amplifier gain data, press
SHIFT STORE and select a reading size of 8. Press
Signal Generator
NEXT to return to normal display.
10. Set the signal generator to the desired output frequency
(<3OOkHz) and amplitude for the gain test.
11. Press TRIGGER to initiate the scan. With the first trig-
ger, the instrument will take amplifier input voltage To Channel
reading on channel 1 and then store that reading as Input L
the ratio reference value. Terminals
12. Press TRIGGER to advance to channel 2. At this point,
the instrument will display the ratio of channel 2 to
channel 1, in other words, the-gain of amplifier Al. To
display the gains of the remaining amplifiers, press
TRIGGER and note the displayed ratio for each
channel.
l3. If data store was enabled in step 9, press SHK
RECALL to review the gain data. Select~~a location of
1, then press NEXT to view the data, which will be the
absolute input voltage value. Press uprange to review
channel 2 through 8 data, which will show the gain
values of the respective amplifiers.

Amplifier Frequency Response Figure 2-16. Amplifier Frequency Response Test

Configuration
The test configuration discussed above can be modified
somewhat to determine the bandwidth of eight amplifiers
connected to the channel inputs. The equipment con-
figurafion for this test is shown in Figure 2-16. This test
setup is similar to that shown in Figure 2-15.

2-36
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

The basic test procedure is as follows. Ways to minimize the generation of thermoelectric poten-
tials include:
1. Press SHIl!T TRIG SETW and program the unit for
the one-shot trigger mode. L Use only copper wires for all input and output connec-
2. Using SCAN SETUP, select the Z-pole, %I scan, and tions. If lugs are used, they should be crimped on (not
ratio off modes. soldered), and they should also be made of copper.
3. Select the ACV function, then select a range~large 2. Keep all connecting surfaces clean and free of oxides.
enough for the expected amplifier output voltages. Wires and lugs should be carefully cleaned before be-
ing mated together.
4. Program a channel limit of 8 with the SCANNER key.
3. Keep connecting points and junctions at the same
5. Press SHIFT dB to select the dB function.
temperature.
6. Set the signal generator to the desired amplitude and
4. Protect all circuits and connecting points from drafts.
mid-band frequency (for example, lkHz).
7. Press ZERO and then TRIGGER to store the OdB
reference value. The display should now show O.OOdB
Shielding
on channel 1.
8. Lower the generator frequency until the Model 199 Shielding is important to keep noise out of low-level signal
displays -3.OdB. The present generator frequency is p”hs. To m inimize problems in these areas, all input and
the lower half-power, or -3dB response point. output connections to the scanner card should be made
9. Raise the generator frequency above the mid-band using shielded cable when measuring low-level signals.
point until the display again reads -3dB. -l’Jxe generator The shields should be connected to signal LQ (not earth
frequency now represents the upper half-power, or ground) at the scanner card end for scanner input con-
-3dB response point of the amplifier. nections, and at the DMM end for scanner card output
10. Press TRIGGER to advance the channel. connections. Note that only one end of the shields should
11.~Repeat steps 7 through 10 for the remaining channels. be connected to avoid possible ground loop problems; the
other ends of the shields should be left floating.

2.11.12 Low-level Measurement Considerations

2.11.13 Using the Scanner with Other
Instrumentation
The relay contacts of the Model 1992 Scanner Card have
low-thermal characteristics (clr;V offset), allowing the card
to be used for low-level measurements. The following Although the scanner card is intended for use primarily
paragraphs discuss methods to minimize the effe& oft with the Model 199 DMM, it can also be wed with other
potential error sources. instrmnentatio”. For -pie, assume that the Model 1992
is to be used with a Keithley Model 181 Nanovoltmeter to
make PV measurements requiring a higher input resistance
Thermoelectric Potentials than is available with the Model 199.

Thermoelectric potentials (thermal EMFs) are small elec-

tric potentials generated by differences in temperature at Typical connections for this arrangement are shown in
the junctions of dissimilar metals. Such thermoelectric Figure 2-K’. Here, the scanner card outputs are connected
potentials can seriously degrade low-level measwement to the Model 181 mV input using low-thermal cables.
accuracy. For example, a copper-to-cop~per oxide junction Likewise,’ all scanner inputs must be made with low-
may generate up to lOOO~WC, while a clean copper-to- thermal cables. Use copper wire and keep all connections
copper junction will typically generate only O&WC or clean and free of oxidation. Also, all signal paths should
less. be shielded as discussed above.

2-37
BASIC OMM OPERATION

2.11.4 Scanner Delay The instrument will advise you if you have exceeded the
maximum scan rates. In the continuous trigger mode, the
A channel settling time can be incorporated by program- “INTERVAL OVERRUN” message wiIl be displayed if the
ming the scanner delay with the TRIG SETUP key. When programmed interval is too short for the present instm-
a scanner delay is used, the instrument wiIl wait the pro- ment contiguration. In teh one-shot bigger mode, the unit
will display the ‘TRIGGER OVERRUN” message if it iS
grammed delay period~after closing a channel before tak-
ing a readingThus, the delay period is essentially a chan- still processing a reading when triggered.
nel settling time to allow signals to settle before each
measurement.
2.11.16 Minimum Scan Interval Times

The scanner delay (settling time) in the range of Omsec to As discussed previously, the minimum usable interval
999.999sec can be programmed using TRIG~SETUP as depends on the function, range, resolution, as well as the
follows: multiplexer and fflter states. Table 2-7 summarizes typical
minimum interval times for various ranges and fimctions.
1. Press TRIG SETUP and then NEXT, and note that the Programming the instruments for shorter times will result
instrument displays the following: in the “INTERVAL OVERRUN” message, in which case the
unit will scan slower than the programmed interval.
DELAY=

Followed by: Times for both the STEP and SCAN modes are given at
both 4% digit and 5Yz digit resolution (where applicable),
000.000 s and all times are with internal filter on (FITR off) and MUX
ON. For DC and ohms functions, turning the internal Biter
off (using POX tier the bus) and mutiplexer off will shorten
2. Key in the desired delay period in the range of 0 to the times somewhat; times will typically be about lo-30%
999.99sec. shorter with the multiplexer and filter off. Conversely,
3. Press NEXT once to advance to the interval selection operating the instrument with the front panel filter on
menu, or press NEXT twice to return to normal display. (FLIR on) will increase the minimum interval times.

NOTES: Table 2-7. Typical Minimum Usable Scan Intervals

1. A scanner delay of at least one second should be used
when measuring AC signals. This recommendation
based on allowing the measurement to settle to withii
0.1% of the final value.
is
STEP Mode T SCAF diode
Function 4% Digit 5% Digit 4% Digil i% Digit
2. The programmed interval must be longer than the delay
I
to avoid the “INTERVAL OVERRUN” error.
30V DC 20msec 680msec EOmsec 2.lsec

I
3V AC 20msec 35msec l50mec 27Omsec
3OOQ 60msec 590msec 47Omsec 2sec
2.11.5 Using Filtering with the Scanner - -
3OOkB 7OOmsec 4.9sec
3Mt-l - 1.3sec 6.2sec
The Model 199 uses the running average type of filtering. 3OMO - 5.lsec - 32sec
When the front panel filter is on (FLTR on), additional 34OMl-l - 7sec - 65sec
averaging is used, as discussed in paragraph 2.6.3. For that 3OmA D( 20msec 380msec EOmsec 2.lsec
reason, the reading rates are slower when the front panel 3A AC 2Omsec 35msec l5omsec 270msec
filter is enabled. ACV dB 46msec - 360msec
ACA dB 37msec - 360mkc

For normal (non-scanner) operation, the display still up-

dates while the filtering process is still going on. Under NOTES:
these conditions, the FLTR light blinks until the final,
filtered reading is being displayed. With scanner opera- 1. All times are typical.
tion, however. the unit will not advance to the next chan- 2. Times shown are with FLTR off, MUX ON.
nel until the final, filtered reading has been taken. Thus,
3. Scan mode times are with eight-channel limit.
the maximum scan rates available will be slower with the
filter on than with it turned off.

2-38
 BASIC DMM OPERATION

r Shieldedcables
Low-Thermal

CHB

CH7

CH6

CH 5

v0nages
Under Test

/
‘QQ*
CARD
use pure copper -
wire to avoid thermals

Low-ThermalCable (1507)

Figure 2-17. Using Scanner Card with Nanovoltm&er

2-39/240
 SECTION 3

3.1 INTRODUCTION 3.lJl Using the Translator Mode: Describes an alternate

programming method of using easily recognized
user-defined words in place of device-depeitdent
This section cdntains information on programming the
commands.
Model 199 over the IEEE-488 bus. Detailed instructions for
all programmable functions are included; however, infor-
3.ll Bus Data Transmission Tiss: Lists typical times
mation concerning operating modes presented elsewhere
when accessing instrument data over the bus.
is not repeated here.
3.12 Scanner Pmgmmming: Discusses programming
commands used with the optional Model 1992
Additional I!ZEE-488 information is provided in the
Scanner.
appendix.

Section 3 contains the following information: 3.2 A SHORTCUT TO IEEE-488 OPERATION

3.2 A Short-cot to IEEE-488 Operation: Gives a The paragraphs below will take you through a step-by-step
simple step-by-step procedure for getting on the procedure to get your Model 199 on the bus as quickly as
bus as quickly as possible. possible and program basic operating modes. Refer to the
remainder of Section 3 for detailed information on
3.3 Bus Connections: Shows typical methods for con- IEEE-488 operation and programming.
necting the instrument to the bus.

3.4 Interface Function Codes: Defines IEEE standard Step 1: Connect Your Model 199 to the Controller
codes that apply to the instrument.
With power off, connect the Model 199 to the IEEE-488 in-
3.s Primary Address Selection: Tells how to program terface of the controller using a standard interface cable.
the instrument for the correct primary address. Some controllers include an integral cable, while others
require a separate cable. Paragraph 3.3 discusses bus con-
3.6 Controller Programming: Demonstrates simple nections in more detail.
programming techniques for a typical ~IEEE-488
controller.
Step 2: Select the Primary Address
3.7 Front Panel Aspects of IEEE-488 Operation:
Describes the operation of the bus status indicators, Much like your home address, the primly address is a
and summarizes front panel messages that may oc- way for the controller to refer to each device on the bus
cur during bus operation. individually. Consequently, the primary address of your
Model 199 (and any other devices on the bus, for that mat-
3.8 General Bus Command Programming: Outlines ter), must be the same as the primary address specified
methods for sending general bus commands to the in the controller’s programming language, or you will not
instrument. be able to program instrument operating modes and ob-
tain data over the bus. Keep in mind that each device on
3.9 Device-Dependent Commands: Contains descrip the bus must have a different primary address.
tions of most of the programming commands used
to control the instrument over the bus.

3-1
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

The @imary address of your Model 199 is set to 26 at the

factory, but you can program other values between 0 and
30 by pressing 199 SEm

v-l
More detailed information on primary address selection
is located in paragraph 3.5.
Place Unit
in Remote
1 I
Step 3: Write Your Program

Even the most basic operations will require that you write
a simple program to send commands and read back data
from the instrument. Fig-we 51 shows a basic flow chart
that a typical simple program will follow. The program-
ming example below follows this general sequence. This
program wiU allow you to type in command strings to pro-
gram the instrument and display data on the computer
CRT.

HP BASIC 4.0 Programming Example-Use the simple

program below to send progmmming commands to the
Model 199 and display the data string on the computer
CRT.

stting.
4B I:IILITPLIT 7L?:E., C:S ~~~ Send command string to

6
199
513 ENTEF: 7:‘i.i k$ Get a r&ding from the
instrument. End
93 PEINT AS Display the reading.
7,3 GOT,:, 20 Repeat. -

Figure t3-1. ‘iypicd ‘Pro&a&l& Chart

3-2
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Step 4: F’mgram Model I99 Operating Modes Step 5: Get Readings from the Model 199

You can program instrument operating modes by sending Usually, you will want to 0btaj1-1one or more readings from
the appropriate command, which is made up of an ASCII the Model 199. In the example program above, a single
letter representing the command, followed by a numeric reading is requested Andydisplayed after each command.
parameter for the command option. Table 3-l summarizes fin other cases, you may wish to program the instrument
the commands used to select function and range. configuration at the beginning of ,your program, and then
obtain a whole series of measureme&.

A number of commands can be grouped together in one

string,-if desi?ed.~Also, you must terminate the comrnai~! The basic reading st+g that the MC&I 199 sends over the
or command string with~the X character in order for the bus is in ASCII characters of the form:
instnunent to execute the commands in question.
NDCV-123456E+O

If you are using the programming example from Step_3

above, simply type in the command string when prompted where: N indicates a normal reading (0 would indicate an
to do so. Some example strings are given below. overflow),
DCV shows the function in effect (iti this case, DC
volts)
F3X select DCA function. -1.23456 is the mantissa of the reading data,
FORZX select DCV function, 3V range. E+O represents the exponent.

Table 3-1. IEEE-488 Commands Used to Select Function and Range

Mode Command Desaiption

Execute X Execute other device-dependent commands.

Function FO DC volts
AC volts
E Ohms
F3 DC current
F4 AC current
ACV dB
E ACA dB

Range
DCV AC%’ DCA ACA Ohms ACV dB ACA dB

RO Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Rl 3QOmV 3CGmV 3OmA 30inA 300 R Auto Auto
R2 3V 3V 3A 3A 3kfl Auto Auto
E 30 v 30 v 3~ ~A 3 A 30 kSl Auto Auto
3ooV.3COV 3A 3 A 3COkQ Auto Auto
R5 3OOV3OOV 3A 3A 3MQ Auto Auto
R6 3ooV3OOV 3A 3 A 3OMR Auto Auto
R7 3ooV3OOV 3A 3 A 3COMfI Auto Auto

33
IEEE-488 PROGRAMWNG

3.3 BUS CONNECTIONS

The Model 199 is intended to be connected to the IEEE48

bus through a cable equipped with standard IEEE-488 con-
nectors, an example of which is shown in Figure 3-2. The
connector is designed to be stacked to allow a number of
parallel connections at one instrument. Two scraVs are
located on each connector to ensure that connections re-
main secure. Current standards call for metric threads,
which are identified with dark colored screws. Earlier ver-
sions had different screws, which were silver colored. Do
not attempt to use these type of connectors on the Model
199, which is designed for metric threads.

Figure 3-3. IEEE-488 Connections

Connect the Model 199 to the IEEE-488 bus as follows:

1. Lie up the cable connector with the connector located

on the rear panel of the instrument. The connector is
designed so that it will fit only one way. Figure 34 shows
Figure 3-2. IEEE-488 Connector the location of the IEEE-488 c&nectcW on the
instrument.
2.Tighten the screws securely, butt do not overtighten
_.
met-n.
A typical connecting scheme for a multiple-instrument test:
set up is shown in Figure 3-3. Although any number of 3. Add additional connectors from other instruments, as
connectors can be stacked on one instnunent, it is recom- ~~ required.
mended that you~stack no more than three connectors on 4. Make certain that theother end of the cable is properly
any one unit to avoid possible mechanical damage. connected to the controller. Most controllers are
equipped with an IEEE-488 style connector, but a few
may requtie a different type of connecting cable. Con-
sult the instruction manual for your controller for the
proper connecting method.

3-4
 Table 3-2. IEEE Contact Designations

IEEE 488 INTERFACE contact IEEE-488

Number Designation Type
1 DIOl Data
D102 Data
z D103 Data
4 DIO4 Data
5 EOI (24) Management
6 DAV Handshake
NRFD Handshake
i NDAC Handshake
9 Management
10 EiJ Management
Figure 3-4. IEEE-488 Connector Location 11 P;TN Management
I.2 SHIELD Ground
13 D105 Data
NOTE 14 D106 Data
The IEEE-488 bus is limite~d to a maximum oft I5 D107 Data
devices, including the controller. The madmum El DIOS Data
cable length is 20 meters, or 2 meters times the 17 REN (24Y Management
number of devices, which ever is less. Failure to 18 Gnd, ‘(SF Ground
observe these limits may result in erratic bus I.9 Gnd, (7)* Ground
operation. 20 Gnd, (8) G:ound
21 Gnd, (9)* Ground
Gnd, (lo)* Ground
Custom cables may be constructed by using the infoqna-~~ z Gnd, (ll)* Ground
tion in Table 3-2 and Figure 3-5. Table 3-2 lists the contact 24 Gnd. LOGIC Ground
assignments for the bus, and Figure 3-5 shows the contact
CMfiglX&iO*. *Numbers in parentheses refer tosignal ground return of
referenced contact number. EOI and REN signal lines
return on contact 24.
CAUTION
IEEE-488 common is connected to digital com-
mon. Maximum voltage between digital com- 3.4 INTERFACE FUNCTION CODES
mon and earth ground is 30V.
The interface function codes, which are part of the
IEEE488 standards, define an instrument’s ability to sup-
port various interface functions, and they should not be
confused with prograrmning commands found elsewhere
CONTACT 12 ,- CONTACT 1
I
in this manual. Interface function codes for the Model 199
7
are listed in Table 3-3 and are listed for convenience on the
rear panel adjacent to the IEEE-488 connector. The codes
define Model 199 capabilities as follows:

SH (Source Handshake)-SHl defines the ability of the

Model 199 to properly handshake data or command bytes
J
CONTACT24 COKTACT-13 when the unit is acting as a source.

AH (Acceptor Handshake)-AH1 d&es the ability of the

Model 199 to properly handshake the bus when it is ac-
Figure 3-5. Contact Assignments ting as an acceptor of data or commands.
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

T (Talker)-The ability of the Model 199 to send data over 3.5 PRIMARY ADDRESS SELECTION
the bus to other devices is defined by the T function. Model
199 talker capabilities exist only after the instrument has The Model 199 must receive a listen command before it
been addressed to talk. will respond to addressed commands over the bus.
Siiarly, the instrument must receive a talk command
L (Listener)-The L function defines the ability of the before it will transmit its data. These listen and talk com-
Model 199 to receive device-dependent data over the bus. mands are derived from the primary address of the instru-
Listener capabilities atist only after the instrument has ment, which is set to 26 at the factory. Until you become
been addressed to listen. more familiar with your instrument, it is recommended
that you leave the address at this value because the pro-
SR (Service Request)-The SR function defines the ability gramming examples in this manual assume the instrument
of the Model 199 to request service from the controller. is programmed for that address.

RL (Remote-Local)-The RL function defmes the capabili-

ty of the Model 199 to be placed in the remote OI local The primary address can be programmed for any value
modes. between 0 and 30. However, each device on the bus must
have a unique primary address-- a factor that should be
PP (Parallel Poll)-l’he Model 199 does not have parallel kept in mind when setting the primary address of the
polling capabilities. Model 199. Most connolIers also use a primary address;
consult the controller instnxtion manual for details.
DC (Device Clear)-The DC function defmes the ability bf Whatever address is used, it must be the same as the value
the Model 199 to be cleared (initialized). specified as part of the contmllefs progtamming language.

DT (Device Trigger)-The ability for the Model 199 to have

its readings triggered~is defined by the DT function. To check the presently programmed primary address, OI
to change to a new one, proceed as follows:
C (Controller)-The Model 199 does not have controller
capabilities. 1. Press SHE3 DMM SETUP then NEXT. The current
primary address will be displayed. For example, if the
TE (Extended Talker)-The Model 199 does not have ex- current address is 26, the following message will be
tended talker capabilities. displayed:

LE (Extended Listener)-The Model 199 does not have ex- 26 IEEE

tended listener capabilities.

E (Bus Driver Type)-The Model 199 has open-collector bus 2. To modify the address, key in a new value (O-30) with
drivers. the numeric data buttons.
3. To return to normal operation without permanently
changing the address, press NEXT six times in
Table 3-3. Model 199 Interface Function Codes succession.
4. To store the address as the power up address, first press
NEXT twice, then use uprange to display “SAVE YES.”
Press NEXT three times to return to normal operation.

Talker (Basic talker, Serial poll, Unaddressed

3.6 CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Listener (Basic listener, Unaddressed to listen
on TAG) A number of IEEE=488 controllers aTe available, each of
SRl Service Request capability which has its own progra mming language. In this section,
RLl Remote/Local capability we will discuss the programming language for the Hewlett-
PPO No Parallel Poll capability Packard Series 200 and 300 (BASIC 4.0).
Device Clear capability
E: Device Trigger capability
co No Controller capability
Open Collector Bus Drivers
$0 No Extended Talker capabilities
LEO No Extended Listener capabilities

3-6
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.6.1 Controller Handler Software Table 3-4. BASIC Statements Necessary to Send
Bus Commands
Before a specific controller can be used over the IEEE-488
bus, it must have lEEE-488 handler sofhvare installed. With
some controllers, the software is located in an optional I/O Action HP-85 Statement
ROM, and no software installation is necessary on the part
of the user. In other cases, software must be loaded from Transmit string to device 26. tj[lTpLlT 726 j A$
a diskette and initialized. Obtain strin& from device 26. ENTER 725 ,i As
Send GTL to device 26. LOCAL 72&
Send SDC to device 26. CLEW 726
Other small computers that can be used as IEEE-488 con- Send DCL to all devices. ICLEW 7
trollers may not support all IEEE488 dictions. With some, Send remote enable. REIIOTE 7
interface programming may depend on the pa&&r in- CanceI remote enable. Ll3C!qL 7
terface being used. Many times, little “tricks” are necessary Serial poll device 26. SF’,jLL /725,)
to obtain the desired results. Send Local Lockout. LOCALSLOCKOIJT 7
Send GET to device.
Send IFC.
From the preceding discussion, the message is clear: make
sure the proper software is being used with the interface.
Often the user may incorrectly suspect that the hardware 3.7 FRONT PANEL ASPECTS OF IEEE-488
is causing a problem, when it was the software all along.
OPERATION

3.6.2 BASIC Interface Programming The following paragraphs discuss aspects of the front panel
that are part of IEEE-488 operation, including front panel
Statements
error messages, lEFZ488 status indicators, and the LOCAL
key.
The~programming instructions covered in thii section in-
clude examples written in Hewlett-Packard BASIC 4.0: This
computer language was chosen for the examples because 3.7.1 Front Panel Error Messages
of its versatility in Controlling the IEEE-488 bus. A partial
list of statements for BASIC 4.0 is shown in Tablet 34.
The Model 199 has a number of front panel error messages
associated with IEEE-488 programming. These messages
Statements have a one or three digit argument that must are intended to inform you of certain conditions that may
be specified as part of the statement. The first digit is the occur when sending device-dependent commands to the
interface select code, which is set to 7 at the factory. The instrument, as summarized in ‘Table 3-5.
last two digits of those statements requiring a 3-d@ a.rgu-
ment specify the primary address. In the -pies shown,
the default Model 199 address (26) is shown. For a different The following paragraphs discuss each of these messages
address, you would of course change the corresponding in detail. Note that the instrument may be programmed
digits in the programming statement. to generate an SRQ (paragraph 3.9.13), and the Ul error
word can be checked for specific error conditions
(paragraph 3.9.16) if any of these errors occur.
Some of the statements have two forms, with the exact con-
figuration depending on the command to be sent over the
bus. For example, CLEAR 7 sends a DCL command over
the bus, while CLEAR 726 sends the SDC command to
a device with a primary address of 26.

3-7
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-5. Front Panel IEEE-488 Messages Note that the NO REMOTE error message is briefly
displayed when the second statement above is executed.
..,,.,...,
,...-~ ,,..,,::~,,, ,, ,,,, ,: ,. ,, :: ;
MeSSage Description
IDDC (Illegal Device-Dependent Command) Error
NO REMOTE Instrument programmed
with REN false.
An IDDC error occurs when the unit receives an invalid
IDDC Illegal Device-dependent
command over the bus. For example, the command string
Command
ElX includes an illegal command because the letter Edis
IDDCO Illegal Device-dependent
not part of the instrumen<s programming language. When
Command Option
Instrument triggered while an illegal command is received, the instrument wiil brief-
TRIGGER OVERRUN
ly display the following error message:
it is still processing a
previous trigger.
IDDC
INTERVAL OVERRUN Instrument cannot store
readings at programmed in-
terval. Readings will be
To avoid this error condition, send only valid commands.
stored as fast as the instru-
Refer to paragraph 3.9 for device-dependent command pro-
ment can run.
gramming details.
BIG STRING Progmmmed display
message exceeds 10
characters.
Programming Example-To demonstrate an IDDC error,
CAL FLOCKED Calibration command sent
use the following statements:
with calibration switch in
the disable position.
Z-JAN 4 MAX* Channel limit is 4 in &pole
mode
SAN 8 MAX’ Channel limit is 8 in Z-pole
mode
Note that the IDDC errors message iS briefly displayed
when the second statement above is executed.
*Scanner error messages. See paragraph 3.12.

NOTE: Error messages associated with translator sOftware IDDCO (Illegal Device-Dependent Command Option)
are located in paragraph 3.10. Error

No Remote Error Sending the instrument a legal command with an illegal

option will result in the following front panel error
message:
A no remote error will occur if the instrument receives a
c&fi~e~d~p~&en~ ~~IJIIII~~ andthe~REN(Remote~En IDDCO
line is false. In this instance, the following error message
will be displayed on the front panel:
For example, the command WX has an illegal option (9)
NO REMOTE that is not part of the iqshument’s pmgramkng language.
Thus, although the command (Y) itself is valid, the op-
tion (9) is not, and the IDDCO errOr will result.
The error condition can be corrected by placing the REN
line true before attempting to program the instrument.
To avoid this error condition, use only valid command op-
tions, as discussed in paragraph 3.9.
Programming Fxample-To demonstrate the NO REMOTE
error message, type in the following lines:
I’mgamming Example-Demonstrate an IDDCO etir
LCCAL 7 with the following statements:

3-a
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Note that the IDDCO error message is briefly displayed CAL LOCKED
when the second statement above is executed.

Interval Overrun Error

Trigger Overrun Error
A interval overrun error occurs when the instrument can-
A trigger overrun error occurs when the instrument not store readin s in the data store ore scan at the pro-
receives a trigger while still processing a reading from a gr.ammed interv ai (Q command). However, the instrument
previous trigger. Note that any overrun triggers ar$ ig- will continue to store readings as fast as it can nm. The
nored. These overrun hi ers will not affect the instru- following message is displayed briefly when a short time
ment except to generate t l?e message below. When a tri - error occurs:
er overrun occurs, the following front panel message w 8l
i!ie dIsplayed for approximately one second: INTERVAL OVERRUN

TRIGGER OVERRUN
Programming Etim le-To demon&ate an interval over-
run error, enter tR e following statements into the
Programming Example-To demonstrate a trigger computer:
overrun error, enter the following statements into the com-
puter keyboard:

RE,+jTE 72%

The instrument will stati &&ring readings in the blffer.

However, since the instrument cannot make measurements
Note that the trigger overrun message is displayed after at the selected interval (Ismsec), interval overrun errors
the third statement is executed. will occur.

Big String Error 3.7.2 IEEE-488 REM~QTE lndiczator and LOCAL

to display a message Key
10 characters. Blank
e count as characters. Tl?e REMOTE-The REM indicator shows when the instrument
the following message 1s is in the remote mode. Note that REM does not necessarily
error occurs: indicate the state of the REN line, as the instrument must
be addressed to listen, with REN true before the REM in-
BIG STRING
dicator will turn on. When the instrument is in remote,
all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key will be lock-
‘ng Example-Enter the following statements in- ed out. When REM is turned off, the instrument is in the
“r
to t e computer to demonstrate a big strmg error: local mode.

LOCAL-The LOCAL key cancels the remote mode and

restores @al operation of the instrument.

The big string error will occu because the message is made Since all front panel keys except LOCAL are locked out
up-of I2 characters. when the instrument is in remote, thii key provides a con-
venient method of restoring front panel operation. Press-
ing LOCAL will also turn off the REM indicator and return
Cal Locked Error
the display to the normal mode if user messages were
A 01 locked error occurs when trying to calibrate the in- previously displayed with the D command.
strument over the bus with the front panel calibration
switch in the disable osition. Calibration commands will
be i nored and the Pollowmg message will Abe displayed Note that the LOCAL key will also be inoperative if the
brie Ky: LLO (Local Lockout) command is in effect.

3-9
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.8 GENERAL BUS COMMAND Pmgxamming Example-Place the Model 199 in remote
PROGRAMMING with the following statement:

PEMOTE 7215
Generd bus commands are those commands such as DCL
that have the same general purpose regardless of the in-
strument. Con%naxids supported by the Model 199 are
The Model 199 should be in remote, as indicated by the
summarized in I3ble 3-6, which lists BASIC 4.0 statements
annunciator light. If not, check to see that proper bus con-
necessary to send each command. Note that commands nections are made, and that the instrument is programm-
requiring a primary address assume that the Model 199 ed for the correct primary address (26).
primary address is set to 26 (its factory default~address).

Note that all front panel controls except LQCAL (and, of

3.8.1 REN (Remote Enable) course, POWER) are inoperative while the inshument is
in remote. You can restore normal front panel operation
REN is a uniline command that must be asserted by the by pressing the LOCAL button.
controller to place the Model 199 in remote. Simply set-
ting EN true will not adually place the instrument in
remote; instead, the unit must be addressed to listen after 3.8.2 IFC (Interface Clear)
REN is set true.
The FC command is sent by the controller to place the
Model 199 in the talker and listener idle states. The~unit
Generally, remote enable should be asserted before at-
will respond to the IFC command by cancelling TALK or
tempting to program the instrument over the bus. Once LISTEN, if the instrument was previously placed in one
the instrument is in remote, all front panel controls except
of those modes.
LOCAL~will be inoperative. Normal front panel operation
can be restored by pressing the LOCAL key.
To send the IFC command, the controller need only set
the IFC line true for a minimum of 1OO~sec.
To place the Model 199 in remote, the controller must per-
form the following sequence:

1. Set the REN line true.

2. Address the Model 199 to listen.

Table 3-6. General Bus Commands and Associated BASIC Statements

BASIC 4.0~
Statement Affect on Model 199

REMOTE 7 Goes into remote when next addressed.

IZIEORT7 Goes into talker and listener idle states.
LOCAL LljC:Kijl-lT ; Front LOCAL key locked out.
LljCkL 726 Cancel remote.
C’LEAR 7 Returns to default conditions.
CLEAR 726 Returns to default conditions.
TF: I GGER 725. Triggers reading in TZ and T3 modes.

3-10
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.8.3 LLO (Local Lockout) Programming Example-Place the instrument in the

remote mode with the following statement:
The LLO command is used to lock out operation of the
REMCITE 726
LOCAL key, thereby completely locking out, fro?t panel
operation of the instrument (recall that the remaining con-
trols are locked out when the instrument is placed in
Verify that the instrument is in remote.
remote).

Send GTL as follows:

To send the LLO command, the controller must perform
the following steps:

1. Set ATN true. .-..

2. Place the LLO command byte on the data bus.
Note that the instrument goes into the local m~ode, and
that operation of the front panel keys has now been
restored.
To cancel local lockout and return control to the front
panel, REN must be set false by sending the LOCAL 7
command to the instrument.
3.8.5 DCL (Device Clear)

Programming example-To verify LLO operation, enter the The DCL command may be used to clear the Model 199
following statements: and return it to its default conditions. Note that the DCL
command is not an addressed command, so a31 in-
FEMOTE 726. struments equipped to implement DCL wiU do so
LIXRL LOCl;rJUT 7 simultaneously. When the Model 199 receives a DCL com-
&and, it will return to default conditions (see paragraph
3.9.11). %ble 3-7 lists factory default conditions.
After the second statement is executed, the LOCAL key
will be locked out.
Table 3-7. Factory Default Conditions

To cancel LLO, type in the following statement:

Mode Command

Multiplex* Al Enabled
Reading BO A/D converter
When END LINE is pressed, control to the front panel will DC volts
Function*
be restored.
Data Format E Send prefix with
reading
Self-Test JO Clear
3.8.4 GTL (Go To Local) EOI Ko Enable EOI and bus
hold-off on X
The GTL command is used to take the instrument out of SRQ MO Disabled
the remote mode and restore operation of the front panel Filter* Internal enabled
keys. Interval’ E l75msec (SELECT
OFF)
Data Store Size’ IO Coniinuous
To send GTL, the controller must perform the following Range* R4 3oov
sequence: Rate* Sl SYzd, line cycle
integration
1. Set ATN true. Trigger T6 continuous on ex-
2. Address the Model 199 to listen. ternal trigger
Delay’ wo No delay
3. Place the GTL command byte on the data lines.
Terminator CR LF
Zero zi Disabled
The GTL command will not cancel LLO (local lockout)
since it does not set REN false. These defaults can be changed. See paragraph 3.9.11.

3-11
 lEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

To send the DCL command, the controller must perform i. <DC will not have any effect on the current IEEE
the following steps: address.

1. Set ATN true.

2. Place the DCL command byte on the data bus. Programming Example-Using several front panel con-
trols, alter instrument states from the default configura-
tion Send SDC with the following statement:
Notes:

1. DCL will return the instrument to the default line fre-

quency setting.
When the above statement is executed, the instrument
2. DCL will not have any effect on the current IEEE
returns to the default configuration.
address.

Programming Example--Place the unit in an operating 3.8.7 GET (Group Execute Trigger)
mode that is not a default condition. Now enter the follow-
ing statement into the keyboard: GET may be used to initiate a Model 199 measurement se-
quence if the instrument is placed in the appropriate trig-
ger mode (see paragraph 3.9). Once triggered, the instru-
ment will take a single reading or series of readings.

Note that the instrument returns to the default conditions.

To send GET the controller must perform the following
sequence:-
3.8.6 SDC (Selective Device Clear)
1. Set ATN low.
The SDC command is an addressed command that per- 2. Address the Model 199 to listen.
forms essentially the same function as the DCL command. 3. Place the GET command byte on the data bus.
However, since each device must be individually address-
ed, the SDC command provides a method to clear only
a single, selected instrument instead of clearing all in- Programming Example-Type in the following statements
struments simultaneously, as is the case with DCL.-When to place the instrument in the correct hitzger mode for pur-
the Model 199 receives the SDC command, it wil1 return poses of this demonstration:
to the default conditions (see paragraph 3.9.11). Table 37
lists factory default conditions.

To transmit the SDC command, the controller must per-

form the following steps: Now trigger the reading by sending GET with the follow-
ing statement:
1. Set ATN true.
2. Address the Model 199 to listen.
3. Place the SDC command byte on the data bus.

The reading will be triggered when the statement is

Notes: executed.

1. SDC~ will return the instrument to the default line fre-

quency setting.

3-12
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.8.8 Serial Polling (SPE,SPD) ample, a command to control the measuring function is
programmed by sending an ASCII “F” followed by a
The serial poIIing sequence is used to obtain the Model number representing the function option.
199 serial poll byte. The serial poIl byte contains impor-
tant information about internal functions, as described in
paragraph 3.9.13. The serial polIing sequence can also be A number of commands may be grouped together in one
used by the controller to determine which instrument on string. A command string is usuaIly terminated with an
the bus has asserted SRQ (Service Request): ASCII “X” character, which tells the instrument to execute
the command stxing. Commands sent without the execute
character will not be executed at that time, but they will
The serial polling sequence is generally conducted asp be retained within an internal command buffer for execu-
follows: tion at the time the X character is received. If any errors
occur, the instrument wilI display appropriate front panel
1. The contrder sets P;IN true. error messages and generate an SRQ if prograkned to do
so.
2. The controller then places the SPE (Serial Poll Enable)
command byte on the data bus. At this point; all active
devices are in the serial poll enabled mode and waiting~
Commands that affect instrument operation will trigger a
to be addressed.
reading when the command is executed. These bus com-
3. The Model 199 is then addressed to talk. mands affect the Model 199 much Iike the front pane1 con-
4. The controller sets ATN fake. trols. Note that commands are not necessarily executed in
5. The instrument places its serial poll byte on the data the order received; instead, they will be executed in
bus to be read by the controller. alphabetical order. Thus to force a particular command se-
6. The controlher then sets ATN true and places the SPD quence, you would follow each command with the execute
(Serial Poll Disable) command byte on the data bus to character (X),~ as in the example sting, L.OXF2X, which will
end the serial polling sequence. reset the instrument to factory default conditions and then
select the ohms function.

Once instrumtiiits are in the serial poll mode, steps 3

through 5 above can be repeated by sending the correct Device-dependent commands can be sent either one at a
talk address for each instrument. time, or in groups of several commands within a single
string. Some examples of valid command strings indude:

Programming Example-The SI’OLL statement FOX-Single command string.

automatically performs the sequence just described. TO FOKlPOROX-Multiple command string.
demonstrate serial polling, type in the following program T6 X-Spaces are ignored.
lines:

Typical invalid command stings iriclude:

ED&-Invalid command, as E is not one of the instrument

commands.
F15X-Invalid command option because 15 is not an option
of the F command.
When the above program is executed, the Model 199 is
serial polled, and the decimal value of the serial poll byte
is displayed on the computer CRT. If-an illegal command (IDDC), illegal command option
(IDDCO), is sent, or if a command string is sent with REN
false, the string will not be executed.
3.9 DEVICE-DEPENDENT COMMAND
PROGRAMMING
Device-dependent commands that control the Model 199
itself are listed in Table 3-8 (Scanner programming is
IEEE-488 device-dependent commands are used with the
covered separately in paragraph 3.12). These commands
Model 199 to control various operating modes such as
are covered in detail in the foIloWing paragraphs. The
function, range, trigger mode and data format. Each com-
associated programming examples show how to send the
mand is made up of a single ASCII letter followed by a
commands from BASIC 4.0.
number representing an option of that command. For ex-

3-w
Notes: In order to send a device-dependent command, the con-
troller must perform the following steps:
1. Programming examples assume that the Model 199 is
at its factory default value of 26. L Set ATN tme.
2. Device dependent commands sent over the bus while 2. Address the Model 199 to listen.
the unit is in a front panel menu will be ignored. Before 3. Set ATN false.
programming over the bus, press NEXT as many times 4. Send the command string over the bus one byte at a
as necessary to exit the menu. time.

Table 3-8. Device-Dependent Command Summary

Auto Auto Auto Auto

300mV 3OOmV 30mA 30mA 300
3V 3V 3A 3A
30 V 30 V 3 A 3 A 30 kfl Auto
3OOV3OOV 3A 3AUK)kR Auto
3oOV3OOV 3A 3A 3MQ Auto
V 3 A 3 A 3OMQ Auto

Confinuous on x
T.5 One-shot on X
T6 Continuous on External Trigger
37 One-shot on External Triger
teading Mode BO Readings from AID converter 3.9.8
Bl Individual readings from data store
B2 All readiigs from data store (buffer dump)
Ma Store Size IO Wrap around data store mode 3.9.9
In Data store of n (n=l to 500)

3-14
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-8. Device-Dependent Command Summary (Cont.)

Reading with prefuc.

Data store half full

Disable both EOI and bus hold-off on X

stah.ls UO Send machine status word 3.9.16

Ul Send error conditions
Send Translator word list
iii Send buffer size
u4 Send current value of “V”
U5 Send input switch status (front/rear)
Multiplex A0 Auto/Cal multiplex disabled 3.927
Al Auto/Cal multiplex enabled
Delay Wn n=delay period in milliseconds, (Omsec to 999999msec) 3.9.18
Self-test JO Test, ROM, RAM, ETROM 3.9.19
Hit Button Hn Hit front panels ~xtton number n 3.9.20
Display Da Display up to 10 character message. a=character 3.92
D Cancel display mode

3-15
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

NOTES: ment responds to a function command, it will be ready

togtake a reading once the front end is set up. The func-
1. RFN must be true when sending device-dependent com- tion may be programmed by sending one of the following
mands to the instrument, or it will ignore the command commands:
and display a bus error message.
2. Scanner programming commands are covered in FO = DC~Volts
paragraph 3.12. FI = AC Volts
FZ = Ohms
F3 = DC Current
General Programming Example-Device-dependent corn-
F4 = AC Current
mands may be sent from the computer with the follow-
ing statement: F5 = ACV dB
F6 ~= ACA dB

A$ in this case contains the ASCII characters representing Upon power up, or after the instrument receives a DCL
the command string. or SDCcommand, the Model 199 will return to the default
condition.

3.9.1 Execute (X)

Programming Example-Place the instrument in the ohms
function by pressing the OHMS button and enter the
The tiecute command is implemented by sending an following statements into the computer keyboard:
ASCII “X” over the bus. Its purpose is to direct the Mod&l
199 to execute other device-dependent commands such as
F (fwxtion) or R (range). Usually, the execute character
is the last byte in the command string (a number of com-
mands may be grouped together into one string); however,
there may be certain circumstances where it is desirable
When FOX is executed, the instrument changes to DCvolts.
to send a command string @ one time, and then send the
execute character later on. Command strings sent without
the execute character will be stored within an internal corn-
mand buffer for later execution. When the X character is
3.9.3 Range (R)
finally transmitted, the stored commands will be executed,
assuming that all commands in the previous string were The range command gives the user control over the sen-
valid. sitivity of the instrument. This command, and its options,
perform essentially the same functions as the front panel
Range buttons. Range command parameters and the
Programming Example-Enter the following statements in- *Spective ranges for each measuring function are sum-
to the keyboard: marized in Table 3-9. The instrument will be ready to take
a reading after the range is set up when responding to a
range command.

Upon power up, or after the instrument receives a DCL

The X-character will be transmitted to the insinunent. No or SDC command, the Model 159 will return to the default
mode changes will occur with this example because no condition.
other commands were sent. Note that the instrument re-
mains in the listener active state after the command is
transmitted. hgrammi ng Example-Make sure the instrument is in
the autorange mode and then enter the following
statements into the computer:
3.9.2 Function (F)

The function command allows the user to select the type

of measurement made by the Model 199. When the in&u-

3-16
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-9. Range Command Summary

Command DCV
Auto Auto
3OOmv 3OOmv
ACV DCA
Auto
3omA
Range
1 ACA
Auto
3omA
1 Ohms
Auto
300 cl
I
T
\CA dB
Auto
Auto
1

I R2 1 3 VI 3 VI 3 Al 3 A I 3kO Auto
R3 30 V 30 V 3 A 3 A 30 kQ Auto

1
-
R4 300 V 3CO V 3 A 3 A 3LXIkQ Auto
l-6 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 3Mi-l Auto
R6 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 30MR Auto
I W 13OOV13OOV/ 3AI iA13OOMQ Auto

The instrument cancels the autorange mode, and enters F’rogramming Example-Se; t tt \einstrument to the 3V DC
the R3 range instead. range. With the front panel ;ZE:RO button disable the zero
mode, if enabled, and enter th<e following statements into
the HP-85 keyboard:
3.9.4 Zero (Z)

Ovei the bus, the zero modifier can be controlled in the

same way that it is controlled from the front panel. Refer
to paragraph 2.6.2 for a complete description of the zero
mod9ier. The zero modifier is contmlled by sending one
of the following zero commands over the bus: Aft&r the third statement, the ZERO indicator Wi!.l turn on
with a zero baseline of 1VDC.
ZO = Zero disabled.
ZIP = Zero enabled.
22 = Zero enabled using a zero value (V).
3.9.5 Filter (P)

The filter command controls the amount of filtering ap-

Sending Zl has the same effect as pressing the ZERO but- plied to the input signal. The Model 199 filters the signal
ton. Zero will enable, and the display will zero with the by taking the average of a number of successive reading
input signal becoming the zero baseline level. samples. Since noise his mostly ran&G inkynature, It can
be largely cancelled out with this method. Paragraph 2.6.3
discusses filtering in more detail.
The 72 command is used when a zero value, using the
V command, has already been established. When the 22 PO = No filtering
command is sent, subsequent readings represent the dif- Pl = Internal filter enabled
ference between the input signal and the value of V. For l’2 = Front panel filter enabled
example, with 0.5V on the input, sending the command
stings V2XZZ-X will result with zero being enabled and
the instrument reading -19 (0.5 -2.0 = -1.5). If 30 V Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL
is value is programmed, a value of 0 is assumed. or SDC command, the Model 199 will return to the default
condition.

NOTE
In a one-shot trigger mode, you must trigger the Programming Example-With the front panel FILTER in-
unit after sending the Z command to complete dicator off, enter the following statements into the
zero programming. ZERO will flash after sending computer.
Zl until the “nit is triggered.

Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL

or SDC command, the Model 199 will return to the default
condition.

347
The filter will turn on. quired to start each conversion. The Model 199 has eight
trigger commands as follows:

3.9.6 Rate (S) TO = Continuous on Talk

Tl = One-shot on Talk
The rate command controls the integration period and the T2~ = Continuous on GET
usable resolution of the Model 199. Table 3-10 lists the T3 = One-shot on GET
usable resolution on each function for the two S modes. T4 = Continuous on X
The integration period is dependent on usable resolution T5 = One-shot on X
as shown in Table 3-10.
T6 = Continuous on External Tr&er
l7 = One-shot on External Trigger
Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL
or SDC conimand, the Model 199 will return to the default
condition. The trigger modes are paired acqorc#ng to the type of
stimulus that is used to trigger the instrument. In the ‘ITI
and Tl modes, triggeling is performed by addressing the
Programming Example-From the front panel, set the Model 199 to talk. In the T2 and T3 modes, the IEEE-488
display of the Model 199 for DCV at 4%d resolution. Now multiline GET command performs the trigger function.
enter the following statements into the computer: The instrument execute (X) character provides the trigger
stimulus in the T4 and T5 modes. External trigger pulses
provide the trigger stimulus in the T6 and T7 modes.

Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL

or SDC command, the Model 199 will return to the default
When END LJNE is pressed the second time, the Sl rate
condition.
will be selected (5% digit resolution).

NOTES:~
Table 3-10. Rate Command Summary
1. The front panel TRIGGER button can be used to trig-
ger readings. See paragraph 2.8 for details.
2. In T6, the unit provides its own trigger.

Programming Example--Place the instrument in the one-

shot on talk mode with the following program:

?Omsec @ 50Hz, 16.67msec @ 6OHz. 1 B F:EtlDTE 726

3.9.7 Trigger Mode (T)

Triggering provides a stimuh~s to begin a reading conver-

In this example, the ENTER statement addresses the Model
sion withii the instrument. Triggering may be done h two
~199 to talk, at which point a single reading is triggered.
basic ways: in a continuous mode, a single trigger com-
When the reading has been processed, it is sent out over
mand is used to start a continuous series of readings; 111
the bus to the computer, which then displays the result.
a one-shot trigger mode, a separate trigger stimulus is re-

3-18
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.9.8 Reading Mode (B) acquire the reading and display it on the CRT.

The reading mode command parameters allow the selec-

tion of the source of data that is transmitted over the 3.9.9 Data Store Interval (Q) and Size (I)
IEEE-488 bus. Through this command, the user has a
choice of data from the A/D converter (normal DMM The data store is controlled by the interval command (Q)
readings) or the buffer (data store). The reading mode corn- and the size command (r).
mands are as follows:

BO = AID converter readings

Bl = Single Data Store readings
B2 = All Data Store readings With the Q command, the user can sele.ct the interval that
the instrument will store readings?& Q command is in
the following form:
Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL
or SDC command, the Model 199 will return to the default QO=l75msec default interval (SELECT OFF)
condition. Qn=Set interval in mill&c (L5msec to 999999msec).

When in BO, normal A/D readings will be sent. In a con- Note that the programmed interval also affects the inter-
tinuous trigger mode, readings will be updated at the con- val between readings, and scan interval.
version rate. The Bl command is used to access single
readings from the buffer. When the Bl command is sent,
subsequent readings will be taken from consecutive buf- To store readings at a selected interval (Qn), the instru-
fer locations beginning with the first memory location ment must begin a continuous trigger mode (TO, T2, T4,
(001). Once all readings have been requested, the last loca- T6). When the selected trigger occurs, the storage process
tion will be continuously sent. will commence.

The 82 command allows you to dump the entire data store One-Shot Trigger Into Data Store
contents to the computer in one operation. Individual
readings will be separated by commas, and the selected To use the data store in the one-shot mode, the instrument
data format will apply to each reading. Data fields not ap- must be in a one-shot trigger mode (Tl, l3, T5 or T7). In
plicable to the requested operation will be filIed~ with the Tl mode, one reading will be stored each time the in-
zeroes. Also, the programmed terminator and EOI will be strument is addressed to talk. In the T3 mode, each GET
asserted at the end of the complete dump--not after each command will cause one reading to be stored. In the T5
reading as is the case with the Bl mode. mode, each instrument execute character (X) will cause a
reading to be stored. Finally, in the ‘I7 mode, each exter-
nal trigger pulse will cause a reading to be stored.
NOTE
In Bl or B2 nothing will be transmitted over the
bus until data is stored in data store. Size

The size of the data store can be controlled by one of the

progamming Example-Enter the following statements in- following I commands.
to the computer to send a reading over the bus and display
it on the computer CRT. IO=Wrap around storage mode.
In=Set data store size to n (1 to 500).

In the wrap around data storage mode (IO), storage will

not stop after the buffer is fried (500 readings), but will
proceed back to the first memory location and start over-
writing data. With the Innn command, the storage pro-
cess will stop when the defined number of readings have
The second statement above sets the instrument to the A/D been stored. In this case the buffer is considered to be full.
converter reading mode. The thii and fourth statements

3-19
fE&E-488 PROGRAMMING

then request and display all 100 readings (lines 60-100).

3.9.10 Value &) and Calibration (C)

One advanced feature of the Model 199 is its digital calibra-

NOTES: ~tion~capabilities. instead of the more diificult method of
adjusting a number of potentiometers, the user need on-
1. Sending the I command enables data store; however, ly apply an appropriate calibration signal and send the
the unit must be properly triggered to begin storage once calibration value over the bus.
data store is enabled.
2. When the I command is sent, ‘i-----L’ will be displayed The V command is also used to program a zero value (see
until the fast trigger occurs. paragraph 3.9.4).
3. The data store can be disabled by sending the F
command.
The value command may take on either of the following
4. The INTERVAL OVERRUN error message indicates that
forms:
the instrument cannot store readings at~the programm-
ed interval rate. Instead, readings will be stored as fast Vnn.nnnnn
as the instrument can run. Vn.nnnnnnE+n
5. Either during or after the storage process, readings may
be recalled by using the Bl or B2 command as describ- Thus, the following two commands would be equivalent:
ed in the previous paragraph. v30
vAOE+1

Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL~

or SDC command, the Model 199 will return to the default In this example, note that only as many significant digits
condition. as necessary need be sent. In this case, the exact value is
assumed to be 3O.COOO even though only the first two digitz
were actually sent.
Programming Example-Enter the program below to
enabIe data store operation and obtain and dispIay 100
readiigs on the computer CRT: Digital Calibration-When performing digital calibration,
two (three for DCVj points must be calibrated on each
range. The first calibration value should be approximately
PROGRAM COMMENTS full range and the second calibration value should be ap-
proximately zero. ,(The third point is at minus foul1range
for DCV only). After the second or third calibration value
Send remote enable, is sent over the bus, permanent storage of the two values
Set trigger mode, and will occm.
storage parameters.
start storage process.
Set read mode to data In order to send calibration values over the bus, the c&bra-
~siore. tion command (C) must be sent after the value command
Set counter for Xl0 (V) is sent. The calibration command takes an the follow-
hp. ing form:
Get a reading.
Display reading. CO=Calibrate fast point using value (*
Loop back for next Cl=Calibrate second point using value (v)
reading. U=Calibrate third point using value (V)

The following example first sends a calibration value of 3

After entering the program, press the RUN key. The pro- and then a calibration of 0.
gram wilI set the store size to 100 (line Xl), enable the data
store (line 40), turn 011 the data store output (line XI), and v3xcox
voxclx

3-20
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

If the calibration value is greater than 303000 counts (at 3.9.12 Data Format (G)
5’hd resolution) an IDDCO ermr message will be displayed
on the Model 199. The G command controls the format of the data that the
instrument sends over the bus. Readings may be sent with
CAUTION or without prefixes. I’refixes are the mnemonics preceding
Precision calibration signals must be connected the reading and the buffer memory location. Figure 3-6
to the instrument before attempting calibration, further clarifies the general data format. The G commands
othewise instrument accuracy will be affected. are a5 follows:
See Section 6 for complete details on cali-
brating the instrument either from the front GO = Reading with prefw only. Example:
panel or over the bus. NDCV-1234567E+O
Gl = Reading without prefix. Example:
-1.234567EtO
3.9.11 Default Conditions (L) G2 = Reading and buffer memory location with prefix.
Etimple: NDCV-1234567E+O,BOOl
The I.0 command allows the user to return the instrument G3 = Readings and buffer memory without prefix.
to the factory default conditions. Factory default conditions Example: -1.234567E+O,oOl.
are set at the factory and are listed in Tables 3-7 and 2-l. G4 = Reading and channel with prefix. Example:
The instrument will power up to these default conditions. NDC-1234567E+O,Cl
The went IEEE address and line frequency setting of the
G5 = Reading and channel without prefix. Example:
instrument are not affected by the LO command.
-1.234567EeO.l
G6 = Reading memory buffer location, and channel with
The Ll command is used to save the current instrument prefix. Example: NDCV-1.234567E+O,BOOl,Cl
conditions. The instrument will then power up to these G7 = Reading buffer memory location, and channel
default conditions. without prefix. Example:
-1.234567E+O,OOl,Ol
Any of the options of the following device-dependent com-
mands can be saved as the default conditions:
Upon power up or after the instrument receives a DCL
or SDC command, the Model 199 wiJ.l return to the default
A (multiplex), F (function), P (Filter), Q and I (reading in- condition.
terval and size), R (range), S (rate), W (trigger delay), and
z (zero).
Notes:

1. The B command affects the source of the data. In the

The L command options are as follows:
BO mode, the bus data wilI come from the A/D converter.
In the Bl and B2 modes, the data will come from the
J&Restore instrument to factory default conditions and buffer.
save (Ll).
2. Programmed terminator and EOI sequences appear at
Ll=Save present machine states as the default conditions.
the end of each reading except in 82 which terminates
only at the end of the string.
3. If a buffer location or channel is not available, zero is
Programming Example-Set the Model 199 to the ohms
sent. G6 Ewinple: NLKV+2.000lOOE+1,8000,C0.
function, and enable zero and filter. Now, enter the follow-
ing statements into the computer: 4. All 9s appear in the data field for an overflow.

Programming Example-To place the in&ument in the Gl

mode and obtain a reading, enter the following statements
into the keyboard:
After the second statement, cycle power on the Model 199
and note that the instrument returns to the conditions in-
itially set in this example.

3-21
 DCV = DC Volts
ACV = AC Volts
OHM = Ohms
Notes : 1. Buffer Location 3 BOO0 with Data Store Disabled
2. Channel = CO with no Scanner or
dl3V I AC dB Volts Scanner Disabled
dBI = AC d5 Amps
RAT = Rata

Figure 3-6. General Data Format

When the second statement is executed, the instrument Upon power up or after a DCL or SDC command is re-
will change to the Gl mode. The last two statements ac- ceived, SRQ is disabled.
quire data from the instrument and display the reading
string on the CRT. Note that no prefu or suffix appears
on the data string. SRQ Mask-The Model 199 uses an internal mask to deter-
mine which conditions wiU cause an SRQ to be generated.
Figure 3-7 shows the general format of this mask.
3.9.13 SRQ Mask (M) and Serial Poll Byte
Format
SRQ can be programmed by sending the ASCII letter “M”
followed by a decimal number to-set the appropriate bit
The SRQ command controls which of a number of condi- in the SRQ mask. Decimal values for the various bits sre
tions within the Model 199 will cause the instrument to summarized in Table 3-K Note that the instrument may
reque$ service from the controller by asserting an SRQ. be programmed for more than one set of conditions
Once an SRQ is generated, that serial poll byte can be simultaneously. To do so, simply add up the decimal bit
checked to determine if the Model 199 was the instrument values for the required SRQ conditions. For example, to
that asserted the SRQ and if so, what conditions can be enable SRQ under reading overflow and buffer full con-
checked by using the Ul command, as described in ditions, send M3X. To disable SRQ, send MOX. This com-
paragraph 3.9.13. mand will clear all bits in the SRQ mask.

The Model 199 can be programmed to generate an SRQ Serial PoII Byte Porma&The serial poIl byte contains in-
under one or more of the following conditions: 5x%&on relating to data and error conditions within the
instrument. The general format of the serial poll byte
1. When a reading is completed or an overrange condition (which is obtained by using the serial polling sequence,
OCCUIS. as described in paragraph 3.88) is shown in Figure 3-7.
2. If a bus error occurs.
3. When the data store is full.
4. When the data store is ‘h full.
5. If a trigger overrun error occurs.
 &n~ 87 q6 B5 84 83 B2 Bl BO

Figure 3-7. SRQ Mask and Serial Poll Byte Format

Table 3-11. SRQ Command Parameters 1. Trigger Ovemn

2. Interval overrun
,3. Big String
Command Condition to Generate SRQ 4. Uncalibrated
5. Cal Locked
MO Disable
6. Conflict
Reading overflow
7. No Remote
zi Data store full
M4 Data store half full 8. IDDC
M8 Reading done 9. IDDCO magi
Ml6 Ready 10. Translator
M32 Error Il. No Scanner
12. Chan 4 Maximum
The bits in the serial poll byte have the following meanings: 13. Channel 8 Maximum

Bit 0 (Reading Overflow)-Set when an overrange input

is applied to the instrument. Clexed when the input is The error bit is cleared by reading the Ul word.
on range.

Bit 1 (Data Store)-Set when the defined data store size The n&w: of the error can beg determined with the Ul
I kr .a-,,&L7 data s@re. command as explained in paragraph 3.9.16. An explana-
tion of each error can also be found in paragraph 3.9.16.
Bit 2 (Data Store % Full)-Set when half the defied data
store size is full. Cleared by re-enabling data stoic.
Bit 6 (RQS)--Providesa means to DebtennUke d ‘* an bKv
^-^ was
Bit 3 (Reading Done)-Set when the instrument has CO~-~ bit
asserted by the Model 199. If this 1 is set, service was
pleted the present reading conversion. Cleared while pro- requested b y me
” uwrurnenr.
cessing a reading.
Bit 7-Not used and always set to zero.
Bit 4 (Ready)-Set when the instrument has processed all
previously received commands and is ready to accept ad-
ditional commands over the bus. Cleared while the in&u- Note that the status byte should be read to clear the SRQ
ment is processing commands. line once the instrument has generated an SRQ. All bits
in the status byte will be latched when the SRQ is
Bit 5 (Error)-Set when one of the following errors has generated. Bit 6 (RQS)~2 be deared when the status byte
occurred: is read.

3-23
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Programming Example-Enter the following progixm ifi- K2 = Send EOI with last byte; do not hold off bus on X.
to the computer: K3 = Send no EOI with last byte; do not hold off bus on X.

COMMENTS Upon power up, or after the instrument receives a DCL

or SDC command, the instrument will return to Ko.
Seth up for rein&e
operation.
The EOI line on the IEEE-488 bus provides a method to
positively identify the last byte in a multi-byte transfer se-
quence. Keep in mind that some controllers rely on EOI
to terminate their input sequences. In this case, suppress-
illegal -option. - ing EOI with the K command may cause the controller in-
Serial poll the put sequence to hang unless other terminator sequences
instrument. are used.
45 IF IDIOTEITcSI 5) THEN 46 Wait for SRQ error.
50 PRItlT ( i E7 EE, ES B4 133 Identifv the bits.
The bus hold off mode allows the instrument to temporti-
Loop eight times.~ !y hold up bus operation when it receives the X character
Display each bit until it processes all commands sent in the command
positi ion. string. The purpose of the hold off is to &sure that the
front end FETs and relays are properly configured before
taking a reading. Keep in mind that all bus operation will
cease--not just activity associated with the Model 199. The
advantage of this mode is that no bus commands will be
missed while the instrument is processing commands
Once the program is entered and checked for errors, press previously received.
the RUN key. The computer first places the instrument in
remote (line 10) and then programs the SRQ mode of the
instrument (liie 20). Line 30 then attempts to pro- The hold off period depends on the commands being pro-
gram an illegal command option, at which point the in- cessed. Table 3l2 lists hold off times for a number of dif-
strument generates an SRQ and sets the bus error bit in ferent commands. Since a NRFD hold off is employed, the
its status byte. The computer then serial polls the instru- handshake sequence for the X character is complete.
ment (line 40), and then displays the status byte bits in
proper order on the CRT In this example, the SRQ (B6)
and error (B5) bits are set because of the attempt to pro- NOTE
gram an illegal command option (K5). Other bits may also With KOor Kl asserted, hold-off will also occur on
be set-depending on instrument status. an EOI and a terminator. These delavs allow for
proper operation of the Translator sortware, since
“X” cannot be used in Translator words.

3.9.14 EOI and Bus Hold-off Modes (K)

Pmgmmning Example-To program the instrument for the
The K command allows control over whether or not the K2 mode, enter the following statements into the
instxument sends the EOI command at the end of its data computer:
sting, and whether or not bus activity is held off (through
the NRFD line) until all commands sent to the instrument
are internally processed once the instrument receives the
X character. K command options include:

Kfl = Send EOI with last byte; hold off bus until corn- When the second statement is executed, the instrument
mands processed on X. will be placed in the K2 mode. In this mode, EOI will still
Kl = Do not send EOI with last byte; hold off bus until be Bansmitted at the end of the data string, but the bus
commands processed on X. hold-off mode will be disabled.

324
 EE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-12. Bus Hold-off Times (Typical)

Typical
Command Hold Off Time When the second statement is executed, the normal ter-
minator sequence~tiill be reserved; the instrument will ter-
AO-Al l76msec minate each data string or status word with a (CR LF).
FO-Fl 105msec ~~
_ ~-~
F5-F6 16omsec
BO-81 49msec 3.9.16 Status (U)
GO-G1 58msec
JO-P lJ5msec The statuscommand allows access to information concern-
K&K1 57msec ing various operating modes and conditions of the Model
MO-Ml 57msec 199. Status commands include:
NO-N1 105llW.X
DN99- Dx 55msec UO = Send machine status word.
00-01 104msec’
Ul = Send error conditions.
QlO-Q20 lffimsec
U2 = List Translator words.
RO-Rl 106msec
IQ-R3 105msec U3 = Send a value indicating the buffer size.
so-s1 l58msec U4 = Send the present value (V).
m-n lO2msec U5 = Send input switch~ stahw (front/rear).
W20-W40 lU7llISW

YO-M 58msec
zo-Zl 105msec When the command sequence UOX is transmitted, the in-
I20-I30 lmnsec strument will transmit the stahz word instead of its nor-
Lo-L1 1OOmsec mal data string the next time it is addressed to talk. The
co- Cl 8.85s~~ (DCV) l8sec (ZOMQ) status word will be transmitted only once each time the
PO-p1 106msec UO command is given. To make sure that correct status is
transmitted, the status word should be requested as soon
as possible after the command is transmitted.
Note: Hold-off ocCurs on X or <CR> <LF-> when
enabled.
The format of UO status is shown in Figure 3-8. Note that
the letters correspond to modes programmed by the
3.9.15 Terminator (Y) respective device-dependent commands. The default
values in the status word are also shown in Figure 3-8. Note
that all returned values correspond to the programmed
The terminator sequence that marks the end of the in&u-
numeric values. For example, if the instrument is present-
merit’s data shing or status word can be programmed by
ly in the R3 range, the second (R) byte in the status word
sending the Y command followed by an appropriate
will correspond to an ASCII 3.
number. The default terminator sequence is the commonly
used carriage return, line feed (CR LF) sequence (YU). The
terminator will assume this default value upon power up,
The Ul command allows access to Model 199 error condi-
or after the instrument receives a DCL or SDC command.~
tions in a similar maimer. Once the sequence UIX is sent,
Programmable terminators include:
the instrument will &xwn.it the error conditions with the
format shown in Figure 3-9 the next time it is addressed
YO=CRLF
to talk in the normal manner. The terror condition word
Yl = LFCR will be sent only once each time the Ul command is
Y2 = CR transmitted. Note that the error condition word is a&ml-
YJ=LF ly a string of ASCII characters representing biiszy bit posi-
tions. An error co~ndition is also flagged in the serial poll
byte, and the instrument can be programmed to generate
HP-85 Programming Example-To reserve the default (CR an SRQ when an error condition occurs. See paragraph
LF) terminator sequence, type the following lines into the 3.9.13. Note that all bits in the error condition word and
computer. the serial poll byte error bit will becleared when the word
is read. In addition, SRQ operation will be restored after
an error condition by reading Ul.

3-25
 IEEE-468 PROGRAMMlNG

FACTGRY DEFAULT
199 1 II 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 000000 4 1 6 000000 0 0 O/l
CiL
199 A B F G .J K MM NN 0 P QQaQQll R S T WWWWWW Y Z SW SCANNER

,=LF CR
slo (W 2=CR
Mw=01SAsLED 3=LF
Mm=RE*DINt O”ERFLoW
Mo*=oAT* ST0RE~F”l.L ZERO (2)
MW=O/\TA STORE HALF FULL O=DISAsLm
MOs=REAolNt DONE l=ENABLED
MW=READY
M32rERROR CALlBRAnON SWrnH
O=D,S*sLED
SCANNER (N, 1 =ENABl.Eo
NO=CHANNELs OPEN
NI-N84HANNEL CLOSED SCANNER PRESENT
N10=sTEP, OPEN O=NOT INST*LLED
Nil-NW=STEP, LMT 1=INST*LLED
NZO=SCAN. OPEN
N*I-N2s=ScAN. LIMIT

Figure 3-8. UO Machine Status Word and Default Values

3-26
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

1= TRIGGER OVERRUN 1 = TRANSERR23

11
1 = INTERVAL OVERRUN ALWAYS ZERO

Tr I I

O/l
‘1 0 011 011 011 011 011 O/l O/l OH 0

I = BIG STRING

1
1 1= TRANSERR21

1 = NO SCANNER
1 =CHAN4MAX J
1 = CHAN 8 MAX
1 = CAL LOCKED
1 L 1= TRANSERR20
l= TRANSERR19

1= TRANSERR18
TFiANSERR18

1= TRANSERR17
1 = CONFLICT l= TRANSERRl6

1 = TRANSERR 9
1 = NO REMOTE 1 L 1 = TRANSERRlS
1= TRANSERR14
l=IDDCJ L ALWAYS ZERO
1 = IDDCO

Figure 3-9. Ul Error Status Word

The various bits in the error condition word are odes- CHAN 8 MAX-Set if scanner commands N9 or N19 are
cribed as follows: sent.

TRIGGER OVERRUN-Set when the instrument receives CAL LOCKED-Set-when trying to calibrate the instru-
a t-igser while it is still processing a treading from a ment with the calibration switch in the disable position.
previous trigger.
CONFLICT-Set when trying to calibrate the instrument
INTERVAL OVERRUN-Set when the instrument cannot while it is in an improper state. (i.e. dB function).
m as fast as the selected interval.
Translator Error (TRANSERR)-Set when any one of ten
BIG STRING-Set if more than a 10 &mzter message is possible Translator errors occur. Table 3-15 in paragraph
sent using the display (D) command. 3.10 liits and describes the Translator errors.

UNCAGSet when E’PROM memory fails the self test. NO REMOTE-Set when a progamming command is
Instrument calibration is invalid. received when REN is false.

NO SCANNER-Set if a scanner command is sent with IDDC-Set when an illegal device-dependent command
no scanner installed. (IDDC), such as ELX is received (“E” is illegal).

CHAN 4 MAX-Set if attempting to pro&am channels 5 IDDCO-Set when an illegal device-dependent command
through 8 in the 4pole mode. option (IDDCO) such as l9X is received (“9” is illegal).

3-27
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

NOTE After entering the program, run it by pressing the RUN

The complete command string will be ignored if key The machine conditions of the Model 199 wiIl be listed
an IDDC, IDDCO or no ~Femdte error occurs. ~oii the CRT display. To show that status is transmitted on-
ly once, a normal reading is requested and displayed last.

The U2 command lists the Tanslator words that have been

defined by the operator. The list will be transmitted only 3.9.17 Auto/+ ~Multiplex (A)
once each time the command is received.
The Model 199 has built-in multiplex routines that
automatically calibrate and zero the instrument, so as to
The U3 command allows the user to find out the current
maintain its high accuracy. The multiplex routines can be
defined size of the buffer. The buffer size is controlled by
controlled through commands below. See paragraph 2.7.2
the I command. When this command is transmitted, the
for more information.
inshument will transmit the value the next time it is ad-
dressed to talk. This information will be transmitted only
A0 = Disable multiplex
once each time the command is received. The U3 value
wiIl not be cleared when read; thus, the U3 value is always Al = Enable multiplex
current. For example:

sz = 010 Upon power up or after a DCL or SDC command, the in-

strument will return to the default condition.

The U4 command sends the present value. The value is

a calibration value OI zero value, as programmed by the F’mgramming Example-Disable multiplex by entering the
V command. f6llowing statements into the computer:

The U5 command sends a value that defines the status of

the input switch. A value of 0 indicates that the front panel
input terminals are selected, while a value of 1 indicates
that the rear panel input terminals are selected. For When the second statement is executed, the multiplexer
example: routines will be disabled.

RF=1
3.9.18 Trigger Delay (W)
Fiogammin g Example-Enter the following statements in-
The delay command controls the time interval that occurs
to the computer to obtain and display the machine status
from the point the inshumenf is triggered until it begins
word (UO).
integration of the input signal. This feahre is useful in
situations where a specific time period must transpire to
allow an input signal to settle before measurement. Dur-
ing the delay period, the input multiplexing FETs are
switched on so the instrument is set to begin integration
upon conclusion of the programmed delay period. A delay
period can be programmed using the following command:

wn

Obtain UO status from Here, n represents the delay value in milliseconds. The
instrument. range of programmable delay values is from Omsec to
Display UO states word. 999999msec.
Get normal reading.
Dis~lav
1 ,
normal readine.”
9r3 END

3-28
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Examples: Prog~ng Example-Enter the following statements in-

to the computer to perform the Model 199 self-test:
For a delay of 0.0029x send WZX.
For a delay of 30.05s~ send W3005OX.
For a delay of 60s~ send W6OCCOX.

Upon power up or after receiving a DCL or SDC &ni- When the END LINE key is pressed the second time, the
mand, the instrument will rehxn to the default condition. instrument performs the self-test. If successful, the self-
test byte (J) in the UO status word will be set to 1.

Programming Example-To program a 250msec delay

period into the instrument, enter the following statements 3.9.20 Hit Button (H)
into the computer:
The hit button command allows the user to emulate vir-
tually any front panel control sequence. The H command
is sent by sending the ASCII letter followed by a number
representing a front panel control. These control numbers
are shown below.
The instrument will wait for 250msec after each triggered
conversion before executing the next conversion period.
Command Button

3.9.19 Self-Test (J) HO VOLTS

Hl OHMS
The J command causes the instrument to perform tests it AMPS
automatically performs upon power up. When the self-test E
command is given, the Model 199 performs the following H4 ZEO
tests: H5 AUTO
7
1. ROM Test ii;
2. RAM Test SCA&ER
E TRIGGER
3. EY’ROM Test
HlO SHIET

J command parameters include:

Examples:
JO = Perform self-test.
HOX-Selects the VOLTS function.
H2X-Selects the AMPS function.
Jf the self-test is successful, the J byte in the UO status word
will be set to 1. If E’PROM fails, the message “UNCAII’
will be displayed and the J byte in the Ul status word will F’qmmmirtg Example-Enter the following statements in-
be set to 2. An EY’ROM failure is also flagged in the Ul to the computer to place the instrument in the ohms
status word. If ROM and RAM fails, the instrument will function:
lock up.

See paragraph 67.2 for more information on these tests

and recommendations to resolve a failure.
The instrument is placed in the ohms function.

3-29
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.9.21 Display (D)

The display command controls the ASCII messages that

can be placed onto the Model 199 display. Messages are
controlled with the following commands: The instrument model number will be displayed. Display
operation may be returned to normal by entering the
Da = Display character “a”, where “a” represents a print- following statement:
able ASCII character. Up to 10 characters may be
sent.
D = Restores display back to normal.

3.10 TRANSLATOR SOFTWARE

Notes:
1. In order to have spaces preceding the beginning of then The built in Translator software allows the user ~todefine
message and between message words, use the @ sym- hi own words in place of Keithley’s defined device-
bol to represent each space. For example, to display the dependent commands. One word can replace a single
message “Model 199” starting at the second display command or a string of commands. For example, the word
character (one space), send the following command ACV can be sent in place of Fl, and the word SETUPl can
string: be sent in place of F3RlTZSOZlUOM2. Also, Keithley com-
mands can be translated to emulate functions of other
units. For example, the word RA, which is used by H-P
2. Spaces in a command string are ignored. to select autorange, can be sent in place of RO. There are
3. Sending a message that exceeds 10 characters will result certain words and characters that cannot be used as defin-
in the BIG STRING terror message being displayed. ed Translator words. These reserved words and character
make up the Translator software syntax and are listed in
Table 3-13.
Programming Example-Enter the following statements in-
to the computer to display the message “MODEL 199”:

Table 3-13. Translator Resewed Words and Character

Word/Character ) Description
I
ALIAS Used at the beginning of a command string to define Translator words.
Used to terminate the Translator string (one space must precede it).
i Used to define wild card Translator words. Values sent with a wild card
Translator word select options of the equivalent DDC.
Tells the Model 199 to recOgni%e %nsl&or words.
Tells the Model 199 to only recognize the Keithley device-dependent
commands.
SAVE Saves Translator words as power up defa&.
LISTS Used to list the Translator words.
FORGE7 Used to purse Translator words from memory.

3-30
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.10.1 Translator Format 2. A Translator word cannot exceed 31 characters.

3. The Translator buffer can hold approximately 100
The basic format for defitiing’a Translator word is shown B-character Translator words.
in the following example command string, which defines 4. The character X and $ cannot be used in Translator
the word SETUPl as a substitute for FlROX. words.
5. The Model 199 will not recognize an undefined
“ALIAS SETUP1 FlROX ;” Translator word sent over the bus.
6. A valid Translator word sent over the bus while the in-
strument is in the OLD mode Will not be recognized.
Where: ~: However, the instrument will try to execute (on the next
ALIAS is a reserved word that precedes the Translator X) the letters and numbers of the word as if they were
word. device-dependent commands. To avoid this problem,
SETUPl is the desired Translator word. it is recommended that NEW be sent before trying to
FLROX is the Keithley command string. execute Translator words. See paragraph 3.10.5 for an
explanation of NEW and OLD.
; is a reserved character necessary to terminate the
Translator string. 7 Translator error messages are listed and described in
i%bIe 3-14.
(spaces) must be used to separate words and the “;”
character. 8. Translator error nutibers correspond to the Ul error
word bit positidns; see Figure 3-9.
When SETUP1 is sent over the IEEE-488 bus, the instm- 9. A <CR> <LF> sequence must terminate any
ment will go to the ACV function (Fl) and enable autorange translator execution sting for proper execution. Most
W). controllers do add the necessary terminator automati-
cally, but some may not.

Translator words that contain conflicting device-dependent

commands, such as Fl and F2, can be defined. When send- Programming Example-Enter the following program in-
ing the command word over the bus, the device-dependent to the computer to define a Translator word (SETUI’l) to
command that was last entered will prevail. For example, emulate the command string FlROX:
sending a Translator word in place of FOFlX will place the
instrument in the FI function.

NOTES:
1. Trying to define a Translator word that already exisp will
cause an error message to be displayed briefly. That The Translator word will & defined to emulate the Keithkey
Translator word will retain its original definition. command string. The instrument will go to the ACV func-
tion (Fl) and enable autorange (RO).

3-31
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-14. Translator Error Messages

Display
MesSdge Explanation ExampIe Error string
I I
TRANSERR 9 No more memory left for Translator words. -
TRANSERR14 Use of more than one ALIAS in a definition. ‘ALIAS TESTl FIX ALIAS TEST2 RlX ;”
TRANSERRl.5 Translator word exceeds 31 characters. “ALIAS ITHINKTHISISTHICHAR4CT
ERS! FlX :”
TRANSERRl6 Use of an X in a Translator word. “ALIAS Xi2Ay FlX ;”
TRANSERRl7 Trying to define a Translator word that already “ALIAS SETUP FlX ;”
exists. The second string in the example is the “ALIAS SETUP RlX ;”
error string.
TRANSERRl.8 Use of a $ in a Translator word. “ALIAS $200 FIX ;”
l,,,,
TRANSERRlY Sending the ; character.
TRANSERR20 Use of LIST ifi a Translator definition. “‘ALIAS DOG FlX LIST ;”
TRANSERR21 Use of FORGET in a TranSlator definition. “ALMS DOG FIX FORG!ZT ;”
TRANSERRW Use of SAVE in a Translator definitititi. “ALMS DOG FIX SAVE ;”

3.10.2 Wild Card ($) NOTES:

An advanced feature of Translator software is its wild card 1. When sending a wild card Translator word over the bus,
capabilities. By using the reserved character “V’, the same there must be a space between the Translator word and
basic T%nslator word can be used to select all options of the option number.
a command. With this feature, a DDC option number is 2. If a wild card Translator word is sent without an option
sent with the wild card Translator word. The format for number, the instrument will default to option 0.
using the wild card is shown in the following example,
which defines the word FUNCTlON as a substitute for the
F command: Programming Example-Enter the following program to
define a wild card Translator word to emulate the P (filter)
c~ommmd,
‘ALIAS FUNCTION F$X ;”
‘TUNCITON 1”
“FUNCTION 2’

The fit statement defines FUNCTION as the wild card

Translator word for the F command. The wild card ($) will
allow any valid option number of the F command (0 The second statement defines FIU’ER as the wild card
through 6) to be sent with the word. The second statement Translator word for the P command. The third statement
which is the substitute for the Fl command, will place the enables the front panel filter (FLTR on).
instrument in the ACV function. The third statement is a
substitute for the F2 command, and will place the instru-
ment in the ohms function.

3-32
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.10.3 NEW and OLD Even though the two words were combined to form
SETlJl’3, SETUPI and SETLJF’2 still exist as valid Translator
words.
NEW is a reserved word that tells the instrument that the
ensuing commands may be defined Translator words. The
instrument will then respond to the Translator words as
WiJd card Translator words can also be combined with
well as Keith@ device-dependent commands. The re-
other Translator words. The option number used with the
served word ALIAS automatically places the inshument
new word will apply only to the fast wild card word in
in the NEW mode. NEW is also used to combine Translator
the string. For example, assume that FIlXER (emulating
words and is explained in paragraph 3.10.4.
the P command) and FUNCTION (emulating the F com-
mand) are wild card Translator words that are to be com-
bined with the normal Translator word SETIJM. The for-
OLD is a reserved word that prevents the instrument from
mat might look like this:
responding to the defined Translator words. In this mode,
only the Keithley device-dependent commands will be
“ALIAS TEST NEW SETlJPl NEW FUNCTION
recognized over the bus.
NEW FILTER ;”

Pmgmmming Example-Enter the following statements in-

The new Translator word is TEST. Whenever TEST is sent,
to the computer to place the instrument in the NEW mode:
the option value sent with that word will only affect t&c-
tion since FUNCTION is the first wild card command in
the string. For example, TEST might be sent over the bus
in the following format:

“TEST 3”
The instrument will go into the NEW mode.

The “3” in the command string will any affect the NNC-
3.10.4 Combining Translator Words TION command. In this example the instrument will be
placed in the DCA function (F3). Since the FILTER com-
Existing Translator words can be combined resulting in a mand does not have an assigned option value (due to its
Translator word that contains the commands of the two position in the string), it will default to 0 (disable).
(or more) combined words. For -pie, existing Translator
words SETIJl’l and SETUP2 can be combined and
named SETUP3. When SETUP3 is sent over the bus the
commands of both SETLJFI and SETUP2 will be executed.
The format for combining Translator words is shown in
the following example:

“ALIAS SETUP3 NEW SETUPI NEW SETUP2 ;”

Where:
SETUP3 is the new ~Translator word.
SETlJPl and SETUP2 are words to be combined.
NEW is a reserved word that tells the instrument that The second and third program statements define the two
SETUl? and SETUP2 are Translator words and not Translator words. The two words cdinbine to form the new
Keithley device-dependent commands. ~I ,+qrd (SEvP3).

3-33
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.10.5 Combining Translator Words With When the first command string is sent over the bus, the
Keithley IEEE-488 Commands commands in SETUPI and the Keithley IEEE commands
will be executed. When the second string is sent, the se-
cond option of the wild card FUNCTION command and
One or more existing Translator words (including wild card
the Keithley IEEE commands will be executed.
words) can be combined with Keithley IEEE commands
resulting in a Translator word that contains the commands
of the Translator words and the KeithIey IEEE commands.
Rogramming~ ExamplkGfhe following program will assert
The foimat for combing Translator words with Keithley
the commands of an existing Translator word and the stan-
IEEE commands is shown in the following example:
dard Keithley IEEE commands over the bus:
“ALIAS SETUP3 NEW SETUPl NEW SETUP2 I’IZK ;”

Where:
SETUP3 is the new Translator word.
The comixiands of SETUPl and the Keithley IEEE corn-
SETUI’I and SETUP2 are the existing words. mands (PLZlX) will be sent over the bus.
pIzy( is the Keithley IEEE command string.
NEW tells the instrument that SETUPI and SETUP2 are
Translator words. 3.10.7 SAVE

Translator words can be remembered by the instrument

When the Translator word SETUP3 is asserted over the
as power up default words by sending the reserved word
bus, the commands of the two Translator words and the
SAVE. If SAVE is not sent, Translator words will be lost
Keithley IEEE command string will be executed.
when the instrument is turned off, Reset is run, or an SDC,
DCL or LCI is sent over the bus.

EYogramming Example-The following sequence will

create two Translator words and then combine them with
Whm SAVE is sent, the instrument also remembers if it
a Keithley IEEETommand string to form a new Translator
was in NEW or OLD. If the instrument is in NEW when
word:
SAVE is sent, it will power up in NEW If the instrument
is in OLD when SAVE is sent, it will power up in OLD.

Programming lkampIe--With one or more Translator

words already defined, enter the following statements in-
to the computer to retain them as power up default words:

The second and third statements create two Translator

words. The two Translator words are combined to form
the word SETUl’3.
Current Translator words wilI become power up default
words.
3.10.6 Executing Translator Words and Keithley
IEEE Commands
3.10.8 LIST
Translator words (including wild card words) and Keithley
IEEE commands can be executed in the same command LIST is a reserved word that can be used to list the existig
shing. The format for doing this is demonstrated in the Translator words stored in temporary memory. The most
following -pies: recent defined word will be listed fmt.

“SETUl’l I’lZK’
“J3JNCTION 2 PlZlX”

3-34
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

NOTES: To @xge~Translator words from E’PROM, first send the

FORGET command and then send the SAVE-command.
1. The U2 command can also be used to list the Translator
words (see paragraph 3.9%).
2. If there are no Translator words in memory nothing will Pmgmmming Example-Enter the following statements in-
be displayed when the list is requested. to the computer to purge all Translator words from tem-
porary InemoIy:

Programming Example-With Translator words already

defined, enter he following program statements @J list
them:

3.11 BUS DATA TRANSMISSION TIMES

A primary consideration is the length of time it takes to

obtain a reading once the instrument is triggered to make
a conversion. The length of time will vary somewhat de-
pending on the selected function and trigger mode. Table
3-15 gives typical times.
The second and third statements will send the word list
to the computer. The Translator words will be displayed.
3.12 SCANNER PROGRAMMING

3.10.9 FORGET The paragraphs below discuss the programming corn-

mands necessary to control the optional Model 1992 214
Pole Scanner. The Model 1992 allows you to individually
FORGET is a reserved word that is used to purge all Tram-
switch or scan up to eight 2-pole channels or four 4-pole
later words from temporary memory. However, Translator
channels.
words that were saved in EIPROM by the SAVE command
will again be available after power to the instrument is
cycled, Reset is RUN, or DCL, SDC or Lo is sent over thq
Gximands to control the scanner are summarized in Table
bus.
3-16. For detailed information on scanner connections, refer
to paragraph 2.11.

3-35
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-15. Typical Trigger to First Byte Out Times

300 v 8msec E9msec 25msec (2Bmsec) 103msec (lI3msec)

30V 8msec l5.9msec 25msec (ZZ8msec) lG7msec (119msec)
3 v 8msec E9msec 25msec (27.8msec) 106msec (119msec)
25msec(28
30&V 8msec l59msec
ACV

300 v 8msec l5Ill.S~ 24.lmsec (28msec) 30.9miec (34hisec)

30 v 8msec l.hSW 25 msec (28msec) 29.9msec (34lmsec)
3 v 8msec l5msec 25 msec (28msec) 3l.lmsec (34lmsec)
30&&J 8msec l5msec 25 msec (28msec) 30.9msec (3KJmsec)
ACA

3omA %7msec Elmsec 25.3msei (27.lmsec) 30.9msec (34lmsec)

3A 7.9msec J5lmsec 24.9msec (269msec 30.9msec (34.lmsec)
DCA

3omA 7.9msec 14.9msec 25.lmsec (28.lmsec) 30.9msec (34.7ms.e~)

3A 7.9msec 14.9msec ~25.&sec (2Z9msec) 30.9miec (34.hsec)
OHMS

300 30hiec 50 msec 59.2msec (662msec) 97 msec (113 msec)

3k 21.9msec 50 msec ~~ 58.8msec (649msec) 96.2msec (lO9.8msec
30 k 21.9msec 50 msec 58.8msec (65.8msec) 96.2msec (11Umsec)
300k - - 59.2rnsec (62.5msec) 97.8ms.e~ (109.8msec)
- ~~58Smsec (63.7msec) lJZ.2msec (l25 rnsec)
3;: 1 - 27Smsec (3lSnisec) 353.5msec (362.5msec)
3CKIM - - ~-278msec (30.9msec) 353.5msec (3625msec)

( ) = 50Hz operation A0 = mux off so = ~4%

Internal filter off Al = mux on Sl = 5%
TI mode

3-36
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Table 3-16. Scanner Programming Commands

Mode Command Description ~.~~ P=q=wh

Scanner Setup NO All channels open 3.12.1

2-pole j-pole
Nl 1 1
N2 2 2
N3 3 3

Liz 54 ~~ C-IAN 4 &AX ERROR

N6 6 CHAN 4 MAX ERROR

K3 78 CHAN 4 MAX ERROR

Step mode
iEt Stop scan, all channels open
2-Pole Limit 4-Pole Limit
Nil 1 1
Nl2
:ii :4 z

Nl.5 CHAN 4 M?AX ERROR

N16 2 CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
iii s’ CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
N19 CHAN 8 MAX ERROR CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
N20 Stop scan, all channels open
2-Pole Limit 4-Pole Limit
N21 : 1
N22 2
Lizi 34 3

N25 5 CHAN 4 :AX ERROR

N26 6 CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
CHAN 4 MAX ERROR
~~ ; CHAN 4 MAX ERROR

Pole/Ratio 00 2-pole 3.12.2

01 4pole
02 2-pole ratio
03 4pole ratio

Scan Interval QO Defatit l75msec interval (SELECT OFF) 3.12.3

Q* n=interval in rnsec (l5c999999msec)

Trigger Delay* Wn n=delay in msec (0~999999msec) 3.12.4

‘Delay to be used as channel settling time.

3-37
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.12.1 Scanner Setup (N) For the following, the closed channel number appears in
the right-most digit of the display.
The scanner setup command allows you to control chan-
nels individually, scan one channel per trigger or interval,
2-pole Limit 4pole Limit
or scan one set of channels per trigger or interval, as
discussed below.
Nil 1 1~
Nl2 2 2
Manual Channel Control Nl3 3 3
N14 4 4
The commands below open all channels or close each in- N15 5 CHAN 4 MAX Error
dividual channel by sending the appropriate command.
N16 6 CHAN 4 MAX Error

NO All channels open. Nl7 7 G-IAN 4 MAX Error

NE 8~ ~~ CHAN 4 MAX Error
For the following commands, the indicated channel will NlP CHAN 8 MAX Error CHAN 4 MAX Error
be closed. The closed channel number will appear in the
right most digit of the display.
Scan Mode
Closed Channel:
2-Pole 4-Pole The scan mode commands allow you to scan a complete
Nl 1 set of channels per programmed interval (continuous trig-
N2 : 2 ger mode) or trigger (one-shot mode), with the channel
N3 3 3 limit determined by the command option. For example,
4 4 if a limit of four is set; the unit will begin at channel 1 and
i% 5 U-IAN 4 MAX Error then scan through channels 2 to-4 with each trigger
N6 6 CHAN 4 MAX Error stimulus or interval.
N7 7 CHAN 4 MAX Error
N8 8 WAN 4 MAX Error N20 Open all channels and terminate scan sequence.
NP CHAN 8 MAX Error CHAN 4 MAX Error
For the following, the closed channel number will
appear in the right-most digit of the display.
Step (NlO-NlS)

In the step mode, the instrument scans one channel per 2-p& Limit 4-p& Liiit
interval (continuous trigger mode), or one channel per trig
ger (one-shot trigger mode). With each interval or trigger, N21 1 1
the instrument closes a channel, takes a reading, and then N22 2 2~
opens that channel. Subsequent intervals or triggers ad- N23 3 3~
Vance channels to repeat the sequence.
N24 4 4
N25 5 CHAN 4 MAX Error
The number of channels per step sequence is determined N26 6 Cl-IAN 4 MAX Error
by the command option used, which also sets the chan- ~N27 7 CHAN 4 MAX Error
nel limit. The reading interval is set by the Q command N28 8 CHAN 4 MAX Error
discussed in paragraph 3.12.3. Available triggers include
front panel, external trigger input (rear panel), and
IEEE-488 talk, GET, and X commands. The trigger source Powerup DCLlSDC Default
is determined by the T command.
Upon power up, or after a DCL or SDC, the NO mode (all
N10 Open all channels and stop step sequence. Subs+ channels open) will be selected.
quent intervals or triggers will not cause stepping.

3-38
NOTES:

1. in order to use all eight channels in the 2-p& mode, CHl

the A and B outputs must be connected in parallel with
the DMM inputs, as discussed in paragraph 2.11.
2. When using the scanner with data store, the number Where: R = ratio
of sets of data that are stored is determined both by the CHn = channel number (2 through 8)
data store size(I) command, as well as the number of CHl = channel 1
channels per scan. For example, with a programmed size
of 400 readings, and a scan limit of eight channels, 50
sets of data will be stored (4CHYS=SO). The result is then s&t over the bus as requested or stored
3. A “CHAN 4 MAX” error will occur if you attempt to in the data store buffer if enabled. Ratio values are iden-
program a limit greater than 4 with the unit in the 4-p& tified with the RAT prefix in the data string, which is
mode. discussed more fully in paragraph 3.9.12.
4. Sending a scanner command with no scanner installed
will result in an “IDDC” error.
Upon power up, or after a DCL or SDC, the 00 (2-pole)
mode will be in effect.
Programming Example-To demons&ate scanner program-
ming, close channel 3 by entering the following statenwnts.~
Programming Example--Enter the statements below to
program the unit to operate in the 4-p& mode.

Note that the dosed channel (3) is displayed in the right-

most digit.
3.12.3 Reading interval and Delay
Programming
To open the channel and return the display to normal,
enter the following statement.
The progratimed reading interval determines the time
period between channels in the step mode, and the time
period between setsof channels in the scan mode. Inter-
val is programmed with the Q command as follows:

3.12.2 Pole/Ratio Mode (0) Qo = Default interval, l75msec (SELECT ON)

Qn = User programmed interval
The O~command controls 214 pole normal mode opera-
tion, as well as 2/4 pole ratiooperation. In the 2-pole mode,
up to eight channels can be scanned, while a maximum Here, n is the interval time in milliseconds, with an
of four channels can be scanned in the 4-pole mode. allowable range of I.5 to 999 PPPmsec. The factory default
value for interval is l75msec. The ifistrument will assume
that value upon power up, or after a DCL or SDC.
NOTE
Jf you attempt to program the 4-pole mode with
channels 5-8 already closed, the pole mode will A channel settling time can be programmed by using the
not be changed and a “CHAN 4 MAX” error will delay (W) command. When a scan delay is used, the in-
occm The closed channel will not be opened. strument will wait the programmed delay period after clos-
ing a channel before taking a reading. Thus, the delay
period acts as achannel settling time to allow signals to
In the ratio mode, the unit computes the ratio between settle before each measurement.
the channel 2 through 8 reading to the channel 1 reading.
in order to determine ratio, the unit first takes a reading
on channel 1, and then computes the ratio for the remain- The scan delay (settling time) can be programmed be sen-
ing channels as follows: ding the W command as follows:

Wn

3-39
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Here, n represents the delay period in mesec. with an interval with the Q command. For example, send Q5OOX
allowable range of Omsec to 999.9PPmsec. The factory for a 5OOmse~interval. If you wish to trigger each chan-
default value for the delay parameter is Omsec. The inshu- nel separately, select a one-shot higggr~mode. This setup
rnent will assume that value upon power up, of after a DCL will require one trigger per channel, or one trigger per
or SD~C. set of channels, depending on then scanner setup,-
4. Program the data store size with the I command. Keep
in mind that this value representsthe total number of
NOTES: individual channels that will be stored. For example, if
you select 400 and are scanning all eight channels, the
1. An “INTERVAL OVERRUN” error will occur if the pro- maximum number of data sets is 50 (400/8 = 50).
grammed interval is too short for the present instrument 5. Trigger the instrument to begin the scanning sequence.
configuration. The trigger stimulus will depend on on the programmed
2. The programmed interval also affects the reading rate, trigger mode. For example if you are using T2 or l3, send
as well as the data store interval in the continuous trig- GET to trigger the instrument. Also, if you have pro-
ger mode. grammed the one-shot trigger mode, it will be necessary
3. A trigger delay of at least one second should be used @rigger the instrument for each channel (step) or set
with AC measurements. of channels (scan).
4. The programmed interval must be longer than the delay
time, or an “INTERVAL OVERRUN” error iiill occur.
Reading Scanned Data

Once data has been scanned and stored, it can be read

3.12.4 Using Data Store with the Scanner
back from the instrument over the bus. One method to
determine when the instrument is finished is to program
Scanner data can easily be stored within the data store buf- the unit to generate an SRQ when the data store is one-
fer for later recall. The following discussion provides a half full or completely full (M2 or M4). Program the in-
general outline of programming methods for doing so. sfnnnent for data store output by sending “LW? and then
Some modification of these methods may be necessary for request data in the usuai manner. Jf buffer locations and
your particular application. channel numbers are required, use the G6 or G7 data
format.

Scanner Programming
F’rogramming Example
Basically, program the unit as follows:
The program below demonstrates basic data store opera-
1. Program the scanner for 2- or 4-pole operation with the tion with the scanner. The program sets up the instrument
0 command. For example, for 2-pole mode, send “00X”. for DCV, 3V range, 2-pole mode with eight channels. The
Be sure that connections are proper for the selected unit is also set up to store one channel per interval; the
mode (see paragraph 2.11 for details). interval is programmed for a value of one second. The total
2. Use the N command as required to select the type of number of readings is set to 80, which will accommodate
scanning operation. To close individual channels, simply ten sets of scanner data at eight channels per set.
send N followed by the appropriate channel number.
For step or scan, use N10 through NIB, or N20 through
N28, as described in paragraph 3.12.1. The program comments on each line are self-explanatory.
3. If you wish to scan at programmed intervals, select a
continuous trigger mode, and then select the data stoke

3-40
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Connections

Typical connections for 2-pole and 4-pole modes are shown

in Figures 3-10 and 3-U. The 4-pole mode is recommend-
ed for making measurements on the 3003,3kfl, and 3Okfl
ranges in order to attain rated accuracy. For the 2-pole
mode, the reference resistor should be connected to chan-
nel 1 only; in the case of the 4-pole mode, the reference
resistor is connected to both channel 1 and 5. The resiSto?s
being compared are connected to the remaining channels
as indicated.

The scanner output connections also differ. For the Z-pole

mode (Figure 3-lo), OUT A and OUT B are strapped
together (H to H, L to L) and then c~onnected to the VOLTS
OHMS terminals of the Model 199 (the rear panel ter-
minals are most convenient for scanner use; just be sure
the rear panel terminals are selected with the front panel
switch). In the case of the 4-pole connections, OUT A is
connected to the VOLTS OHMS terminals, while OUT B
is connected to the OHMS SENSE terminals.

store, stop scan. Example Program

Format with loca-
tions, channels. The program below can be used to test resistors as outlined
Loop for all 80 above. The program will prompt you as to whether the
readings. 2-pole or 4-pole mode is to be used and then program the
Get 199 reading. instrument accordingly. In order to use the program, per-
Display reading. form the following steps.
Loop back for next
reading. 1. Connect the resistors to the scanner, as shown in Figure
3-10 or 3-U. For resistances below 3Ok% the 4-pole mode
is recommended for rated accuracy.
2. Enter the lines below into the computer and check the
program for errors.
3.12.5 Testing Resistors
3. Run the program, and select then 2- or 4-pole mode as
required.
The Model 1992 Scanner adds versatility to the Model 199
4. The test will then be run, and the results will be shown
by allowing the unit tomtest multiple sources. One possi-
on the computer CRT. The results will be shown as a
ble application for the scanner would be to test multiple
percent of tolerance from the reference resistor con-
resistors and compare their values with a precisely known
nected to channel 1 (and 5 for the &pole mode).
reference resistance. The ratio mode could be used to deter-
mine the de-e of variability among the various resistors.
The following paragraphs discuss connections for 2-p&
and 4-pole testing of resistors and also list a sample pro-
gram for doing so,

3-41
IEEE-466 PROGRAMMING

CH 6

CH 7
;
‘?$
CH 6
;,;

CH5

II Resistors
Under Test

Ch3

CH2

CH 1

Connect To Rear Panel Input

Using Supplied Cables

Figure 3-10. 2-Pole Resistor Test Connections

3-42
 IEEE-488 PROGRAMMNG

Resistors
Under Test

,;..I

1992 CARD

To 199 To 199
Ohms Sense Volts Ohms

Figure 3-11. 4-Pole Resistor Test Connections

343
 Set 199 to default conditions.
Ohms function, 3Ok range, GET trig.
St&e data every second.
Prompt for z- or 4-pole.

Input mode prompt.

Check response limits.
Set number of readings depending
number of poles.
Defme 0 mode parameter.
Program step mode, limit.
Program pole/ratio mode.
SRQ when data store is full.
Number of readings in data store.
Prompt to begin data storage.

Triger 199 to scan and store readings.

Get IEEE-488 bus status.

Wait for SRQ.
Clear SRQ.~
Data store readmg,stop scan.
Get channel 1 reading.
Loop for all remaining channels.
Get ratio reading from 199.

Compute and display percent tolerance of resistor.

Loop back for next channel.

3.12.6 Amplifier Gain Testing Example Program

The s&%uwr can be used to simplify gain testing of The ewmple program gram below can be used to run the
amplifiers. As shown in Figure Z-12, a signal generator sup- amplifier tests
ests described above. In order to use thii pro-
plies a test signal to the inputs of all seven amplifiers be-1_ gram, proceed as follows:
ing tested. Channel 1 of the scanner is connected directly
to the signal generator, while channels 2 through 8 of the 1. Enter the program, and check it for errors.
scanner are connected to the amplifier outputs. 2. Make certain the primary address of the Model 199 is
set to 26.
3. Connect the equipment together, as shown in Figure
The gain of each amplifier is given as follows: 342
4. Set the signal generator to the desired test frequency
V (<3CHlkHz) and amplitude.
*=2T
5. l&n the prbgram and &lea the desired range based on
VW the maximum expected output voltages.
6. The instrument will perform the tests and display the
gain values on the computer CRT after all seven
Thus, the ratio mode of the Model 19911992 can be used
amplifiers have been tested.
to compute the gain of each amplifier automatically.

3-44
PROGRAM COMMENTS

Recall default setup.

Select ACV function.
Continuous, GET trigger mode.
Select range.

Input range.
rrogram 199 range.
Z-pole ratio mode.
Step, channel 8 limit.
SRQ on data store full.
Scan interval is one second.
Store size = 8, turn on store.
Pause to make sure all is readv.

Trigger scan.
Get bus status.
Wait for SRQ on store full.
Serial poll to SRQ.
Reading, no prefii data format,
Readings from data store.
~~%etchannel 1 reading.
Get gain readings.
Get reading.
Display gain value.
Loop back for next reading.

3-45
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

Signal Generator CH3H

CH4H

To Channel CHSH
Input L
Terminals

,..,,,,,
1992 CARD

Figure 3-12. Amplifier Gain Test Configurations

3-46
 4 SECTION

Performance Verification

4.1 INTRODUCTION 4.3 INITIAL CONDITIONS

The procedures outlined in this section may be used to The Model 199 must be turned on and allowed to warm
verify that the instrument is operating within the limits up for at least two hours before beginning the verfication
stated in the specifications at the front of this manual. Per- procedures. If the instrument has been subject to extremes
fotiance verification may be performed when the instru- of temperature (outside the range specified in paragraph
ment is first received to ensure that no damage or misad- 4.2), additional time should be allowed for internal
justment has occurred during shipment. Verificatioiimay, temperatures to reach normal operating temperature.
also be performed whenever there is a question of instru- Typically, it takes one additional hour to stabilize a unit
ment accuracy, or following calibration, if desired. that is 10°C (l8”F) outside the specified temperature range.

NOTE 4.4 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT

If the instrument is still under warranty (less than
1 year from the date of shipment), and its perform-
Table 4-l lists all test equipment required for verification.
ance falls outside the specified rage, contact your
Alternate equipment may be used as long as the substitute
Keithley representative or the factory to determine
equipment has specifications at least as good as those listed
the correct course of action.
ifi the table.

4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS NOTE

The verification limits in this section do not include
All measurements should be made at 18 - 28°C (65 - 82°F) test equipment tolerance and are based on one
and at less than 80% relative humidity. year accuracy specifications.

Table 4-1. Recommended Test Equipment

Mfg 1 Model Description Specifications

I k I
Fluke 544OA DC Voltage Calibrator 3OOmV, 3v, 3ov, 3oov ranges +15ppm.
Fluke 5200A AC Voltage Calibrator 3OOmV, 3V, 30V ranges; 2OH.z &O.l%;
50Hz-20kHz 0.02%; lOOkI+ io.33%.
Fluke 5215A AC Power Amplifier 3COV range: 2OHz &X2%; SOHz-20kHz 10.04%;
lOOkHzfo.l%
Fluke 5450A Resistance Calibrate? 3ooR-3MQ ranges i-15ppm; 3OMQ L32ppm;
300MR range X?2Sppm
Valhalla 2500E AC-IX Ciarrent Calibrator 3OmA, 3A ranges M.03% DC, io.l% AC to 5kHz

4-l
PERFORkfANCE VERfFCA?-ION

4.5 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES 7. Repeat the procedure for each of the ranges with
negative voltages.
The following paragraphs contain procedures for verify-
ing the one year accuracy specifications of~the in$wnent,
at 5%d resolution, for each of the five measuring !%ncti&w: datable 4-2. Li@s for DC Volts Ver,ification
DC~volts, TRMS AC volts, ohms, TRMS AC amps, and DC
amps. These procedures are intended for use only by quali-
fied personnel using accurate and reliable test equipment. Allowable Readings
If the instrument is out of specifications and not under (IPto 28’0
warranty, refer to Section 6 for calibration procedures.
299.961 to 300.039
2.99977 to 3.00023
WARNING 29.9970 to 30.0030
The maximum common-mode voltage (voltage 299.970 to 300.030
between input low and chassis ground) is 500V
peak. Exceeding this value may cause a break- NOTE: Repeat procedure for negative voltages.
down in insulation, creating a shock hazard.
Some of the orocedures in this section mav ex-
pose the user to dangerous voltages. Use &an-
dard safety precautions when such dangerous
voltages are encountered.

4.5.1 DC Volts Verification

MODEL 199
With the Model 199 set to 5*&d resolution, verify the DC
volts function as follows:

Figure 4-1. Connections for DC Volts Verification

CAUTION
Do not exceed 300V between the input HI and
LO terminals or damage to the instrument may 4.5.2 TRMS AC Volts Verification
occur.
With the instrument set to 5%d resolution, perform the
following procedure to verify the AC volts function:
1. Select the DCV function and autorange. ~~
2. Connect the DC voltage calibrator to the Model 199 as
shown in Figure 4-l. CAUTION
3. Set the calibrator to OV and enable zero on the Model Do not exceed 300V RMS, 42%’ peak lOY*Hz
199. Verifj that the display is reading CGO.OOOmV+2 between the input HI and LO terminals or instru-
counts. ment damage may occur.

NOTE 1. Select the ACV function and autorange. Do not use zero
Low measurement techniques should be used to cancel the offset in this procedure. Turn zero off, if
when checkine the 3oomV DC rawe. Refer to Sara- it iS enabled.
graph 2.6.5 forlow level me&ure&ent consihera- 2. Connect the AC calibrator to the Model 199 as shown
tions. in Figure 4-2.
3. Set the calibrator to output 2-V at a frequency of 2OHz
4. Set the calibrator to output c3OOmV and verify that the and verify that the reading is withii the limits listed in
reading is within the limits listed in Table 4-2. Table 4-3.
5. Disable zero and leave it disabled for the remainder of 4. Repeat the 29omV measurement at the other frequen-
the DCV verification procedure. &S specified in Table 4-3.
6. Check the 3V, 3OV, and 3OOV ranges by applying the 5. Repeat the procedure for the 3V, 30V and 3COV ranges
respective DC voltage levels listed in Table 4-2. Verify by applying the respective AC voltages listed in Table
to see that the reading for each range is within the limits 4-3. Check to see that the reading for each range is
listed in the table. within the limits listed in the table.

4-2
 Table 4-3. Limits for TRMS AC Volts Verification

199 Applied Allowable Readings WC to ‘28Tl

ACV Range AC Voltage ZOHZ 5oHz 200Hz lOkHz 1OOkHz

3OOmv 29O.OOOmv 284.100 288.885 289.365 289.365 283.900

29&l 29k5 Z&5 29&5 29&W

3 v 2.90000V 2.84lOO 2.88885 2.89365 2.89365 2.85350
2.9&Q Z.%l5 2.600635 2.&35 2.94650
to

30 v 29.MxMv 28.4100 28.8885 28.9365 28.9365 28.5330

29:090 29%5 29.:35 29.k.5 to
29.4650

3ooV 29O.OOOV 284.100 288.885 289.365 289.365 *

to to to to
295.900 291.lS 290.635 290.635

*Do not apply 290V at 1OOkHz to the input. This exceeds the V*& limit of the
instrument. Maximum TRh4S AC volt input at 1CHlkHzis 1WV. On the SHIV range,
allowable readings with lOOV@ lOOkI& applied to the input are 98.200 to lO’L800.
See par+aph 2.6.7 for clarification of the V-Hz specification.

CAUTION
Do not exceed 425V peak or 300V RMS between
the input HI and LO terminals or damage to the
instrument may occur.

1. Select the ohms function and autorange.

2. Using Kelvin test leads (such as the Keithley Model 1641)
connect the resistance calibrator to the Model 199 as
shown in Figure 43.
3. Set the calibrator to the SHORT position and enable zero
on the Model 199. Verify that the display reads ooO.000
4. Set the calibrator to output 1900 and verify that~ the
reading is within the limits listed in Table 4-4.
5. Disable zero and leave it disabled for the remainder of
the ohms verification procedure.
6. Utilizing Figures 43 “d 44, check the 3kX7 through
3CilMQ ranges by applying the respective resistance
Figure 4-2. Connections for TRMS AC Volts levels listed in Table 44. Verify~ that the readings are
Verification within the limits listed in the table.

4.5.3 Ohms Verification

With the Model 199 set to 5%d resolution, verify the ohms
function as follows:

,,

4-3
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

Table 4-4. Limits for Ohms Verification

set up
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-3
Figure 43
Figure 4-4 190.000 kO 189.948 to 190.052
Figure 4-4 1.9OOOOMQ 1.89940 to 1.9oo60
Figure 4-4 19.0OGlMQ ‘lg.9767 to 19.0233
Figure 4-4 lCO.CGOMIt 97.995 to 102.005

4.54 DC Current Verification

With the instrument set to 5%d resolution, verify the DC

Resistance current function as follows:
Sense PHI
Calibrator
sense LO
I Model S45OA CAUTION
-
MODEL ISO ou@“tLO ’ Do not exceed 3A to the AMPS and LO input ter-
minals or the front panel current fuse will blow.
1 ”.,,, ., .,

Figure 4-3. Connections for Ohms Verification 1. Select the DC4 function and autoranze.
2. Connect the DC~ctieW calibration s&ce to the Model
. -
199asshownmF~gure43.
3. Set the calibration source to output +3OmA and verify
that the reading is within the limits listed in Table 4-5.
4. Repeat the procedure for the 3A range by applying the
DC current level listed in Table 45. Check to see that
the reading is within the limits listed in the table.
5.~Repeat the procedure for each of the two ranges with
negative current levels.

Table 4-5. Limits for DC Current Verification

Applied Allowable Readings

DC CUrrent OPC to 28’0
3om.4 3cLoooomA 29.9835 to 30.0165
I ,I 3 A 1 3.00000 A / 2.99685 to 3.00315 I

Figure 4-4. Connections for Ohms Verification

(300kG-3OOMil Ranges)

4-4
 ALSelect the AC4 function and autorange. Do not use zero
to cancel any offset in this procedure.
2. Connect the AC current calibration source to the Model
199 as shown in Figure 4-6.
3. Set the calibration source to output 3OmA at a frequen-
cy of 2OHz and verify that the reading is within the limits
listed in Table 4-6.
4. Repeat the 30111.4 measurement at the other frequencies
specified in Table 4-6.
5. Repeat the procedure for the 3A range by applying the
AC current level listed in Table 4-6. Check to see that
the reading is within the limits listed in the table.

Figure 4-5. Connections for DC Current Verification

4.55 TRMS AC Current Verification

With the instrument set for 5%d resolution, verify the AC

current functic m as follows:

-~ pjyyijgjigj~~
CAUTION
Do not exceed 3A to the AMPS and LO inputter-
minals or the front panel current fuse will blow. cam

Figure 4-6. Connections for TRMS AC Current

Verification

Table 4-6. Limits for AC Current Verification

3 A 2.9OOOOA 2.841Ou
I to
2.88160
to
2.88160
to

4-514-6
 SECTION 5

Principles of Operation

5.1 INTRODUCTION DC Volts

Signal conditioning for the 3OV and 300V ranges is per-

This section contains an overall functional desaiption of
formed by resistor divider network R17. On these ranges,
the Model 199. Detailed schematics and component loca-
Kl, K2, and K3 are open, and the divider network is con-
tion drawings are located at the end of this instruction
nected to signal ground through Qll and U22A. The
manual.
following attenuation of the input signal is provided:

Divided by 10 on the 30V range.

5.2 OVERALL FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Divided by 100 on the 3COV range.

A simplified block diagram of the Model 199 is shown in

Figure 5-l. The instrument may be divided into two sec- On the 3OV range, Ql3 is on and Q3 is off routing the in-
tions: analog and digital circuitry.~ The analog and d@tal put signal in the multiplexer (Q35). On the 300V range,
sections are electrically isolated from each other by the use Ql3 is off and Q3 is on routing the input signal to the
of opto-isolators for control and communications. Separate multiplexer (Q35). On the 3OOmV and 3V ranges, the in-
power supplies for the analog and digital sections ensure put signal is removed from the resistor divider network
proper isolation. (Ql3 and Q3 off) atid applied directly to the m&iplexer
through Kl and Q30.

The analog section consists of the signal conditioning cir-~

cuits, multiplexer, input amplifier, AID converter and con- AC Volts
trol circuitry. The heart of the digital section is 68809
microprocessor that supervises the entire operation of the The basic steps involved in ACV conditionixig are as
instrument. Additional digital circuitry indudes the display follows:
and IEEE-488 interface.
1. Relay K4 applies the ACV input to the gain circuitry.
Here the signal undergoes a gain factor of 10 (3OOmV
If the optional Model 1992 Scanner is installed, it is con- range), 1 (3V range), 1110 (30V range) or 11100 (300V
trolled through the control circuits located on the analog range).
board. Connections to the DMM inputs are supplied by J?I. The signal is then applied to the TRMS converter (U27)
the user. where the AC signal is converted to a DC~signal.
3. The DC signal is then applied to the multiplexer.

5.3 ANALOG CIRCUITRY

On the 300mV and 3V ranges, the signal is routed through
The detailed circuitry of the Model 199 analog section is relay KS and buffer U28A. On the 3V range, the signal pro-
located on schematic diagram number 199-126. ceeds through analog switch UZlC and buffer U26B before
being applied to the TRMS converter (U27). On the 3OOniV
range, the signal is detoured through analog switch~ U23A
53.1 input Signal Conditioning to U28B which is configured as a X10 amplifier. The
amplified signal then proceeds through ~analog switch
U23B and buffer U26B to the TRMS converter (VU).
Signal conditioning circuitry modifies the input to a signal
that is usable by the Model 199 and applies that signal to
the multiplexer.

5-l
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

On the 3OV range, the signal is applied to U26A. Because On the 3OOVrange, the signal is applied to U26A. Because
analog switch U2lA is open on this range, aniplifier U26A analog switch U2L4 is closed on this range, amplifier U2&4
has a feedback resistance of 118kD (R32) which results in has a feedback resistance of ll8k0 0732) in parallel with
a gain factor of 1110. The divided signal is then muted pkfi (R24), resulting in a gain factor of 11100. The divided
through analog switch UZlB and buffer U26B to the TRMS signal is then routed through analog switch U21B and buf-
converter (U27). fer U26B to the TRMS converter (U27).

r--------~------
input Conditioning
1
I !

------ _______________ ~_.

IEEE-M
Intelfaca

Display

Figure 5-1. Overall Block Diagram

5-2
OHMS The Model 199 is equipped to make 2- or 4terminal resis-
tance measurements. Generally, 4-terminal measurements
Resistance measurements are made using the ratiometric should be made on the~3OOll range because the relatively
technique (see Figure 5-2). When the resistance function large output current can develop a signicatit voltage
is selected, a series circuit is formed between the ohms across the test leads, affecting measurement accuracy.
source, a reference resistor and the external unknown
resistance. A current flows through the reference resistor
and the unknown resistance. Since this current is &&non Figure 5-2 shows the equivalent circuit of the input circuit.
to both resistances, the value of the unknown resistance Rx is the unknown measured resistance and Rl, R2, R3
can be calculated by measuring the voltage across the and R4 represent the test lead resistance. R2 and R3 are
reference resistor and the voltage across the unknown connected~only during 4-terminal measurements. When
resistance. using a Z-terminal configuration, all the current flows
through the test leads Rl and R4. If Rx has a low value,
the amount of voltage developed ac~oss the test leads can
TIE following ohms reference resistors are used (see Figure be significant.
5-3).

3OOn and 3kKl ranges: R26 (2kn) Since the voltage is sensed across the combined resistance
3Okoka
range: R23 (3Ok@ of R,, Rx and R.; considerable error~can be introduced in-
3OOkR &ge: RI76 I R&C (lOOk0) to the reading. To use a 4terminal connection, a second
3MR range: Rl7A II Rl7B (IMQ) set of leads (R2 and R3) are connected to the unknown
3OMll and 3OOMR ranges: Rl7A (lOM@ resistance. The amount of current through R2 and R3 is
much smaller than the current through Rl and R4. Thus,
the voltage seen by the instrument is much closer to the
By measuring the four inputs to the AID converter the actual value across the measured resistance; minimizing
unknown resistance can be computed by the the error.
microprocessor using this equatiorr

R,,*(VQ SENSE Hl - VR SENSE LO) DC Amps and AC Amps

Rx =
VQ REF Hl - VR REF LO The resistor current shunt network R75 and R30 is con-
figured so that a full scale current input will result in a
3OOrV drop across the network on both current ranges.
For the 3000 range Vfl SENSE HI and VQ SENSE M tie For 3OmA DC, this voltage is routed to the multiplexer
atially multipled by a factor of 10 in the input buffer through U23C and U2ZB. For 3A DC, this voltage is routed
circuit. to the multiplexer through Q37 and U22B. For AC Amps,
the signal is routed through U23D to X10 amplifier U28B.
The amplified signal then travels through analog switch
Protection on the ohms ranges is accomplished by Rl’l and U23B and buffer U26B to the TRh4S converter. The con-
Ql6. For an input voltage applied to the 0 input terminals, verted DC signal is then routed to the multiplexer.
Ql6 clamps the voltage to the reference resistors to a safe
hit. RTI limits the current to Q9 and 4%.

5-3
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

I
Front Panel I
, Vi2 Ref HI
RFEF

I . .. , HI I I
0
I - I O
I 4Term I
r , corm. , I 1 Se:: Hi
Rx I I
, Only ,
RF3 I I
“L 0 I.. I O
I- - - J sense ; Vi2
LO 1 sense LO
t RS t
I
input I
Lo I
J

bet . pm sense HI - vn sense LO)

R, =
Vi2 Ref HI - V.Q Ref LO

Figure 5-2. Input Configuration During 2 and 4-Terminal Resistance Measurement

5-4
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

R Ref HI To Q35 of
’ Multiplexer

Reference
Resistors
R Ref LO To U24C of
(3OW ’ Multiplexer
n Ref LO > To U24D of
(3OOQ 3kQ) Multiplexer

Input
\ HI R Ref LO To 034 of
/ (3OOkQ 3OOMR) ’ Multiplexer

-->-> To Q30 of Multiplexer

n Sense HI
Rx
R Sense LO
-->-> To U24B of Multi&xer

Input
R FW (Vl2 Sense HI - Vn Sense LO)
LO l
R, =
Vn Ref HI . V.Q Ref LO

Figure 5-3. Resistance Measurement Simplified Circuitry

5-5
PRINCIPLESOF OPERATION

5.3.2 Multiplexer Figure 5-5 shows the general switching phases for the
various signals. During each phase, an integration is per-
formed by the A/D converter, and the resultant data is
The multiplexer circuitry selects among the v&xzs signals
used by the microprocessor to calculate the final reading.
that are part of the Model 159 measwement cycle and con-
nects them to the input buffer amplifier. Figure 54 shows
a simplified schematic of the multiplexer circuitry. The
Front/Rear INPUT switch detector U25B is not part of a
measurement cycle.

) R Ref LO (300k-300MR)

Siqnal (300k-300MQ) Q35

QRl?f HI (112

Figure 5-4. JFET Multiplexer

5-6
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Signal
Phase

Zero
Phase

Reference
Phase

Calculate

t-l
a Reading

Calculate
a Reading

A. Typical Voltage and 8. Typical Resistance Measurements

Current Measurements

Figure 5-5. Multiplexer Phases

5-7
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

5.3.3 -2.8V Reference Source 5.4 AID CONVERTER

Voltage~and current measurements are based on compar- The Model 199 uses a constant frequency, variable pulse
ing the unknown signal with an internal -2.8V reference width, analog-to-digital converter. A simplified schematic
voltage source. During each measurement cycle, the of the A/D used in the Model 199 is shown in Figure 5-6.
unknown signal is sampled and then compared with
signal common and the -2.8V reference values.
The charge balance phase begins when the input enable/
disable line is set high. This occurs at the end of a software-
VR2 provides a highly stable -6.4V reference,~ while UU generated delay period that allows the signal to settle after
and R66 provide a constant current to minimize zener the appropriate multiplexer FET is turned on Once the
voltage variations. Rb8 and R69 divide down the -6.4V input is enabled, the signal from then buffer amplifier is
value to the final -2.8V reference voltage. added to the level shit current applied through R62C and
R61 or R61 only. In this manner, the *303V bipolar signal
from the buffer amplifier is converted to a unipolar signal
5.3.4 Input Buffer Amplifier that can be integrated.

The input buffer amplifier, U46, provides isolation between The integrator is made up of Ql, Ill9 and C32. When the
the input signal and the AID converter. The amplifier can input to the integrator is applied, the integrator output
be configured for Xl or X10 gain with R7I and R64 acting ramps up until its voltage is slightly higher than the voltage
as the feedback network. When Xl gain is selected by the applied to the inverting input of the duty cycle comparator
microprocessor, feedback is routed through pin l2 of the (U5A). The charge balance current, whose duty cycle is
analog switch U45A. At X10 gain, feedback is routed proportional to the input, is fed back to the integrator in-
through pin I3 of the multiplex witch. Amplifier gain con- put through R8 and 44. Since the charge balance current
figurations for the various functions and ranges are listed is much larger than the sum of the input and level shit
in Table 5-1. currents, the integrator output now ramps in the negative
direction until Q of U8B goes low. The VIA, located in the
microcomputer then counts the total number of pulses that
Table 5-1. Input Buffer Amplifier (U46) Gain occur during the charge balance phase.
Configuration

At the end of the charge balance phase, the output of the

Function Range Gain integrator is resting at some positive voltage. Since the in-
tegrator output is connected mthe non-inverting input of
DC Volts 3oomv the final-slope comparator (U5B), the final-slope com-
33OOV parator output remains high until the integrator output
ramps in the negative direction. During final-slope, Q4 is
AC Volts AlI
turned off and the feedback is fed through U16 back to
Ohms 3003 the integrator input. The final-slope comparator output is
3k-3OOMO then gated with the 3.84MHz clock and counted. Once the
DC Amps All comparator output goes low, the VIA stops counting and
AC Amps All the reading can be computed.

5-8
 U43D
3.84MHz
l Clock ) ND Counts Output
I

D Final Slope Comparator

R60

U7,

Fi8
--
Duty Cycle
“-vi
‘J6.
,111
Feedback
Comparator control
Input Circuit

*
D-
017 U5A

R9B

R62 u45c

1.1OVR

Figure 5-6. A/D Converter Simplified Schematic

5-9
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

5.5 CONTROL CIRCUITRY 6.6.2 Display Circuitry

The signals for the circuitry that provides control of the The display information is Sent through display latches m6
various FETs, relays, analog switches and logic levels are and Ul5. Upon each display update, new segment infor-
supplied by the shift store registers U29, U30, U31, and mation is presented to the display latches and a clock pulse
U32 (see schematic 199-126, page 3). CLOCK, DATA and is sent on PAO.Thedock pulse to U4 and U5 (see schematic
STROBE signals are sent from the VIA (U8) across the 199-116) shifts a digit enable bit to the next digit to be
opto-isolators. ATl, AT2, and m (see schematic 199-126, enabled. Every 10 times the display is updated, a digit
page 5). The isolators provide WOV isolation between the enable it is generated at PA1 and goes to the data input
analog and digital sections of the instrument. DATA is of the shit register. Ull through UJ2 are the drivers for
serially loaded into~~theshift store registers and a STROBE~~ the LED segments of the display digits and the LED
pulse causes the registers to simultaneously output~the ap- indi&tors.
propriate logic levels to the FET, analog switch and Ielay
drivers.
5.7 POWER SUPPLIES

5.6 DIGITAL CIRCUITRY The main power supplies of the Model 199 are located on
sheet 5 of schematic drawing number W-126. Fuse F2 is
The Model 199 is controlled by an internal microcomputer. fhe line fuse which is accessible from the rear panel. 52
This section briefly describes the operation of the is the POWER ON/OFF switch and 53 sele& ll5V or 23OV
microcomputer and associated digital circuitry. Refer to operation by placing the transformer primary windings in
schematic diagram number 199-106 for circuit details. parallel or series. The power transformer, Tl, has three
secondary windings; one for the c5V digital supply, one
for the +5V analog supply and one for the il5V analog
5.6.1 Microcomputer supply. CRl3, CR14 and CR15 provide fullwave rectifica-
tion for the three suoulies, while U5O throueh U53 oro-
vide the regulation: ‘Supply filtering is p&formed by
The microcomputer centers around the g-bit 68B09
CM-C60, C63, c65, and C72.
microprocessor. The MPU has direct control over the
display, front panel switches, A/D converter, IEEE-488 bus,
scanner, as well as the VOLTMETER COMPLETE Output
and the EXTERNAL TRIGGER Input. Timing for the
5.8 SCANNER
micm-@xessor is accomplished by the use of Yl; an 8MH.z
crystal. This frequency is divided down by four to obtain The optional Model 1992 Scanner Card allows the user to
a bus operating frequency of 2MHz by the MPU,~ UlO. multiplex eight, 2-pole inputs or four, 4-pole inputs. A
schematic diagram of the Model 1992 is shown on draw-
ing number 1992-W located at the end of Section Z The
Instrument operation software is stored in the EPROM, main sections of the scanner card include the control and
U4. Calibration constants, Translator words and inshument relay circuits, as outlined below.
set up conditions are stored in ETROM (U20). U9 is the
RAM. The chip selected is determined by the state of All,
Al2, Al3, Al4 and Al5 address lines. These address lines 5.8.1 Control Circuitry
determine which is selected by the decoder (Ul). Only one
device (ROM, RAM, VIA, etc) will have access to the data
Control information for which channel should be closed
bus at any one time.
is transmitted in via the STROBE, DATA, and CLOCK lines
into U2. The control sequence is essentially the same as
that used for the main DMM circuitry discussed previous-
The heart of the IEEE-488 circuitry is the General Purpose
ly. The U2 output for the relay that is to be closed is set
Interface Bus Adapter (U5). The GPIBA is capable of per-
low, while the remaining outputs are high so that only one
forming all IEEE talker-listener protocols. The bidirectional
relay is closed at any given time.
data lines DO through D7 permit the transfer of data bet-
ween the microprtiessor and the GI’IBA. The transceivers
U6 and U7 are used to drive the output. Data is buffered
Ul and associated components are included in order to
by U6 and U7 and is transmitted to the bus via connector
ensure that relays do not randomly close during power up.
J7

5-10
 PRINCIPLESOF OPERATION

At power up, the Q output of Ul goes high, disabling the 5.8.2 Switching Relays
outputs of U2. When the first !STROBE pulse comes along,
the D-type flip-flop in UI is cleared, enabling the U2 out- Each of the eight input channels has a DPST (double-pole,
puts, and normal relay operation can commence, depen- single-throw) relay associated with it in order to switch the
ding on channel control data. HI and LO terminals separately. The relays are connected
in two four-unit groups for maximum versatility in pole
switching. Relays Kl through K4 are associated with out-
put A, while relays K5 through KS ati connected to out-
put B. For 2-pole operations, the user must strap the two
outputs together (HI to HI, LQ to LO), while the outputs
must be connected separately for 4-pole operation.
 SECTION 6

Maintenance

6.1 INTRODUCTION 3. Mark the selected line voltage on the rear panel for
future reference (to avoid confusion, erase the old
mark).
This section contains information netiessary to maintain,
calibrate; and troubleshoot the Model 199. Fuse replace-
ment and line voltage selection procedures are also
included. Table 6-1. Line Voltage Selection

WARNlNG Line Line Switch

The procedures included in this section are for Voltage Frequency Setting
use only by qualified service personnel. Do not lO5v425v 50Hz-6OHz 105v-G!5v
perform these procedures unless qualified to 210%25OV SOHz-6OHz 21W-250V
do so. Many of the steps in this section may
expose you to potentially lethal voltages that
could result in personal injury or death if nor-
6.3 FUSE REPLACEMENT
mal safety precautions are not observed.

The Model 199 has two fuses for protection in case of

6.2 LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION overload. The lie fuse protects the line power input of
the instrument, and the current fuse protects the current
function from excessive current. The fuses may be replac-
The Model 199 may be operated from either lC!5425V or ed by using the procedures found in the following
210~2SOV50 or 6OHz power sources. (A special transformer paragraphs.
may be installed for 90-1lOV and WO-220V ranges). The in-
strument was shipped from the factory set for an operating
voltage WARNING
marked on the rear panel. To change the lie voltage, pro- Disconnect the instrument from the power line
ceed as follows: and from other equipment before replacing
fuses.

WARNING
Disconnect the line cord and all other equip-
6.3.1 Line Fuse
ment from the Model 199.

To replace the line fuse, proceed as follows:

1. Place the line voltage switch, located on the rear panel,
in the desired position. See Table 6-l ftir the correct 1. Turn off the power and disconnect the line cord and all
position. other test cables from the instrument.
2. install a power line fuse consistent with the line voltage. 2. Place the end of a flat-blade screwdriver into the slot in
See paragraph 6.3.1 for the fuse replacement procedure. the line fuse holder on the rear panel. Push in and rotate
the fuse carrier one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Release pressure on the holder, and its internal spring
CAUTION will push the fuse and the carrier out of the holder.
The correct fuse type must be used to main- 3. Remove the fuse, and replace it with the proper type-
tain proper instrument protection. using Table 6-Z-as a guide.

6-I
 MAINTENANCE

CAUTION Table 6-3. Currant Fuse Replacement

Do not use a fuse with a rating higher than
specified or instrument damage may occur. If Fuse Type / Keithlcy Part No.
the instrument repeatedly blows fuses, locate
3A, UOV, 3AG, Normal-B10 Fu-82
and correct the cause of the trouble before
replacing the fuse.

6.4 CALIBRATION
4. Install the new fuse and the carrier into the holder by
reversing the above procedure. Calibration should be performed every 12 months, or if
the performance verification procedures in Section 4 show
that the Model 199 is out of specificatibn. If any of the
Table 6-2. Line Fuse Replacement calibration procedures in this section cannot be perform-
ed properly, refer to the troubleshooting information in this
Line Keitbky s&on. If the problem persists, contact your Keithley
representative or the factory for further information.
Voltage Fuse Type Part No.
105V~JZSV 3/l&4, 25w, Slo-Blo, 3AG FU-29
ZOV-25OV l/lOA, UOV, Slo-Blo, 3AG Fu-‘m NOTE
Check that the instrument is set to the proper line
frequency before proceeding with calibration,
6.3.2 Current Fuse

The ctitient fuse protects the 30mA and 3A ranges from The entire calibration procedure may be performed
an input current greater than 3A. To replace the current without having to make any internal adj~ustments if high
fuse, perform the~following steps: frequency (7OkHz) has been verified, as explained in
paragraph 6.4.10, step 5. Calibration can be performed from
the front panel or over the IEEE-488 bus.
1. Turn off the power and disconnect the power line and
testy leads.
NOTE
2. Place the end of a flat-blade screwdriver into~the slot in
A “CONFLICT’ error will be displayed, and the
the fuse holder on the front panel. Press in slightly and
rotate the fuse one-quarter turn CONFLICT error bit in the Ul status word will be
carrier
set when trying to calibrate the instrument while
counterclockwise. Release pressure and remove the fuse
it is in an improper state (i.e. dB). Also, if an
carrier and the fuse.
“UNCAL” error occurs, be sure to check the line
3. Remove the defective fuse and replace it using Table 6-3
frequency setting before performing calibration.
as a guide.

6.4.1 Recommended Calibration Equipment

CAUTION
Use only the recommended fuse type. If a fuse
with a higher current rating is installed, instru- Table 6-4 lists recommended calibration equipment. Alter-
ment damage may occur. nate equipment may be used as long as equipment ac-
curacy is at least as good as the specifications listed in the
table.
4. To replace the fuse carrier with the fuse, reverse the pro-
cedure in step 2.

6-2
 MAINTENANCE

Table 6-4. Recommended Calibration Equipment

Mfg Model Description Specifications

Fluke 5440A DC Voltage Calibrator 3OOmV, 3V, 3OV, 300V ranges *l5ppm
Fluke 52OOA AC Voltage Calit+or 33OmV, 3% 3OV ranges; 20Hz 20.1%;
50Hz-20kHz 0.02%: 1OOkH.z +0.33%
/ Fluke 1 52l5A 1 AC Power Atiplifiier ;/ 3oOV range; 20Hz iO.1246; 50i?z-2dkHz /
&0.04%; iOOkHz +O.l%
Fluke 5450A Resistance Calibrator 3000-3MQ ranges; +l5ppm; 30MQ
+32ppm; 3OOMR @5ppm
Valhalla 2500E Current Calibrator 30mA,~3A ranges +O.OU%

6.4.2 Environmental Conditions After calibration is complete, press in on CAL LOCK a se-
cond time in order to disable calibration. The unit will then
Calibration should be performed under laboratory condi- display the “CAL LOCKED” message.
tions having an ambient temperature of 23°C +l’C and
a relative humidity of less than 70%.
NOTE
The two detiinal points in the function area of the
display will be on when calibration is enabled.
6.4.3 Warm-Up Period

Turn on the instrument power and allow it to warm up 6.4.5 Front Panel Calibration
for at least two hours before beginning the calibration pro-
cedure. If the instrument has been subjected~to &r&es
of temperature or humidity, allow at least one additional The following information provides the basic procedure
hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the for calibrating the instrument from ~the front panel. A
calibration procedure. detailed calibration procedure is located in paragraph 6.4.7

NOTE
6.4.4 CAL LOCK Switch DCV ranges have three cal points: minus full
range, plus full range, and zero. The remaining
Upon power up, calibration is automatically locked out. functi&s require only two cal points.
A CAL LOCK switch, accessible from the front panel,
disables or enables front panel and IEEE488 bus calibra-
tion. When calibration is disabled, calibration cannot be 1. Place the tinit fin the “CAL UNLOCK” state to enable
performed. The following. message will be briefly displayed calibration. The switch is accessed from the front panel
when attempting to enter the calibration p+gram while of the instrument through the access hole.
the switch is disabled: 2. Select the function and range to be calibrated (DC
VOLTS, AC VOLTS, OHMS, DC AMPS, or AC AMPS),
CAL LOCKED 5% digit resolution, zero off, and filter off.
3. Select the front panel calibration program as follows:
Calibration can only be accomplished with calibration A. Press SHW LOCAL. The following message will
enabled. be displayed briefly:

CAL=
To enable calibration, push in on the CAL LOCK switch
with an indated tool (through the smaU access hole under B. The default calibration point, which is a high end
the round label). The instrument will briefly display the reading for the selected range and function, will
following message: now be displayed. For example, if the 3V DC range
was selected in step 2, the following calibration
CAL UNLOCK point will be displayed:

6-3
MAINTENANCE

4. If a different calibration point is to be used, entei the are transmitted over the bus instead of being entered from
new value using the data buttons (0 through 9). Each the front panel. By combining appropriate IEEE-488 com-
press of a data button displays the number at the cur- patible calibration equipment with a suitable test program,
sor location (identified by the bright flashing digit), and calibration of the Model 199 could be performed on an
moves the cursor to the next digit. If the cursor is mov- automated basis. Refer to Section 3 f&complete informa-
ed past the least significant digit, it will move back to tion on using the IEEE-488 bus. The following informa-
the most significant digit. tion provides the basic procedure for calibrating the instru-
5. Connect the calibration signal to the instrument: ment over the IEEE-488 bus.. The detailed calibration pro-
cedure starts with paragraph 6.4.7.
6. Press the NEXT button. The following message will be
displayed for several seconds:
Use the following basic procedure when calibrating the
WORKING
Model 199 Over the IEE~E-1188bus:
7. For DCV ranges only, the plus full range value will &
1. Place the unit in the “CAL UNLOCK” state. The CAL
displayed:
LOCK switch is accessed from the front panel of the
3.00000 VDC Model 199.
2. Program the desired range and function over the bus.
8. Key in the calibration value if differentcaiid conne& For example, to select the 3OOVDC range, send FOR4X.
the calibration signal. Press NEXT. 3. Program zero off, and 5% digit resolution by sending
9. The low end calibration point will now be displayed. zoslx.
For the 3VDC range, the following calibration point will 4. The high end of the range is calibrated fist. Apply a
be displayed: full range (or near full range) calibration signal to the
input of the instrument. For example, for the 3OOVDC
0.00000 VDC range, apply 300V DC to the instrument.
~5. Send the required calibration value preceded by the V
10. If a calibration point other than the one displayed is command letter and followed by the fit calibration
to be used, then change the display to the desired value command.
as explained in step 4. A. For DC’V ranges, send C2 first. For example, send
11. Set the level of the calibration signal to agree with the v-3oOxc2x.
displayed calibration point. 8. For all other functions, send CO fit. For example,
12 Press the NEXT button. The following message will be send V3OOXCOX.
displayed for several seconds:
NOTEz Calibration can bq~aborted at this time by sen-
ding an SDC or DCL~command over the bus. The
call%ration constant sent in step 4 will not be stored in
I.3 The calibration points will be stored in E?‘ROM and EY’ROM.
the instrument will now exit the calibration program.
Select the next range and function to be calibrated and
repeat steps-3 through 12. 6. The low end of the range is calibrated next. Apply a zero
(or near zero) calibration signal to the input of the in-
NOTE: If the calibration source has an offset, set the strument. For example, for the 3OOVDC range apply OV
calibration points to agree with the actual output of the to the instrument.
source. For example, if the source has a l@ DC offset 7. Send the appropriate calibration conimands for the sec-
on the 3OOmV DC range, set the calibration poirits for ond (or third with DCV) calibration point. For example,
3OO.OOlmVand ooO.OOlmV. to calibrate the zero calibration poitit of the 3COV DC
range send VOXCLX. Note that Cl is used for the second
calibration point.
6.4.6 IEEE-488 Bus Calibration 8. Storage of the two calibration points into E*l’ROM
automatically occurs when the second calibration com-
IEEE-488 bus calibration is performed in a manner similar mand is sent.
to front panel calibration, except that calibration con&n% 9. Repeat steps l-8 for the remaining ranges and functions.

6-4
Programming Example-The following simple program 1. Select the DC VOLTS fun~ction and the 3OOmV range.
demonstrates how to calibrate the Model 199 over the bus. 2. Connect the DC calibrator to the instrument as shown
The program assumes that the instrumenYs primary ad- in Figure 6-l (3OOmV range only; use Figure 6-2 for
dress is at 26. 3V-3C0Vranges).

PROGRAM COMMENTS NOTE

Low l&l mea&&nent techn$es should be used
Send remote enable. when calibrating the 300mV DC range. Refer to
Prompt for calibration paragraph 26.5 for low level measurement con-
signal. siderations.

Prompt for command. For front panel calibration, press SHIFI LOCAL and
proceed as follows:
A. With the -3oo.CKKJmV DCcalibration point displayed
Input command string on the Model 199, set the DC calibrator to output
from keyboard. -0.300000V.
Send command string to 8:~ After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator
199. voltage tq settle, press the NEXT button. The follow-
Get a reading. ing message will be displayed for several seconds:
Display reading
Loop back. WORKING

C. With the ‘&K?C@mV DC calibrition point displayed,

To run the program, press the RUN key. At~~theprompt, set the DC calibrator output to +0300oW.
apply a calibration signal to the instrument, type in the D. After allowing the voltage to settle, press NEXT. The
corresponding calibration command and press the return following message will be displayed:
key. The computer CRT will then display the calibration
value. WORKING

EIWith the OOO.ooOmVDC calibration point displayed,

6.4.7 Calibration Sequence set the DC calibrator to output O.OKlOOOV.
F. After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator
Calibrate the Model 199 in the order presented in then voltage to settle, press the NEXT button. The follow-
following paragraphs. The basic sequence is: ing message will be displayed for several seconds:

1. DC Volts calibration WORKING :

2. Ohms calibration G. The instrum$nt will exit the calibration program and
return to the 300mVDC range.
3. AC Volts calibration
H. Repeat the procedures in step 3 for the remaining
4. DC Current calibration
DCV ranges using Table 6-5 as a guide. Figure 6-2
5. AC Currefit calibration shows connections for the 3V-m ranges.
For IEEE-488 bus calibration, proceed as follows:
A. Set the DC voltage calibrator to output -0.3OOOOOV.
6.4.8 DC Volts Calibration
6. After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator
voltage to settle, send the following commands over
To calibrate the DCV function, proceed as follows: the bus: V-3@%-3XC2X.
C. Set the calibration to +0.3oooOV.
NOTE D. After allowing the calibrator voltage to settle, send
For front panel calibration, omit step 4 of the the following commands over the bus:
following procedure. For IEEE&3 bus calibration, WE-3XClX.
omit step 3.

6-5
MAtNTENANCE

E. Set the DC voltage calibrator to output 0.00000V

E After allowing sufficient time for the caiibrakr
voltage to settle, send the following command over
the bus: VOXCIX. All calibration constants will be
automatically stored in ElPROM.
G. Repeat steps A through D for the remaining DCV
raiges u&g Table 6-5 as a guide.
Cable

Figure 6-2. DC Volts Calibration Configuration

(3V-300V Ranges)

6.4.9 Resistance Calibration

To calibrate the ohms function, proceed as follows:

Figure 6-1. DC Volts Calibration Configuration NOTE

(300mV Range) For front panel calibration, omit step 4 of
thefollowing procdure. For IEEE-488 bus, calibra-
tion, omit step_3.

Table 6-5. DC Volts Calibration

199 DCV 199 Calibration

Range set-up Point (DCV)
3oOmV Figure 6-l -3OWOOmV
3c0.OOOmv .moov V3OOE-3XCOX
OCHl.OOOmV .00000W v0xcl.x
3 v Figure 6-1 -3.OOOOO V~ - 3.00000V v-3xC2X
3.OGQOO v 3.OOOiwV v3xcox
o.oocoo v 0.W voxclx
30 v Figure 6-2 -300000 v
30.0000 v
oo.oooo v
300 v Figure 6-2 -300.000 v
300.000 v
000.000 v

6-6
 MAINTENANCE

1.~Select the ohms function and the 3COQ range. Ed.Repeat steps A through D for the remaining ohms
2. Connti the resistanw calibrator to the instkment as raiges w&g Table 6-g as a guide.
shown in Figure 6-3.
3.20~ front panel calibration, press SHIFT’LCKAL and
proceed as follows:
A. With the lYO.OOOQcalibration displayed on the I Oumut HI n,
Model 199, set the resistance calibrator to 190a. 4 Resistance

8. After allowing sufficient time-foi fhe~ calibrator

resistance to settle, press the NEXT button. The
following message will be displayed for several
seconds: Shielded
Cable
WORKING

C. With the OOOlMOQcalibration point displayed, set Figure 6-3. Four-Wire Resistance Calibration
the resistawe calibrator to SHORT (On). Configuration (300S30kQ Ranges)
D. After waiting sufficient time for the calibrator
resistance to settle. mess the ENTER button. The
following message ‘will Abe displayed fro several
seconds:

WORKING
E. The instrument wi!.l tit the calibration program and iim- Output HI

return to the 300R range.

E Repeat the procedures in step 3 for the remaining
ohms rang& using Table 6-6 as a guide.
4. For IEEE-488 bus calibration, proceed as follows: r----

2
-1
Resistance ,
A. Set the resistance calibrator to lYO’2. Calibrator ,
B. After allowing sufficient time for the resistance
calibrator to settle, send the following commands Model 5450A 1
L-----J
over the bus: VlYOXCOX.
C. Set the resistance calibrator to SHORT (On). I
D. After allowing sufficient time for the resistance
calibrator to settle, send the following command_over Figure 6-4. Two-Wire Resistance Calibration
th-e bus:VOXCK Both calibration constants will be Configuation (300kQ-300MQ
automatically stored in E’I’ROM. Ranges)

6-7
 MAINTENANCE

Table 6-6. Resistance Calibration

Resistance

5
l99 Calibration Calibrator IEEE-488
199 Range set-up Point S&tillg Bus Commands
300 0 Figure 6-3 lYo.m n 19ot-l vlYocxox
oomm a Short (On) VCKClX
3 kll Figure 6-3 1.90000 kQ 1.9kt-J V1.9E3XCOX
O.OCUWkQ Short (00) VOXCIX
30 kQ Figure 6-3 lY.OOQOkt-l 19kt-l v19E3xccK
OO.OMXkt2 Short (On) VOXClX
300 ko Figure 6-4 190.000 kf2 19OkQ vlYoE3xcox
OOO.ooOkR Short (On) VOXClX
3MQ Figure 6-4 l.Yo#oMtl l.YMQ VL9E6XCOX
OIJCPXIOMQ Short (0’2) VOXClX
3OMil Figure 6-4 lY.OOOOMR 19Mfl VlYE6XCOX
001MooM62 Short (Ofi) voxclx
3OOMQ Figure 6-4 l!N.OOMQ 1OOMtl VlOoE6xcOX
OoO.oOMQ Short (On) voxclx

6.4.10 TRMS AC Volts Calibration D. After allowing the calibrator voltage to settle, press
the h%XT button. The following message will be
A full calibration of the ACV function includes two inter- displayed for several seconds:
nal, manual adjustments. However, if high frequency is
checked and found to be within specifications, the inter-
nal adjustments on the 3OVAC and 3OOVACranges will not E. The instrument will exit the calibration program and
have to be done. The following procedure indudes these return to the 3OOmV AC range.
checks. The flowchart in Figure 6-5 helps clarify the calibra- F. Repeat the procedures in step 3 for the remaining
tion procedure. ACV ranges using Table &7 as a guide.
4. For IEEE-488 bus calibration, proceed as follows:
A. Set the AC voltage calibrator to output 3OO.OOOmV
at
NOTE 5cQHz.
For front panel caIibration, omit step 4 of the
B. After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator
following procedure. For IEEE- bus calibration,
voltage to settle, send the following commands over
omit step_%
the bus: V3OOE-3XCOX.
C. Set the AC calibrator to output 3O.OOOmVat 5OOHz.
1. Select the ACV function and the 3QOmV range. ”
D. After allowina sufficient time for the calibrator
7
-.
Cnnn~rt
___I.__.
thus AC nlihrdnr
_..- .-- --.1.-.-.
I)F ehnwn
-I I.._ ..I.
in Figure
-
66. voltage to set&, send the following command over
the bus: WE-3XClX. Both calibration constants will
3. For front panel calibration, press Sm LQCAL, and
automatically be stored in EzPROM.
yL”ccF” Pa ,“Y”v”a.
E~;~Reueat s&us A throtieh D for the remaininc ACV
A. With the 3CKKQOmVAC calibration point displayed r&ges t&g Table 6-yas a guide.
on the Model 199, set the AC calibrator to output 5. High Frequency Check (7OkHz):
3C0.OOOmVat 5OOHz. A. With the AC VOLTS function, autorange and 5%d
B. After allowing sufficierit time for the calibrator resolution selected, connect the AC calibrator to the
voltage to settle, press the NEXT button. The follow- ~instrument as shown in Figure 6-6.
ing message will be displayed for several seconds. B. Set the AC calibrator to output lOO.CX?OV at a frequen-
cy of, 7Ok& and a&w sufficient time for the
WORKING measurement to settle.
C. If the reading is not lKl.OKlV &I800 counts, then omit
C With the 030.OOOmVAC calibration point displayed, steps D through E and proceed to step 6.
set the AC ca&rator to output 3O.ooOmV at 5OOHz.
 MAlNTENANCE

Table 6-7. TRMS AC Volts Calibration

199 Calibration AC Calibrator Voltage IEEE-488

Point setting @ 5ooHz Bus Commands
3oo.ooomv 3oo.ooomv WOE-3XCOX
030.0oomv 3O.OOOmV V3OE-3XClX
3.G6nlo v 3.00000 v vxcox
0.3rHIoo v .3lxIooo v V300E-3XClX
3o.oooo v 30.m v v3oxcox
3.otnxl v 3.MxMo v V3XClX
3oo.ooo v 3oo.ooo v v3ooxcox
3o.ooo v 3o.ocHlo v v3oxclx

D. Set the AC calibrator to output lO.OOMlVat 7OkHzand D. After allowing sufficient time for the measurement to
aIlow the measurement to settle. settle, use an insulated alignment tool to adjust the
E. lf the reading is not KKKKIV 11800 counts;then high 3COVmnge capacitor C49 (see Figure 6-7) for a display
frequency will have to be adjusted as explained in the reading of 1OO.OOOV*500 counts.
following procedure (step 6). If the high frequency
readings were within the defined range, step 6 does
not have to be performed and ACV calibration is NOTE
completed. If the optional Model 1592 Scanner is installed, the
adjustments are accessible through holes in the
6. High Frequency Adjustment:
Scanner board.
A.Remove the top cover to~m~~gainaccess to the
adjustments.
B. With the AC VOLTS function and 5Yzd resolution E. Set the Model 199 to the 30V range and set the AC
selected, connect the AC calibrator to the instrument calibrator to output 1O.OOOOVat 7OkHz.
as shown in Figure 6-6. FPAfter allowing the measurement to settle, adjust the
CL Set the Model 199 to the 3oov range and set the AC 3OV range capacitor C48 for a display reading of
calibrator to output lOO.OCNVat a frequency of 7QkHz. 1o.ooooV f500 counts.
G. Repeat steps C through F until no other adjustments
need to be made.
WARNING
Some procedures require the use of high H.l’ut the top cover back on.
voltage. Take cam to prevent contact with live
circuits which could cause electrical shock
resulting in injury or death. The shield on the
analog board is at input low potential and may
have up to SOOV on it. Use an insulated align-
ment tool to make the following adjustments.

6-9
 MAINTENANCE

Panel or IEEE

Figure 6-6. TRMS AC Volts Calibration

Configuration

Adjust Trim
Capacitors
Step 6

ACV Calibration

Figure 6-5. Flowchart of AC Volts Calibration

Procedure

6-10
 MAINTENANCE

WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGES MAY BE

PRESENT ON SHIELD WHEN USED WITH

r
FLOATING SOURCES
300”AC RANGE
ADJUSTMENT

r 30VAC RANGE

I I ADJUSTMENT

ACCESSIBLE THROUGH HOLE>

IN SCANNER BOARD WHEN UNIT
IS SO EQUIPPED

Figure 6-7. TRMS AC Volts High Frequency Calibration Adjustments (30V and 300V Ranges)

6-U
MAINTENANCE

6.4.11 DC Current Calibration Table 6-8. DC Current Calibration

Perfoti the following procedure to calibrate DCA:

199 DC Current
199 DCA Calibration Calibrator IEEE-488
NOTE Range Point output Bus Commands
For front panel calibration, omit step 4 of the
following procedure. For IEEE-488 bus calibration, 3omA 3o.oOmmA 3o.ooOOmA V30E-3XCOX
omit step 3. oo.oooomA oo.oooom‘4 voxclx
3 A 3.OOooO A 3OOO.OOmA V3XClX
O.COOOOA OOOO.OOmA voxclx
1. Select the DC AMPS function and the 3011~4 range.
2. Connect the DC current calibrator to the instrument~s
shown in Figure 6-8.
3. For front panel calibration, press SHIFT LOCAL, and
proceed as follows:
A. With the 3O.OOOOmADC calibration point displayed
on the Model 199, set the current calibrator to out-
put +3o.OOoomA.
B. After allowing sufficient time for the nkkement
to settle, press the NEXT button. The following
message will be displayed for several seconds:

WORKING

C. With the OO.C%OmA DC~calibration point displayed,

set the current calibrator to output oO.OOOOmA.
D. After allowing sufficient ~time for the measurement
to settle, press the NEXT button. The following
message will be displayed for several seconds:
Figure 6-8. DC Current Calibration Configuration
WORKING

E. The instrument will exit the calibration progmm and 6.4.12 TRMS AC Current Calibration
return to the 30mA range.
F. Repeat the procedures in step 3 for the 3A DC range
Perform the following procedure to calibrate the AC AMPS
using Table 6-8 as a guide.
function:
4. For IEEE-488 bus calibration, proceed as follows:
A. Set the current calibrator to output 3O.OOOOrnA.
B. After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator cur- NOTE
rent to settle, send the following command over the For front panel calibration, omit steppe4 of the
bus: V3OE-3XCOX. following procedure. For IEEE488 bus calibration,
C. Set the current calibrator to output OO.K0OmA. omit ste~p3~.-
D. After allowing sufficient time for the call%rator cur-
rent to settle, send the following command over the
1. Select the AC AMPS function and the 3&nA range.
bus: VOXCIX. Both calibration constants will
automatically be stored in E?‘ROM. 2. Connect the AC current calibrator to the instrument as
shown in Figure 6-9.
E. Repeat steps A through D for the remaining DCA
range using Table 6-8 as a guide. 3. For front~panel calibration, press SHIFT LOCAL, and
proceed as follows:
 MAINTENANCE

A. With the 30.OOOOmAAC calibration point displayed Table 6-9. TRMS AC Current Calibration
on the Model 199, set the current calibrator to out-
put 3O.OOOOmAat a frequency of 5OOHz.
8. After waiting sufficient time for the measurement to
settle, press the NEXT button. The following
message wilJ be displayed for several seconds: 199 ACA
Range
WORKING
3omA
C. With the 03.0000mA AC calibration point displayed,
set the current calibrator to output 03.OOOOmA at 3 A
5OOHZ.
D. After allowing the measurement to settle, press the
NEXT button. The following message $l be
displayed for several seconds:

WORKING

E. The instrument will exit the calibration program and

retmn to the 3omA range.
F. Repeat the procedures in step 3 for the 3A AC range Shielded
Cable
using Table 6-9 as a guide.
4. For IEEE-488 bus calibration, proceed as folJows: I 1
A. Set the cunent calibrator tomoutput 3O.oooOmA at -----LO inputLO
5OQHz. 1 C”fTe”t m ACVoltage
Calibrator Calibrator
8. After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator cur-
rent to settle, send the following command over the Model 2YYJE Mod4 52COA
bus: V30E-3XCOX. HI Input HI

C. Set the current calibrator to output 3.ooOOOmA at

5ooHz.
D. After aJlowing sufficient time for the calibrator cur-
Figure 6-9. AC Current Calibration Configuration
rent to settle, send the following command over the
bus: V3E-3XCK Both calibration constants will
automatically be stored in E’PROM.
E. Repeat steps A through D for the remaining ACA 6.5 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
range using Table 6-9 as a guide.
Jf it becor& necessary to rem&e or replace a c&nponent,
use the following general procedure to disassemble the
NOTE unit, using Figures 6-10 and 6-11 as a guide. Note that the
After completing the calibration procedure, place procedure should be carried out in the sequence given
the unit in the “CAL LOCKED” state by pressing here, as each stepdepends on completion of the prior step.
in on the CAL LOCK switch. Also, it is a good idea Reassemble the unit in the reverse order. For units not
to ulace a dated calibration sticker over the switch equipped with the~optional Model 1992 Scanner, bypass
access hole. step 2.

6-13
MAINTENANCE

WARNING E. Pry the digital board free at connector Pl6 (at the end
To~prevent a possible shock hazard, disconnect next to the power transformer) until it comes free of
the line cord and all test leads from the Model the connector pins, then remove the board from the
199 before beginning disassembly. unit.

1. Cak cover removal:

A. Remove the two bottom screws that secure the case WARNING
cover to the case sides. “ihen removing oi installing the digital board,
be careful of the sharp points on the connec-
tor pins.
NOTE
It is not necessary to remow the feet.
4. Front panel and display board removal:
A. Disconnect the five wires going from the front panel
B. Remove the screws that secure the rear bezel, then input jacks to the analog board.
remove the bezel. B. Carefully pry the locking tabs free of the front panel
C. Carefully slide the cover off the unit to the rear. rails, then remove the front panel.
2. Scaiiner board removal (with option 1992): C. Remove the screws that secure the top and bottom
A. Pull out the quick-disconne~ti~plugs from the rear. rails to the right case sides, then remove the rails.
B. Remove the three screws that secure the scanner D. Grasp the display board by the edges, and remove
board to the analog board and rear panel. the~board by Fulling it forward until it is clear of the
analog board tab.
C. Grasp the board by the edges~ and gently @l it
toward the front of the unit until it clears the rear 5. Analog board removal.
and side of the case. A. Remove the two screws that secure the rear panel to
D. Partially pull the board free of the unit to allow ac- the case right side. As the screws are removed,
cess to the ribbon cable plug underneath. remove case side.
E. Unplug the scanner board ribbon cable (Pl), and 8. Remove the nut that secures the green ground wire
remove the scanner board completely from the unit. to the rear panel.
3. Digital board removal: ~-C. Disconnect the four rear panel input jack wires.
A. Disconnect the trigger signal connector (Pl5) and D. Remove the two nuts that secure the AC receptacle
display board ribbon cable (P14) from the digital to the rear panel, then remove the rear panel from
board. the analog board.
B. Remove the screw that secures the digital board to
the analog board standoff.
WARNING
C. Remove thentwo nuts that secure the IEEE&8 coti-
When reassembling the unit, the green ground
nectar to the rear panel. wire must be securely connected to the rear
D. Remove the four screws that secure the left grooved panel to ensure continued protection against
side uanel. then remove the side Danei.
1 possible shock haze&.

6-14
 MAINTENANCE

Figure 6-10. Model 199 Exploded View

645
MAINTENANCE

Install Jumper
to Connect Digital
Common to Chassis Ground

Digital -
Board

P15/J15-
(To Trigger
Jacks) Analog
Board

J14-
(To Display
Board)

JlUF’16-
(To Analog
Board)

Front

12345
00000
h

Figure 6-11. Connector Locations

646
 MAINTENANCE

6.6 SPECIAL HANDLING OF STATIC- 6.7.1 Recommended Test Equipment

SENSITIVE DEVICES
Success in troubleshooting complex equipment like the
CMOS devices operate at very high impedance levels for Model 199 depends not only on the skill of the technician,
low power consumption. As a result, any static charge that but relies on the use of accurate, reliable test equipment.
builds up on your person or clothing may be sufficient to Table 6-10 lists the equipment recommended for trouble-
destroy these devices, if they are not hanged properly. shooting the Model 199. Other equipment such as logic
analyzers and capacitance meters could also be helpful,
especially in difficult situations.
CAUTION
In order lo avoid possible damage,assumethat
all devices are static sensitive. 6.7.2 Power Up Self Test

Upon power up, the instrument will do a number of~tests

When handling these devices, use the following precau- on it&. Testsare performed on memory (ROM, RAM and
tions to avoid damaging them. EV’ROM). Whenever one of the memory tests fails, the
instrument wiIl lock up and musty be repaired. If all the
1. The devices listed in the replaceable parts list should be tests pass, then the frequency will be displayed. Im-
transported and handled only in containers specially mediately after turning on the Model 199, the following
designed to prevent static build-up. Typically, these parts sequence will take place:
will be received in anti-static containers of plastic or
foam. Keep these devices in their original containers un- 1. A digital check will be performed on the ROM circuitry.
til ready for installation. If the test fails, the instrument will lock up with the
2. Remove the devices from their protective cbnt%iers only following message displayed:
at a properly grounded work station. Also ground
yourself with a suitable wrist strap. 0000000000
3. Handle the devices only by the body; do~not touch the
pins. Replacing U4 tiay correct the problem.
4. Any printed circuit board into which the devices is to
be inserted must also be grounded to the bench or table. 2. If the ROM test passes, a digital self-test will then be
performed on the RAM circuitry. If the RAM test fails,
5. Use only anti-static type solder suckers.
the instrument will lock up with the following error
6. Use only grounded tip solder irons. message displayed:
7. Once the device is installed on the PC board, it is nor-
mally adequately protected and normal handling can AAAAA&%AAA
resume.
Replacing U9 may solve the problem.
3. Finally, the E’PROM circuitry where the calibration con-
6.7 TROUBLESHOOTING stants, IEEE address and lie frequency settings are
stored will be checked. If thii test fails, the following
The troubleshooting information~contained in this section message displayed:
is intended for use by qualified personnel having a basic
understanding of analog and digital circuitry. The in- UNCAL
dividual should also be experienced at using typical test
equipment as well as ordinary troubleshooting procedures. Pressing any front panel momentary button will return
The information presented here has been written to assist the instrument to normal operation however, acomplete
in isolating a defective circuit or circuit s&ion. Tsolation calibration will have to be performed, and the IEEE ad-
of the specific component is left to the technician. Note dress and line frequency setting should be checked. If
that schematic diagrams and component location draw- the test still fails after calibration, try replacing U20
ings, which are an essential aid in troubleshooting, are before recalibrating the instrument again.
located at the end of Section 7. ~4.The instrument will then go to the power up default
function.

6-17
MAINTENANCE

Table 6-10. Recommended Troubleshooting Equipment

Equipment Use
Five function DMM with 0.1% basic DCV accuracy, 10M Power supply and DC voltage checks;
input impedance analog signal tracing co#jnuity, logic
levels.

Dual-trace, triggered sweep oscilloscope, DC to 50MHz Digital and analog waveform che&.

Digital frequency counter Checking clock frequencies.

6.7.3 Diagnostics ing FETs and relays should be on. Apply an ap-
propriate signal to the instrument, and trace the signal
through the unit using the appropriate schematic as
Two p?ograms available under DMM SETUP allow you to
a guide.
test the front panel LEDs, as well as perform the memory
tests that are automatically performed upon power up. 10. To change the N mode, press the TRIGGER button.
Also included~is a truubleshooting test mode that is design- 11. To troubleshoot a different range or function, fmt exit
ed to turn on the various relays and switching FETs to allow the diagnostjc-program by pressing any front panel
signal tracing through the instrument. Perform the follow- button except TRIGGER, then exit the setup mode by
ing steps in order to test the instrument. pressing NEXT to return to normal display. Change
the range or function as required, then reenter the
1. Select the range and function to be tested for signal diagnostic program by using DMM SETUP.
tracing.
2. Press SHm DMM SETUP then NEXT four times so
that the instrument displays the following: 6.7.4 Power Supplies

LEDS OFF Table 6-12 shows the various checks that can be made to
the power supplies of the Model 199. In addition to the
3. Use uprange or downrange to select the following normal voltage checks, it is a good idea to check the various
display: supplies with an oscilloscope for signs oft noise or
oscillations.
LEDS ON

4. P&s NEXT t0 initiate the LED test.

6.7.5 Signal Conditioning Checks
5. While the LED test is running, observe the front panel
LEDs and display segments to verify that all are func-
tioning properly. These circuits can be checked by using the diagnostic pro-
gram (under DMM SETUP) as explained in the paragraph
6. At the conclusion of the LED test, the instrument will
6.7.3.,
display the following:

DEBUG OFF
6.7.6 Digital and Display Circuitry Checks
7. Press uprange or downrange to display the following:
The digital and display circuitry can be checked out by us-
DEBUG ON ing the troubleshooting data found in Tables 6X3 and 6-14.

8. Press NEXT to enter the diagnostic test. The unit will

display that the first N mode is selected as follows: 6.7.7 Scanner Checks
N 01
Troubleshoot the optional Model 1992 Scanner using Table
6-E
9. Using Table 6-Q reference the selected N mode to the
present range and function to determine which switch-
 MAINTENANCE

Table 6-11. Model 199 Troubleshooting Mode

FUWtiOIl nput
& 4easurement uffer Range Switches Multiplex
Range Phase Ain Closed Switches Closed
3OOmV DC SIG ZERO x10 Qll, U22A
CAL ZERO Xl Qll, U22A U25QD”a32
CAL Qll, U22A U25C. 032
SIG Xxlo Q11, Uz.4 Q”jO-

3VDC SIG ZERO Xl Kl 011, u22A QX

CAL ZERO Xl Kl 611, u22A U25D, Q32
CA1 Xl Qll, U22A U25C, Q32
SIG Xl E Qll, U22A Q30

3OV DC SIG ZERO Xl - QI.3, Qll U22A 433

CAL ZERO Xl - 413, QlL UZI‘A U25D, 432
CAL - QB, QlL USA U25C, Q32
SIG :; - Q13, QlL UZ.A Q35,

300V DC~ SIG ZERO - 43, Qll, UDA

CAL ZERO E - Q3r QIL U22A U25:34Q32
CAL xl - 43, Qll, UZZA U25C: 432
SIG Xl - 43, QS U22.4 Q35

3OOmV AC ZERO Xl <4, KS U23A, U23B U25D, Q32

CAL Xl <4, K5 U23A, U23B UUC, Q32
SIG Xl <4, KS U23A, U23B U25A, 432
No Test - - - -

3V AC ZERO Xl c4, K5 u21c U25D, 432

CAL Xl <4, K5 u21c U25C, Q32’
SIG xl <4, K5 u21c U25A, 432
No Test - - -

3OV AC ZERO X1 U21B U25D, 432

CAL E U21B UUC, 432
SIG Gi K4 U21B U25A, 432
No Test _ - - -

3CQVAC ZERO Xl IJUC, U21B U25D, 432

CAL xl E U23C, U21B LJ25C, Q32
SIG Xl K4 LJ23C, U2l.B U25A, Q32
No Test - - - -

3cofl SENSE Lo Xl0 cl, K?J Qll, U22D, U24D U24B, Q32
REF HI Xl cl, K3 011. U22D. U24D 435, 412
REF LO Xl a, K3 611; U22D; U24D U25A, 432
SENSE HI xl.0 c2, lc3 Qll, U22D, U24D Q3’3

3k SENSE LO Xl K2, K3 Qll, U22D, U24D U24B. Q32

REF HI Xl c2, K3 QJl, U22D, U24D 435, Q=
REF LO a, K3 Qll, U22D, U24D U24A, 432
SENSE~~~HI 2 Kz K3 Qll, U22D, U24D 430

6-19
 MAINTENANCE

Table 6-11. Model 199 Troubleshooting Mode (Cont.)

Multiplex
Switches Closed

Xl K2, K3 Qll, U22C, U24C U24B, Q32

REF HI Qll, U22C, U24C Q35, 412
REF LO 00: 2 ix Qll, U22.C U24C U24A, Q32
SENSES HI 04 Xl K2: IQ Qll, U22C, U24C 43’3

3OOK SENSE LO 01 Xl K2, K3 Ql2, 43, U27yC, U24C U24B, 432

REF HI 02 Xl K2, K3 Ql2, Q3, U22C, U24C Q35
REFJ.D 03 Xl K2, K3 Ql2, Q3, U22C; U24C
SENSE HI 04 x1 Ia,K3 QIZ, Q3, UUC, U24C :z

3M SENSE LO 01 K2, K3 Ql2, QI3, U22C, U24C U24B, 432

REF HI 02 ;: K2,~ K3 Ql2, QI3, U22C, U24C 435
REF LO Xi a K3 412, QJ.3, U22C, U24C
SENSE HI El Xl K2, K3 Ql2, 413 U22C, U24C $2 ~~

30M SENSE LO 01 K2 412, UUC, U24C U24B, Q32

REF HI 02 ;: K2 QI2, U22C, U24C 435
SENSE HI 03 xl K2 QLZ, U22C, U24C 430
No Test 04
-1-l - -

300M SENSE-LO 01 XI QQ U22C, U24C U24B, Q32

REF HI 02 xl E 412, LJ22C, U24C 435
SENSES HI 03 Xl K2 Ql.2, U22C, U24C Q3B
No Test 04 - - - -

3OmA DC SIG ZERO 01 xl0 - u23c U25D, Q32

CAL ZERO 02 Xl - u23c UUD, Q32
CALM 03 Xl - u23c UUC, Q32
SIG 04 x10 - U23C U22.B Q32

3ADC SIG ZERO x10 - Q26, 436, 437 UUD, Q32

CAL ZERO :: 426, Q36, 437 U25D, 432
CAL 03 ;; 1 Q26, Q36, Q.37 U25C. 432
SIG 04 x10 - 426, Q36, QY U228, 432

3Ord.4 AC ZERO 01 Xl - U23D, U23B, U23C U25D, Q32

CAL Xl - U23D, U23B, U23C U25C, Q32
SIG :: Xl - U23D, U23B, U23C UUC, Q32
No Test 04 - - -

3A AC ZERO 01 - Q26,Q36Q37,U23C,IJ23D,U23B U25D, 432

CAL ii - Q26,Q36,Q37,U23C,U23D,U23B U25C, Q32
SIG ii Xl - Q26,Q36,Q37;v23C,UUD,U23B U22C. Q32
No Test 04 - - -

6-20
 MAINTENANCE

Table 6-12. Power Supply Checks

Required Condition Remarks

Set to 115 or 23OV as required. Line voltage seleaion
Check for continuity Remove fuse to check
Plugged into live receptacle;
power on.
4 +5V Digital Supply U53, pin 3 +5v, *5% Referenced to digital common
5 +5V Analog Supply U51, pin 3 +5v, *5% Reference to analog common
6 il5V Analog Supplies U52, pin 3; +15V, -l5v, *0.75v Referenced to analog common
I 1u50, pin 3

Table 6-13. Digital Circuitry Checks

Gj Item/Component Required Condition Remarks

1 u4, u9, u20 ~SS RAM, ROM and ETROM Display will lock if failure
self-test on power up. occurs
2 US, pin 2 (PAO) lTL level pulses every lmsec VIA clock
3 U8, pin 3 (PAI) TTL level pulses every Emsec~ Data
4 US, pin 6 (PA4) Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA when button
pressed
5 US, pin 7 (pA5) Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA when button
pressed
6 US, pin 8 (PA6) Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA when button
pressed
7 US, pin 9 (l?m Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA when button
pressed
U8, pin 19 Variable pulse train (W to +5V) VIA Data Line
98 Ul, pin 4 Variable pulse train (OV to +5V) Data butput
10 U38, pin I3 Variable pulse train (OV to +5V) A/D counts
11 US, pins I2 through 16 Variable pulse train (OV to +5V) Data to Vll from AID
12 UlO, pins 34 and 35 2MI-k TTL Bus Clock
I3 UlO, pin 37 +w, *5% Reset line (goes low briefly on
g;;nzP)
14 us, pin 9 +5V signal pulsed OV to +5V
every hsec
I.5 us, pin 19 +5v (Logic “1”)
16 US, pti 18 2MH.z square wave at OV to t5\
7.7 US, pin 28 Should go true (+OV) when ATN line
command is sent
Ii3 US, 24 (NDAC), 25 @RFD), Refer to Figure C-2 for required Handshake sequence
26 (DAV), and the data lines conditions
-

6-21
 MAINTENANCE

Table 6-14. Display Circuitry Checks

Step Item/Component Required Condition Remarks

1 U4 and US, pins 2, 9 and 14 +5v, +5% t5v supply
2 P14, pins 6, 11 through 24 Variable pulses Segment drivers
3 Ul, pins 6 and 16; Variable Dulses Digit drivers
i
U2, ‘pins 4-7, 14-W
4 U5, PhS 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11 and 12; lmsec negative going pulse every
U4, pins 1, 3, 4, 5 1Omsec
5 P14, pin 7 (SO) Depress Sl, 52, S3, or 54 button Pulse present when button
pressed
6 P14, pin 5 (Sl) Depress 55, S6, S7, or 58 button Pulse present when button
pressed
7 Pl4, pin 3 (S2) Depress S9, SlO, Sll, Sl2, or Sl3 Pulse present when button
button
i e=?sed

Table 6-15. Scanner Board Checks

Remarks
AI1 signals referenced to analogy’
ground (Pl, pins 1 and 2)
Stays high Yz second on power up,~ Power-on safe guard.
then goes LO.
Negative-going pulses Control CLOCK
Positive-going pulses Conhl DATA
Positive-going pulses Control STROBE
On relay output LO, all others HI Close selected channel using
SCANNER button

II
7 KlX8 Contact resistance <5OOtia Check HI and LO for each relay;
close relay with SCANNER
button.

6.8 SCANNER INSTALLATION AND

CHECKOUT Disconnectthe line cord and all test leads from
the Model 199 before removing the case cover.

The following paragraphs discuss installation of the Model

1992 Scanner and Scanner checkout procedures. Refer to 1. Remove the two screws that secure the rear bezel, then
paragraph 2.11 for front panel scanner operation; lEElZ-488 remove the bezel.
control of the scanner is located in paragraph 3.32.
2. Remove the mews that seme the case cover to the case
sides, then slide the cover off the instrument to the rear.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the cover plate to
6.8.1 installation the rem panel, then remove the cover plate. Save the
screws, which will be used secure the scanner card to
the rear panel.
Using Figure 6-12 and 6-U, install the Model 1992 Scanner
as discussed below:

6-22
 MAINTENANCE

WARNING 3. Plug the connecting blocks into the scanner card, and
The cover plate must be installed if the scan- make sure the front panel INPUT switch is in fhe rear
ner card is removed. position.
4. Plug in the Model 199 and turn on the power.
5. Press the SCANNER button, and verify that the follow-
4. Remove the two quick-disconnect terminal blocks from ing message is displayed:
the scanner card before installation.
5.~0rient the scanner card above its final location (see CHANNEL?
Figure 6-12), and plug the ribbon cable (PI) into the
mating receptacle (J26) on the analog board (see Figure 6. If, instead, the unit displays the “NO SCANNER’
6-Q). The red mark on the ribbon cable must be message, you may have forgotten to cut jumper W3 as
oriented on the right as viewed from the front of the described in paragraph 6.8.1.
unit. 7. Press 0 to return to normal display.
6. Put the scanner card into the unit so that it lines up 8. Select the following Model 199 operating modes.
with the rear panel slot and is adjacent to the grooves
Function: OHMS
in the case side.
Range: 3ocQ
7. Secure the scanner card to the rear panel with the two
screws removed in step 2. Resolution: 5% digits.
8. Secure the scanner card to the analog board using the Filter: off
supplied #6-32 x l-1/8” screw. zero: off
9. Te?npo?arily short the rear panel VOLTS OHMS ter-
minals, then press ZERO. Leave zero enabled for the
WARNING remainder of the checkout procedure.
The screws must be installed to ensure proper 10. Press SHIFT TRIG SETW, and use uprange or
grounding. The analog board shield must not downrange so that the “ONE SHOT” trigger mode
message is displayed.
11. Press NEXT twice to return to normal display.
12. Press SHIFT SCAN SFNP, then NEXT twice to
9. Connect one end of the supplied two-conductor ca-
display the present scan mode. Use uprange or
ble to J30 on the scanner card, and the other end to
downrange to display the following:
J29 on the digital board.
10. Move Jumper W2 to position B as shown in the illus- STEP
~tE?tiO*.
11. Using a pair of diagonal cutters, cut jumper W3 on X3. Press NEXT to completeprogramming.
the digital board (see Figure 6-13 for location). This -
14. Press SCANNER and note that the instrument displays
step is necessary to enable scann$r card operation.
the following:
12. Replace the case cover and bezel, and secure them
with the screws removed earlier. Proceed to the fol-
LIMIT?
lowing paragraph to check out the scanner card to
verify that it is operational. 15. Press 8 to program the limit.
16. Press TRIGGER to close channel 1. The inswanent will
display the resistance reading on channel 1.
6.8.2 Card Checkout 77. Verify the resistance reading is less than lfi.
18. Press TRIGGER to cycle to the next channel. Verify that
Use the procedure below to test the functionality of the the resistance reading is less than 10.
Model 1992 after installation. 19. Repeat step 18 for the remaining channels.
20. If all channels show an overflow reading in its test, hit
1. Connect a short jumper wire between the H and L ter- is probable that the cad was installed improperly (refer
minals of each channel input on th-e hvo terminal to paragraph 6.8.1). If only one channel measures im-
blocks. properly, check to see that the channel jumper is in-
2.Xonnect the A and B outputs together (H to H, L to
statled properly.
L), and then connect the outputs to the VOLTS OHMS
Hl and LO terminals on the rear panel (H to HI, L tom
ID). Use the supplied output cables.

6-23
 MAINTENANCE

21. Turn off the instrument power, and unplug the con- to connect the relay shields to analog ground (see Figure
netting blocks. Remove the shorting jumpers from the 6-U). If desired, this jumper can be cut~to float the shields,
channel inputs. Assuming the scanner card functioned or to connect another potential (for example, for guarding).
normally, the unit is now reading for use.

CAUTION
6.8.3 Relay Shield Jumper Maximum voltage between shields and contact
is 250V DC.
A jumper (Wl), on the scanner board, is factory installed

REMOVE REAR COVER PLATE

Figure 6-12. Scanner Installation

6-24
 MAINTENANCE

Cut Jumper SC2llller

w3 for Scanner Board
Operation
Jumper Wl
(cut to float relay shields)

Route Ribbon Cable

Under Scanner Board

Digital
Board Jumper W2 (shown
installed in position 6).

2 - Conductor cable

Front

Figure 6-13. Scanner Connector Location

6-2516-26
 7
SECTION

Replaceable Parts

7.1 INTRODUCTION 2. instrument Serial Number

3. Parts Description
This section contains replacement parts information, com- 4. Circuit Designation (if applicable)
ponent location drawings and schematic d+ams for the 5. Keithley Part Number
Model 199.

If an additional instruction manual is required, order the

7.2 PARTS LIST manual package (Keithiey Part Number 199-90100). The
manual package contains an instruction manual and any
Parts are listed alphanumerically in order of their circuit applicable addenda.
designations. Table 7-1 contains parts lit infonn.%tion for
the display board. Table 7-Z contains parts list information
for the digital board. Table 7-3 contains parts list informa- 7.4 FACTORY SERVICE
tion for the analog board. Table 7-4 contains a miscel-
laneous parts list for the Model 199. Model 1992 parts tie If the instrument is to be returned to the factory for ser-
listed in Table 7-5. vice, please complete the service form which follows this
section and return it with the instrument.

7.3 ORDERING INFORMATION

7.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND
To place an order, or to obtain information concerning COMPONENT LOCATION DRAWINGS
replacement parts, contact you Keithley representative or
the factory. See inside front cover for addresses. When
Schematic diagrams and component location drawings
ordering include the following information:
follow the appropriate replaceable parts list for that par-
ticular board.
1. Instrument Model Number

7-1
TABLE 7-1. DISPLAY BOARD, PARTS LIST

CIRCUIT KEITHLEY
DESIG. DESCRIPTION PART NO.

c2 CAP,.1uF,20%.50V,GERAMIC C-365-.1

DSl ..DS5 DISPLAY,DIGITAL (DOUBLE DIGIT) DD-39

DSG-DSlO PILOT LlGHT.RED.LED PL-71
DSl2-DS14
DS16, DS17
MOUNTING KIT FOR PL-71’S MK-22-3

P14 CABLE ASSEMBLY,26 CONDUCTOR CA-27-4

Sl -S4,S6,S7,S9 PUSHBUTrON CAPS 8228-317-5

Sll,S13
Sl..S13 SWITCH,MOMENTARY SW-435
S5.S8 PUSHBUITON CAPS 8228-317-6

Ul ,u2 I&SINK DRIVERJND2596A IC-576

u4,u5 IC.8 BIT PAR OUT SHIFT REG,74HCT164 IC-456
LTR.ECO NO. REVISION ENG. DATE
C 12296 RELERSED s . t . 1o/i2/e7
D 12470 REUISED s.2. l/20/87
E 12615 REUISED S.Z. 2-2-28

F 15162 CHG’D ARTWORK FROM REU E TO F. &j 4-10-92

Sll s12 ss @ s10

s13 Sl s7

NOTE :
INSTRLL MK-22-3 UNDER DS6 THRU DSlO,DSl2, THRU OS14,DS16,DS17.

PUSHBUTTON SELECTION CHFlRT

Figure 7-1. Display Board, Component Location Drswing, Dwg. No. 199410
TABLE 7-2. DIGITAL BOARD, PARTS LIST

CIRCUIT KEITHLEY
DESIG. DESCRIPTION PART No.

IEEE MOUNTlNG HARDWARE~ cs-713

Cl,C3..C6,C8,ClO, CAP..OiuF,20%,50V,CERAMIC G-365-.01

C14,C16
Cl1 CAP,22uF,-20+100%.25V,ALUM ELEC C-3 14-22
C12.Cl3 CAP,15pF,10%,200V,CERAMIC C-406-15P
c2,c9 CAP..iuF,20%,50V,CERAMIC C-365-.1

CRi...CR6 DIODE,SILICON,l N4148 (DO-35) RF-28

J14 CONNDUAL 13-PIN-BERG CS-389-3

J15 CONN,MALE,3 PIN CS-288-3
J29 CQNN,STRAIGUT POST HEADER,3-PIN cs-533-3
J7 CONN,RIGKT ANGLE,24 PIN cs-501

P16 CONN,FEMALE,B PIN.ETM MNT CS-618-8

RI ,I32 RES.100,5%,1/4W.COMPOSlTlON OR FILM R-76-100

R10,P.I 1 RES NET,82,5%,.25W TF-141
R3 RES,38.3K.l%,118W,METAL FILM R-88-38.3K
Ff4 RES,909K,l%.l/BW,METAL FILM R-88-909K
R5 RES.9.09K.l%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-9.09K
R6 RES.1M,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-1 M
R7 RES NET,3.3K,5%,1.25W TF-140
R8 RES NET,3.3K,2%,.6W TF-101

Ul lC,lO INPUT AND-OR-INVERT ARRAY,PALiOL8 IC-579

UlO IC.8 BIT MICROPROCESSING UNIT,68B09 LSI-65
Ull,U12 lC.8 CHANNEL SOURCE ORIVER.UON2585 IC-405
u13,u14 IC,HEX INVERTER74HCO4 IC-354
UlS,U16 IC,OCTAL EDGE TRIG FLIP FLOP,74HCT374 IO-397
u17 IC,QUAD 2-INPUT NOR GATE 74AHCT02 IC-510
u2 IC.MICROPOWER BIPOLAR MONOLITHIC,6728 IC-177
u20 IC,PROGRAMMABLE E2ROM 2816A LSI-83
u3 I&DUAL 4 BIT COUNTER,74HCT393 IC-462
U4 IC,32Kx8 EPROM,27C256 A199-800.’
u5 IC,GPIB ADAPTER,9914A LSI-49
U6 IC,OCTAL INTERFACE BUS.75160 IC-298
u7 IC,OCTAL INTERFACE BUS TRANSCEIVER.75161 IC-299
U8 IC,VERSATILE INTERFACE ADAPTER,G65SC22 LSI-86
u9 IC,(8KX8) HI SPEED STATIC CMOS RAM,6264 LSI-66

w3 JUMPER J-15

Yi CRYSTAL.8.0000MHZ CR-24-1

‘Order level of firmware in unit

OOL-661 ‘ON ‘firna ‘fiU!MWa uolle30-1 weuodluo3 ‘PJpOg le1!6!a ‘E-L +2Jn6y
I
-
Ll-
-
3ltK.l ‘ON3 NOISInXl ‘ON 033 ‘&Ill
a I 0 I m , a
?!
sl
ii
TABLE 7-3. ANALOG BOARD, PARTS LIST

CIRCUIT KEITHLEY
DESIG. DESCRIPTION PART NO.

ANALOG SHIELDUPPER c199-312

FUSE CARRIER FH-25
FlsElm-oER FH-21
HEAT SINK HS-25
ANALOG SHIELD,LOWER 8199-313
PUSHBUTrON,BROWN FOR Sl C29465-2
PUSHBUiTON,RED FOR 5.2 C29465-3

AT1 IC,DUAL CMR HIGH SPEED OPTO.HCPL-2631 IC-588

AT2 IC,OPTOCOUPLER,2601 IC-239
AT3 IC,OPTOCOUPLER,TIL117 16.362

C15..C17,C14,C2,C22,C27. CAP,.luF,20%,50V,CERAMIC C-365-.1

C3,C6,C61 ,C66,C9,
c31 GAP,150pF,5%,190V,CERAMIC C-372.150P
C32 CAP,.0047uF,10%,1OOV,POLYPROPYLENE C-306-.0047
C33,CS&.C58 CAP,lOuF,-20+100%,25V,ALUM ELEC c-314-10
c35 CAP,33pF,10%,1000V,CERAMIC C-64-33P
c3a CAP,680pF,5%,500V,POLYSTYRENE C-i38-680P
c40 CAP,.luF,10%,630V,POLYESTEA C-364-.1
c44 CAP,15uF,10%,20V,TANTALUM C-204-1 5
c45 CAP,2uF,10%,1OOV,POLYESTER c-294-2
C46 CAP,.47uF,20%,50V,POLYESTER c-350-.47
c47 CAP,luF,20%,50V,POLYESTER c-350-1
C48 VAR CAP,2.5-6pF,500V c-359
c49 CAP,7-75pF,500V,VARIABLE C-484
c53 CAP,68pF,5%,500V,POLYSTYRENE C-l 38-68~P
c59 CAP,1500uF,-20+100%,25V,ALUM ELEC c-3 14-l 500
C60 CAP,47uF,-20+100%,25V,ALUM ELEC c-3~14-47
C63,C65 CAP,680uF.-10+100%,35V,ELECTROLYTIC C-309-680
C72 CAP,lO,OOOuF.-20+30%.25V,ALUM ELEC C-342-10,000
C73,C75,C76 CAP,22pF,10%.1000V,CERAMIC C-64-22P~
c74 CAP,820p~l0%.1000V,CERAMIC C-64.820P

CRl.CR3.CRl2.CRl6 DIODE,DIFFUSED,lN414 RF-26

CR13,CA14 DIODE,SILICON,W04M RF-46
CR15 DIODE,ERIDGE,KBP02 RF-36
CFl6 DIODE,BRIDGE,PEOS RF-48
CR7 DIODE,SILICON,lN4139 RF-34
cRa..cmI DIODE,SWITCHING,lN4149 RF-60

Fl FUSE,3A,250V FU-82
F2 FUSE,.3/16A,250V,3AG,SLO-BLO FU-29

J16 CONN,MALE,tl PIN CS-338-13

J17..J25 CONN,BRASS PIN TE-110
J26 CONN,DUAL 5.PIN-BERG cs-389-4
J6 CCNN.AC RECEPTACLE cs-388

Kl ,K2 RELAY, SPST (HIGH VOLTAGE) RL-99

K3..K5 RELAY, SPST (HIGH VOLTAGE) RL-70
 01 TRANS.N-CHANNEL dlJAL FET.idP641 TG-200 (“)
Q22 TRANS.NPN TRANS,GES5818 TG-138
Q26,Q36 TRANS,N CHANNEL FE!i-,BUZ71 TG-196
Q3 SELECTION,TG-174 A199-600
Q30.Q33,Q35 SELECTION,TG-139 Al 93-663
Q37 ?RANS,N-CHANNEL MOSPOWER FET,ZN7000 TG-195
Q4 TRANS,N-CHANNEL JFET,PN5434 TG-174 (**)
QS,Q6.012.Q32,Q34 SELECTION,TG-128 A31841
Q7.Q8,Qll,Q13,Q17 TRANS,N-CHANNEL FET TG-128
Q16 SELECTION.TG-138 Al 97-600

Rl,R2,R45..R52 RES,lM,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-l M

Rl2..Rt5 RES,lOOK.l%,lW.METAL FILM R-344-l OOK
R17 RES NET.10M,1.111M.110.95K,10.101K TF-214
R20 RES NET.lOOK,2%,2.25W TF-177-3
R21 RES,lOOK,l%,l/BW,METAL FILM R-88-l OOK
R23 RES,30K.l%,1/8W R-348-30K
R24 RES.13K..l%,1/1OW,METAL FILM R-263-13K
R25 RES.lM.l%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-1M
R26 RES,ZK,1%,118W R-348-2K
R27 RES,1.002K,.1%,lIlOWN,tdETAL’FliM R-263-1.002K
R3 RES,lK,5%,1/4W,COMPOSlTlON OR FILM R-76-l K
R30 RES,.l..i%,f.SW,WIRE WOUND R-262-.1
R31 RES,22M.l0%,1/2W,FIXED-COMPOSITION R-l-22M
R32 RES,118K,.l%,l/lOW,METAL FILM R-l 68-l 18K
R33 RES,1.17M..25%,.75W.MEfAL FILM R-352-l .17M
R34 RES,20K,5%,6.5W,WIRE WOUND R-336-20K
R35 RES,9.09K,.l%,l/lOW,METAL FILM R-263-9.09K
R54 RES,32.4K,1%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-32.4K
R55,R56 RES,20K,.l%,lHOW,METAL FILM R-263-20K
R57 RES,‘,1%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-’
R58 RES.15.8K,1%,‘1ISW,METAL FILM R-88-l 5.8K
R59 RES.7.87K,l”i!,,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-7.87K
R6 RES,142,8K,.1%,118W R-176-142.8K
R60 RES.560K,5%,1/4W,COMPOSlTlON OR FILM R-76.560K
R61 RES,18.2K,1%.1/8W,METAL ~FILM R-88-18.2K
A62 RES,8.25K.l%,118W,METAL FILM R-88-8.25K
R63 RES,2K,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-2K
R64 RES,lK;1%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-348-l K
R66 RES,1.33K..1%.1HOW,METAL FILM R-263-1.33K
R67 ~~~~ RES,llK..l%.l/lOW,METAL FILM R-263-l 1K
R68(18.6K RES,MATCHED SET R-363
R69(15K)
R7 RES.996K,.l”/o,1/4W,METAL FILM R-264-996K (“)
R70 RES.6.19K,.l%,l/iOW,METAL F~ILM R-263-6.19K
R71 RES,9K,l”/&l18W,METAL FILM R-348-9K
R72 RES,lSK,l%,l/8W,METAL FILM R-88-l SK
R73 RES,14K,1%.1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-l 4K
R75 RES,10,.5%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-246-10
R76 RES.12.4K,l”~,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88-l 2.4K
R77 RES,9.76K,l%.l/aW,METAL FILM R-88-9.76K
R79 RES,220,5%,1/4W,COMPOSlTlON OR FILM R-76-220
R8 RES,7.78K..l%,l/8W R-176-7.78K (“)
R80 RES,162K.l%,1/8W,METAL FILM R-88s162K
R81 RES,7.5K,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-7.5K
R82,R85 RES,270,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-270
R83, R84 RES,360,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-360
R86 RES,330,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-330
R87 RES.470.5%,l/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-470
R&&R98 RES,lOK,5%,1/4W.COMPOSITIOi~O~R FILM R-76-1 OK
R89..R95 RES,100~,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-l OOK
R9 RES NET;lOK,2%,.25W TF-39
R96 RES.200,5%.l/4W,COMPOSlTlON OR FILM R-76-200
R97 RES,?.i8K,l%,l/BW,METAL FILM R-88-l .18K

RTl THERMISTER,250mSEC,5OOV RT-9-2

Sl SWITCH, PUSHBUlTON SW-466

s2 SWITCH.PUSHBUlTON (6 POLE) SW-466
53 SWITCH,SLIDE (DPDT) SW-476

Tl TRANSFORMER, (90-t lOV, 180-220V) TR-259

Tl TRANSFORMER (105-125V, 210-250V) TR-258

TEl ,TEZ TERMINAL TE-97-1

ui1,u13,u19 IC,22V OP-AMP.NE5534N IC-540

Ul6 SELECTED&-283 31847-l
u17 IC,DUAL 4-BIT DEC./BIN. COUNT.,74HC390 IC-500
U18 IC,DUAL 4-BIT COUNTER,74HCT393 IC-462
U2,U4,U5,U42 IC.LOW PWWOFFSET VOLT. QUAD COMP.LM339 IC-219
u20 SELECTION&-325 A196-601
UZl..U25 IC,CMOS ANALOG SWITCH.DG211 IC-320
U26 IC,18V OP-AMP,LF353N K-246
U27 IC,TRMS TO DC CONVERTER,637JD IC-352
U28 IC,DUAL JFET INPUT OP AMP.LF412 IC-504
U29..U32 IC,8-STAGE SHIFTISTR REGIST.,MCl4094BCP IC-251
u33 IC,DARLINGTON TFiANS ARRAY.ULN20003A IC-206
u43 I&QUAD 2-INPUT OR GATES,74HCOZ IC-412
u44.lJ45 IC.TRIP.2-CHAN. MULTIPLiDEMUX.,CD4053BC 16.283
U46 SELECTIONJC-165 A30167
u49 I&HEX INVERTER,74HCTO4 IC-444
u50 IC,NEG VOLTAGE REG -15V,500mA,79M15 IC-195
u51 IC,+5V VOLTAGE REGULATOR,7805 IC-93
U52 IC.POS VOLTAGE REG +?5V$OOmA,78M15 IC-194
u53 HEAT SINK,ASSY A32469-4
U6 IC,QUAD 2-INPUT NAND,74HCOO IC-351
u7,ua IC,DUAL D-TYPES FLtP-FLOP,74HC74 IC-337

VRl DIODE,ZENER 4.3V.I N5991 B DZ-81

VR2 DIODE.ZENER 6.4V.lN4579 DZ-73

Yl CRYSTAL,3.84MHz CR-13

“Matched set order 196-602

I I I
I
w

000000~
-----J:
r
0 I 0 I m I a
n
I r-l I m I a
n
clI 0
m
2
L
I m I a
 4
“,
I b
- -
- -
I 0 I a I a
0
 -..-
I t ,“” 1 I
m
TABLE 7-4. MISCELLANEOUS, PARTS LIST

KEITHLEY
DESCRIPTION PART NO.

BANANA JACK BJ-12-0

BANANA JACK BJ-12-2
BANANA JACK BJ-12-9
BNCCCNNECTCR ~~(-3-520
CAPACITOR C-64-1 ooop
CS-627
cczNNEcTcftHouslffi CS-207-3
co/m D199-308
FASTENER FA-206.~1
FRONT FOOT ASSEMBLY 706-317
FRONTPANEL 0199-301
FF4ONT PANEL OVERLAY Cl 99-309
LINE CORD co-7
LUG LU-100
MODIFIED CROSS EXTRUSION 8199.306
MODIFIED SIDE EXTRUSION c199-304
PEM STUD FA-72
FIEARBEEL 0199.302
REARFCOT 706-316
REAR PANEL Cl 99.307
SCANNER COVER PLATE A199-317
WlNDow A199-316
TABLE 7-5. Model 1992, PARTS LIST

CIRCUIT KEITHLEY
DESIG. DESCRIPTION PART No.

CABLE ASSEMBLY CA-64-l

CABLE ASSEMBLY CA-64-2
SCANNER BOARD SHIELD B1992-301

Cl,C3 CAP,lOuF,-20+100%.25V,ALUM ELEC c-314-10

C2,C4.C5 CAP..luF,20%,50V,CERAMlC C-365-.1

DIODE,SILICON,lN4148 RF-28

Jl,J2 CONN.10 PIN OPEN END HEADER CS-626-10

J30 CONN, STRAIGHT POST HEADER, 3.PIN cs-533-3

Kl ..K8 RELAY (DPST) RL-77

Pl CABLE ASSEMBLY,10 CONDUCTOR CA-32-6

Pl.P2 CONN,PLUG 10 PIN W/STRESS RELIEF CS-611-70
P29,P30 CONN,HOUSING,3-PIN cs-534-3

Ql TRANS,N CHAN MOSPOW FET,2N7000 TG-195

Rl RES,lOK.5%.i/4W.COMPOSlTlON OR FILM R-76-1 OK

R2 RES,330,5%,i/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-330
R3 RES,470,5%,1/4W,COMPOSITION OR FILM R-76-470

Ul IC,DUAL D-TYPE ~FLIP FLOP,74HC74 16-337

u2 IC,8-BIT SERIAL-IN/LTCH DRIVE,UCN-5841A 16-536
u3 IC,OPTOCOUPLER,2601 IC-239

Wl JUMPER,CIRCUlT J-15
w2 CONN, BERG, 3 PIN cs-339-3
 cl
I
0
I rn. I a
T
m r
m a
 APPENDIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE-488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII IEEE-488 Messages*

.,

0 00 NUL
1 01 SOH GTL
2 02 !?rx
3 03 Em
4 04 SDC
05 PPC
06 ACK
7 07 BEL

8 08 GET
IFi Tcr
LF

:: i: iz
l.3 OD CR
14 OE so
15 OF SI

16 10 DLE
l7 11 DC1 LLO
18 DC2
19 : DC3
20 14 DC4 DCL
NAK PPU
ii E SYN
23 17 Em

24 18 CAN SPE
25 19 xh4 SPD
26 lA SUB
27 1B
28 1c
29 1D
30 lE
31 lF EZ ~.~
l Message sent or received with ATN true.

A-l
APPENDIXA

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII IEEE-486 Messages*

32 20 MLAO
33 21 MLAl
34 22 MLA2
35 23 MLA 3
36 24 MLA4
37 25 MLA 5
38 26 MLA6

39 27 ML.47
40 28 .~MLA 8
29 MLA9
ii 2A MLA 10
43 2B MLA 11
44 2c MLA I2
45 2D MLA 13
46 2E MLA 14
47 2F MLA 15

48 30 MLA i6
49 31 MLAl7
SO MLA I0
51 z: MLA 19
34 MLA 20
z; 35 MLA 21
54 36 ~MLA22
55 37 MLA23

38 ~MLA 24
39 MLA25
3A MLA 26*
3B MLA 27
3C~ ~~MLA28
3D MLA 29
3E MLA 30
63 3F UNL

* Message sent or received with ATN true. Numbers shown represent primary address resulting
in MLA (My Listen Address).
* Model 199 default listen address.
 APPENDIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII IEEE-+8 Mesaages’

t3
A

:
D
E
F

n 47 G MTA7
H MTA8
72
73 z MT.49
74 424 MIX 10
75 4B MI4 11
76 4C~ MTAl.2
77 4D MTAl3
4E Mm 14
z 4F MTAl5

80 50 W-416
81 51
EE
iz 2: Mm 19
84 MTA 20
a5 Et MT.4 21
56 MTA22
57 MTA 23

ii 59
58 MTA 24
~MTA25
90 5A MT4 26”
91 58
92 SC
5D : MT.4 29
zi 5E n MTA 30
95 5F -. urn

* Message sent or received with ATN true. Numbers shown are primary address resulting in MTA
(My TaIk Address).
*Model 199 default talk address.

A-3
 APPENDIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE-488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII IEEE-488 Messages*

96 MSA O,Pl’-~~
97 MSA 1,PPE
98 MSA 2,PPE
99 MSA 3.PpE
100 MSA 4;Pi’E
101 MSA 5,l’PE
102 MSA 6,PPE
103 MSA i!Pl-‘E~~

104 MSA 8,PPE

105 MSA 9,PPE
106 MSA 10,l’PE
MSA 11,PPE
E3 MSA l2,Pl’E
109 MSA l3,l’PE
110 6E n MSA 14.PPE
111 6F 0 MSA l5,PPE

112 70 Pi MSA 16,PPD

ll3 n 9 MSA I7,PPD
114 72 * MSA l8,PPD
115 s MSA 19,PPD
116 cz t MSA 20,PPD
117 75 ” MSA 21,PPD
118 76 ” MSA 22,l’PD
119 77 w MSA 23,PPD

I.20 78 x MSA 24,PPD

79 Y MSA 25,PPD
E 7A MSA 26,PPD
123 MSA 27,PPD
I24 MSA 28,PPD
125 MSA 29,PPD
126 MSA 30,PPD
127 7F DEL

*Message send or received with ATN true. Numbers represent secondq address values resulting
in MSA (My Secondary Address).

A-4
 APPENDIX B

CONTROLLER PROGRAMS

The following programs have been supplied as a simple aid to the user and are not intended to
suit specific needs. Each program allows you to send a device-dependent command string to the
instrument and obtain and display an instrument reading string.

Programs for the following cor$ollers are included:

l IBM PC or AT(with National Instruments GPIB-PC IEEE-488 Interface)

l IBM PC or AT (with C+itol Equipment Corp. PC-488 Interface)
l Apple II (equipped with the Apple II IEEE-488 Interface)
l Hewlett-Packard Model 85
l Hewlett-Packard Series 200 and 3M)
l Hewlett-Packard Model 9825A
l DEC LSI 11

B-l
APPENDIX a

IBM PC OR AT (NATfONAL INSTRUMENTS GPIB-PC INTERFACE)

The following program sends a command stxing from an IBM PC OI p;T computer and displays
the instrument reading string on the cornpurer CRT The computer must be equipped with the
Nztiiond Instruments GF’BPC IEEE+%8 inferface and the DOS 20 or 3.0 operating s.ystem. The
GPIB-PC software must be instaXed and ronfigured as described in the instruction manual.

1. From the front panel, set the primary address of the Model 199 to 26.~ 1
2. With the power off, connect then Model 199 to the IEEE-488 interface installed in the IBM
computer.
3. Type in BASICA on the corn@% keyboard to get into the IBM interpretive BASIC language.
4. Place the~interface software disk in the default drive, type LOAD”DECL” : and pr%s the return
J-Y.
5. Add the lines below to the declaration file; also modify the address in lines 1 and 2, as described
in the GPIB-PC instruction manual.
6. Run the program and type in the desired comnitid string. For example, to place the in&u-
ment in the ACV function and autorange, type in FlRQX and press the return key.
7. The instrumetit reading~stzing will then appear on the computer screen. A typical scample is:
NACV+0.000000E+O.

2. In order for Translator to function properly, a <CR> <LFp sequence must~be added to the
end of any Translator wution string sent tothe instrument. See line 65 above for an example.

B-2
 APPENDIX B

IBM PC OR AT (CEC PC460 INTERFACE)

The following program sends a command string from an IBM PC or AT computer and displays
the instrument reading string one the computer CRT The computer must be equipped with the
Capitol Equipment Corp. PC-488 IEEE-488 interfiice. The interface card must be set to a memory
address of UOD,,, as described in the PC-488 Instruction Manual.

DIRECI?ONS

1. From the front panel, set the primary address of the Model 199 to 26.
2. With the power off, ~connect the Model 199 to the IEEE-488 interface installed in the IBM
computer.
3. Type in the program lines shown below, using~ the return key after each line.
4. Run the program and type in the desired command string at the command string prompt. For
example, to place the instrument in the ACV function and autorange, type in FIROX and press
the return key.
5. The instrument reading string will then appear on the computer screen. A typical example is:
NACV+O.O%3OOOE+O.

NOTES:

1. To convert from a string to a ‘tiutieric”variable, modify the program as follows:

2. For use with a card memory address other than C400,, modify the DEF SEG statement in line
I!3 accordingly. &r example, with a card memory address of CooOH,line 10 should be modified
as follows:

3. In order for Translator to function properly, a <CR> sequence should be added to the end
of any string sent to the Model 199. See the example is line 65 above.

B-3
 APPLE II (APPLE II IEEE-488 INTERFACE)

The following program sends a command shing to the Model 199 from ati Apple II computer
and displays the instrument reading strin~~tin the computer CRT.

The computer must be equipped with the Apple II IEEE-88 Interface installed in slot 3,

DIRECTIONS

‘L From the front panel, set the primary address~of the Model 199 to 26.
2. With the power off, connect the Model 199 to the IEEE-488 interface installed in the Apple II
computer.
3. Enter the lines in the program below, using the RETURN key after each line.
4. Run the program and type in the desired command string at the command prompt. For exam-
ple, to place the instrument in ACV and autorange, type in FIROX and press the return key.
5. The instrument reading string will then appear on the CRT. A typical display is:
NACV+O.OOOC0E+O.

PROGRAM COMMENTS ~~

I@ Z$=CHE$(26> Terminator.
29 INPClTG i r;!jFjplfiND STRING ‘7 y 5 ;R$ Prompt for and enter command string.
30 pi??+3 Set~outuut to IEEE-488 bus.
Define input from IEEE-488 bus.
Enable remote.
Address 199 to listen, send string
Line feed on.
:3CjPF,INT I~CF<DZ’7;‘$; :I,.,p,-IT<’ ‘?,:A$ Address 199 to talk, input data.
30 PRIHT 6 ~,~lT~~ Untalk the 199.
lml PF:#E1 Define output to CRT.
110 IH#O Define input from keyboard.
120 PF:IHT AB Display reading shing.
133 GrJTO 2~3 Repeat.

NOTES:

1. If conversion to numeric variable is required, make the following changes:

12’0 k=l.,qL(plIIlI(A8y5,13:‘
125 FFIHT A

2. The Apple II terminates on commas in the data string. To avoid problems, program the Model
199 for the BOG0 or BOG1 data format to eliiinate commas.
 APPENDIX B

HEWLETT-PACKARD MODEL 85

The following program sends a command string to thenModel 199 fr&n an HP-85 computer and
displays the instrument reading string on the computer CRT. The computer must be equipped
with the HP82937 GPIB Interface and an 110 ROM.

DIRECTIONS

1. Erom the front panel, set the primary address of the Model 199 to 26.
2. With the power off, connect the Model 199 to the HP82937A GPIB interface installed in the HP-85
computer.
3. Enter the lines in the program below, using the END LINE key after each line.
4. Press the HP-85 RUN key and type in the desired command string at the command prompt.
For example, to place the instrument in ACV and autorange, type in FIROX and press the END
LINE kev.
5. The im&ument reading string will then appear ~OIJ the CRT A typical display is:
NACV+O,OOOCWE+O.

PROGRAM COMMENTS

Dimension strings.
Place 199 in remote.
Prompt for command.
~~Input command string.
Address 199 to listen, send string.
Address 199 to talk, input reading.
Display reading string.
Repeat

NOTE: For conversion to numeric variable, change line 70 as follows:

B-5
APPENDIX B

HEWLETT-PACKARD SERIES 200 and 300

The following program sends a corm-iiaiid string to the Model 199 from a Hewlett-Packard Series
7.00 or 300 &nputtir atid displays the instrument reading string on the computer CRT. The com-
puter must be equipped with the HPIB Interface and BASIC 2.0, 3.0, or 4.0.

DIRECTIONS

1. From the front panel, set the primary address of the Model 199 to 26.
2. With the power off, connect the Model 199 to the HPIB interface installed in the computer.
3. Enter the computer EDIT mode.
4. Enter the lines in the program below, using the ENTER key after each line.
5. Run the program, and type in the desired command string at the command prompt. Fur emn-
pie, to place the instrument in AC%’ and autorange, type in FIROX and press the ENTER key.
6. The inshument reading string will then appear on the CRT. A typical &play is:
NACV+O.OOOCUOE+O.

Place 199 in remote.

Prompt for and input command.

Address 199 to listen, send string.
Address 199 to talk, input reading.
Display reading string.
Repeat.

NOTE: For conversicd to a ~iiuin&i? variable, change the program as follows:

B-6
 HEWLETFPACKARD MODEL 9825A

Use the following program to send a command string to the Model 199 from a Hewlett-Packard
Model 9825A and display the instrument reading string on the computer printer. The computer
must be equipped with the HF’98034A HPIB Interface and a 9872A extended I/O ROM.

DIRECTIONS

1. From the front panel, set the primary address of the Model 199 to 26.
2. With the power off, connect the Model 199 to the 98034A HPIB interface installed iii the 9825A.
3. Enter the lines in the program below, using the STORE key after each line. Line numbers are
automatically assigned by the 9fJ?A.
4. Press the 9825A RUN key and type in the desired command string at the command prompt.
For example, to place the instnunent in ACV and autorange, typein FlROX and press the CONT
key.
5. The instrument reading string will then appear on the computer print out. A typical display
is: NACV+O.KZOOOE+O.

PROGRAM COMMENTS

Dimension data strings.

Define 199 at address 26.
Place 199 in remote.
Prompt for command string.
Address 199 to listen, send string.
Address 199 to talk, input data.
Print data string on printer.
Repeat.

NOTE: For conversion to numeric variable, modify the program as follows:

B-7
 APPENDIX B

DEC LSI 11

The following program sends a command string to the Model 199 from a DEC LSI 11 minicom-
puter and displays the instrument reading string on the DEC CRT terminal. The IS1 11 must be
configured with 16K words of RAM and an IBV 11 IEEE-488 interface. The software must be con-
figured with the IB software as well as FORTRAN and the RT 11 operating system.

DIRECTIONS

1. From the front panel program feature, set the primary address of the Model 199~fo 26.
2. With the power off, connect the Model 199 to the IEG’ 11 IEEE-488 interface cable.
3. Enter the program below, using the editor under RT II and the name IEEE.FOR.
4. Compile using the FORTRAN compiler as follows: FORTRAN IEEE.
5. Link with the system and IB libraries as follows: LINK IEEE,IBLIL%
6. Type RUN IEEE and press the RETURN key.
7. The display will read “ENTER ADDRESS”.
8. Type in 26 and press the RETURN key.
9. The display will read “TEST SETLP’.
10. Type in the desired command string and press the RETURN key. For example, to program
the instrument for ACV and autorange, types in FlROX and press RETURN.
11. The instrument data string will, appear on the computer display. A typical display is:
NACV+O.OC0lOOE+O.

PROGRAM COMMENTS

TUm off lB errors.

Allow 5 error 15’s.

Allow 1 second bus timeout.
Set line feed as terminator.
Turn on remote.

Input primary address.

15 FORMAT i 1X, ( TEST SETCIFd 5 2) Prompt for command string.

CALL GETSTR (5, MSG~73: Program instrument.
CALL IESEOI (:MSGI -1,PF:ItwR;~ Address 199 to listen, send stzing.
lc? I=IBEECU (: It~F’lJT,88? PRIADEj Get data from instrument.
INPUT ‘CI+~1 :B= M
CALLPlJTSTF:~~i.INFlJT. ‘13’)
CALL IBUNT Untalk the 199.
GOTO 12 Repeat.
EW

B-8
 APPENDIX C
IEEE-488 BUS OVERVIEW

BUS DESCRIPTION

The IFEE- bus, which is also frequently referred to as

the GPlB (General Purpose Interface Bus), was designed
as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer with
a minimum number of bus lines. In keeping with this goal,
the bus has eight data lines that are used both for data and
many commands. Additionally, the bus has five rnanage-
ment lines, which are used to control bus operation, and
three handshake lines that are used to control the data byte
transfer sequence.

A typical configuration for controlled bus operation is

shown in Figure D-l. A typical system will shave one con-
troller and one or more devices to which commands are
given and, in most cases, from which data is received.
Generally, there are three categories that d:scn?oe device
operation: controller, talker, and listener.

The contdler does what its name implies: it controls other

devices on the bus. A talker sends data (usually to the con-
troller), and a listener receives data. Depending on the in-
strument, a particular device may be a talker only, a listener
only, or bath a talker and a listener. The Model 199 has
both talker and listener capabilities.

There are two categories of controllers: system controller

and basic controller. Both are able to controlother devices,
but only the system controller has absolute authority in
the system. In a system with more than one controller, only
one controller may be active at any given time. Certain
command protocol allows control to be passed from one
controller to another.

The bus is limited to 15 devices, including the controller.

Thus, any number of devices may be present on the bus
at one time. Although several active listeners may~be pre- Figure C-l. IEEE Bus Configuration
sent sinwitaneously, only one active talker may be present
on the bus, or communications would be scrambled.

C-l
APPENDIX C

A device is placed in the talk or listen mode from the con- Bus Management Lines
troller by sending an appropriate talk or listen command.
These talk and listen commands are derived from an in- The five bus management lines ensure proper interface
shument’s primary address. The primary address may control and management. These lines are used to send
have any value between 0 and 30 and is generally set by uniline commands.
rear panel switches or pmgxmmed in from the front panel
(as in the case of the Model 1%). The actual listen com-
mand value sent over the bus is derived by ORing the ATN (Attention&The state of ATN determines how infor-
primary address with $20 (the $ symbol preceding the mation on the data lines is to be interpreted.
number designates a hexadecimal, or base 16 value). For
-pie, if the primary address is 26 (the default Model IFC (Interface Clear)-IFC allows the clearing of active
199 value), the actual listen command byte value is $3A talkers or listeners from the bus.
($lA 420 = S3A). In a similar manner, the talk command
byte is derived by ORing the primary address with $40. REN (Remote Enable)-REN is used to place devices in
With a primary address of 26, the ach~al talk command byte the remote mode. Usually, devices must be in remote
would be %A ($40 + $lA = %A). before they can be programmed over the bus.

EOI (End Or IdentifykEOI is used to mark the end of

The IEEE-488 standards also include another addressing a multi-byte data transfer sequence. EOI is also used along
mode called secondary addressing. Secondary address with ATN, to send the IDY (identify) message for parallel
byte values lie in the range of $60-$7F. Note, however, that polling.
many devices, including the Model 199, do not use secon-
day addressing. SRQ (Service Request)-SRQ is used by devices to request
service from the controller.

Once the device is properly addressed, bus transmission

sequences are set to take place. For example, if an instru-
Handshake Lines
ment is addressed to talk, it will usually output its data
string on the bus one byte at a time. The~listening device
(frequently the controller) will then read this information ‘Three handshake lines that operate ixi an interlocked se-
as transmitted. quence are used to ensure reliable data transmission
regardless of the transfer rate. Generally, data transfer will
occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on
BUS LINES the bus. These handshake lines are:

DAV (Data Valid)-The source (talker) controls the state

The signal lines on the IEEE488 bus are grouped into three of DAV to indicate to any listeners when data is valid.
categories: data~lines, management~lines, and handshake
lines. The eight data lines handle bus data and many com- NRFD (Not Ready fir D&al--The acceptor (listener) con-
mands, while the management and handshake lies en- trols the state of NRFD. It is used to signal the transmit-
sure orderly bus operation. Each bus line is active low with ting device to hold off the byte transfer sequence until the
approximately zero volts representing logic 1 (true). The accepting device is ready.
following paragraphs briefly describe the operation of
these lines. NDAC (Not Bata Accepted&ND& is also controlled by
the accepting device. The state of NDAC tells the source
whether or not the device has accepted the data byte.
Data Lines

The bus uses eight data lines to transmit and receive data Figure C-Z shows the basic handshake sequence for the
in bit-parallel, byte serial fashion. These lines use the con- transmission of one data byte. This sequence is used to
vention DIOI-DI08 instead of the more’common DO-W. transfer data, talk and listen addresses, as weU as multiliie
DIOl is the least significant bit, while DI08 is the most commands.
significant bit. The data lines are bidirectional (with most
devices), and, as with the remaining bus lines, low is con-
sidered to be true.

c-2
 APPENDIX C

BUS COMMANDS

Commands associated with the IEEE-488 bus can be

grouped into the following three general categories. Refer
to Table C-l.

IJniIine CommandsThese commands are asserted by set-

ting the associated bus line true. For example, to assert
REN (Remote Enable), the REN line would be set low
&W.

MultiIine Commands-General bus commands which are

sent over the data lines with the ATN line true.

Device-dependent Commands-Commtids whose mean-

ings depend on the device in question. These commands
are transmitted via the data lines while ATN is false.

Figure C-2. IEEE Handshake Sequence

Table C-l. IEEE-488 Bus Command Summary

State of
Command Type Command ATN Lie* Comments
Uniline REN (Remote Enable) X Sets up devices for remote operation.
EOI X Marks end of transmission.
IFC (Interfack Clear) X Clears Interface.
AIN (Attention) Low Defines data bus contents.
SRQ X Controlled by external device.
Multiline
Universal iL0 (Local Lockout) Low Locks out local operation.
DCL (Device Clear) Low Returns device to default conditions.
SPE (Serial Enable) Low Enables serial polIing.
SPD (Serial PoU Disable) Low Disables serial polling.
Addressed SDC (Selective Device Clear) Low Returns unit to default conditions.
GTL (Go To Local) IDN Returns device to local.
GET (Group Execute Trigger) Low Triggers device for reading.
Unaddressed UNL (Unlisten) Low Removes all listeners from bus.
UNT (Untalk) Low Removes any talkers from bus.
Device-dependent High Programs Model 199 for various modes.

*Don’t Care.

c-3
APPENDIX C

Uniline Commands SPD~ (Serial Poll Disable)-SPD is used by the controller

to remove all devices on the bus from the serial poll mode
and is generally the last command in the seri$ polling
The five uniline commands include REN, EOI, IFC, ATN,
sequence.
and SRQ. Each command is associated with a dedicated
bus lie, which is set low to assert the command in
question.
Addressed Multiline Commands

REN (Remote Enable)-REN is asserted by the controller Addressed multiline commands are those commands that
to set up inshuments on the bus for remote operation. must be preceded by an appropriate listen address before
When REN is true, devices will be removed from the local the instrument will respond to the command in question.
mode. Depending on device configuration, all front panel Note that only the addressed device will respond to the
controls except the LOCAL button (if the device is so command. Both the command and the address preceding
equipped) may be locked out when REN is true. General- it are sent with ATN true.
ly, REN should be asserted before attempting to program
instruments over the bus. SDC (Selective Device Clear)-The SDC command per-
forms essentially the same function as DCL except that on-
EOI (End or Identify)-EOI may be asserted either by the sly the addressed device responds. Generally, instruments
controller or by external devices to identify the 1as.t~byte return to their power-up default conditions when respon-
in a multi-byte transfer sequence, allowing data words of ding to SDC.
various lengths to be transmitted.
GTL (Go To Local)-GTL is used to remove instruments
IFC (Interface Clear)-IFC is asserted by the controller to from the remote mode and place them in local. With many
clear the interface and return all devices to the talker and instruments, GTL may also restore operation of front panel
listener idle states. ~controls if previously locked out.

ATN (Attention)-The controller asserts ATN while sen- GET (GroqY Execute Trigged-GET is used to trigger
ding addresses or multiline commands. devices to perform a specific action that will depend on
device configuration (for -pie, perform a measurement
SRQ (Service Request)-SRQ is asserted by a device on sequence). Although GEX is an addressed command,
the bus when it requires service from the controller. many devices may respond to GET Without addressing.

Universal Multiline Commands Address Commands

Universal multiline commands are those commands that Addressed commands include two primary command
required no addressing as part of the command sequence. groups, and a secondary address group. ATN is true when
All devices equipped to implement these-commands will these commands are asserted. These commands include:
do so simultaneously when the commands are transmit-
ted. As with all multiline commands, these commands are
transmitted with ATN true. LAG (Listen Address Group)-These listen commands are
derived from an instrument’s primary address and are
used to address devices to listen. The actual command byte
LLO (Local Lockout)-LLO is sent to instruments to lock is obtained by ORing the primary address with 520.
out front panel or local operation of the instrument.
TAG Walk Address GroupH’he talk commands are de-
DCL (Device Clear)-DCL is used to return iiistruments rived from the primary address by ORing the address with
to some default state. Usually, devices return to their $40. Talk commands are used to address devices to talk.
power-uponconditions.
SCG (Secondary Command Gmup)-Commands in this
SPE (Serial poll Enable)-SPE is the first step in the serial group provide additional addressing capabilities. Many
polling sequence, which is used to determjne which device devices (including the Model 199) do not use these
on the bus is requesting service. ~tommands.

C-4
 APPENDIX C

Unaddress Commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that command
the-device to perform a specific action. For example, the
command string ROX is used to control the measurement
The two unaddress commands are used by the controller
range of the Model 199.
to remwe any talkers or listeners from the bus. ATN is true
when these commands are asserted.

The IEEE488 bus treats these commands as data in that

ATN is false when the commands are transmitted.
UNL &Jo&ten)-Listeners are placed in the listener idle
state by UNL.

LINT KJntalk)-Any previously commanded talkers will Command Codes

be placed in the talker idle state by UNT.
Command codes for the various commands that use the
data lines are summarized in Figure C-3. Hexadecimal and
Device-Dependent Commands and decimal values for the various commands are listed
in Table C-2.
The purpose of de-vice-dependent cornman ds wiIl depend
on instroment configuration. Generally, these commands

C-5
 1 I ,
I Is
 APPENDIXC

Table C-2. Hexadecimal and Decimal Command Table C-4. Typical Device-Dependent Command
Codes Sequence

Command Hex VaIue Decimal Value I I I I Data Bus I

GTL 01 1 ASCII Hex Decimal
SDC 04 4 1 UNL Set low ? 3F‘ 63
GET 08 8 2 LAG* Stays low 3A 58
LLO 11 3 Data Set high x G 82
DCL 14 4 Data Stays high :: 48
SPE 18 5 DZti Stays high 58 88
SPD 19 25
LAG 2Q3F~ 32-63 *Assumes primary address = 26.
TAG 40-SF 64-95
SGG 60s 96-127
UNL 3F IEEE Command Groups
UNT 5F tz

Command groups supported by the Model 199 are listed

in Table C-5. Device-dependent commands are not includ-
Typical Command Sequences
ed in this list.

For the various multiline commands, a specific bus se-

quence must take place to properly send the command. stable C-5. IEEE Command Group
In particular, the correct listen address must be sent to the
instrument before it will respond to addressed commands~.
Table C-3 lists a typical bus sequence for ~sending an ad-
HANDSHAKES COMMAND GROUP
dressed multiline command. In this in&rice, the SDC
DAC= DATA AC-ED
command is beiig sent to the instruinent. LIhX @ generally
RFD&READY FOR DATA
sent as part of the sequence to ensure that no other active
DAV= DATA VALID
listeners are present. Note that ATN is hue for both the
UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP
listen command and the SDC~&mmand byte itself.
ATN=ATIENTION
DCL=DEVICE CLEAR
IFC=INTERFACE CLEAR
Table C-3. Typical Addressed Command Sequence
LLO=I.QCAL LOCKOUT
REN=REMOTE ENABLE
SPD=SERIAL POLL~DISABLE
SPE=SERIAL POLL ENABLE
ADDRESS COMMAND GROUN
LISTEN: LAG=LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP
MLA=MY LISTEN ADDRESS
UNL=UNLISTEN
TALK: TAG=TALK ADDRESS~ GROUP
MZ%=MY TALK ADDRESS
*Assumes primary address = 26. uNT=uNTALK
OTA=Ol-HER TALK ADDRESS
ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP
Table C-4 gives a typical device-dependent command se- ACG=ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP
quence. In this instance, ATN is true while the instrument GET=GROUP EXECUTE TRIGGER
is being addressed, but it is set high while sending the GTL=GO ‘ID LOCAL
device-dependent command string. SDC=SELECTIVE CLEAR
STATUS COMMAND GROUP
RQS=REQUEST SERVICE
SRQ=SERIAL POLL REQUEST
STB=STATUS BYTE
EOI=END

C-7/C-8
 Service Form
Model No. Serial No. Date
Name and Telephone No.
Company

List all control settings, describe problem and check boxes that apply to problem.

ci Iiklittent 0~ &dog output follows display 0 Particular range or function bad; specify

0 IEEEfailure 0 Obvious problem on power-up 0 Batteries and fuses are OK

c]I Fmnt panel operational B AlI raiges or functions are bad 0~ ?hecked all cables

Display or output (check one)

c;I Drifts 0 Unable to z&

0 Unstable 0 Will not read applied inp&t
0 Overload

0 Certifi&te ofCalibration required

(attach any additional sheets as necessary) ~~

Show a block diagram of your measurement system inclujing all instrumen&~connected (whether power is turned on or not).
Also, describe signal source.

Where is the measurement being performed? (factory, control&d laboratory, out-of-doors, etc.)

What power line voltage is used? Ambient temperature? “F

Relative humidity? OhI?

Any additional information. (If special modifications have been made by the uses please describe.)